tirt10 2 en col62 fv part ltr

TIRT10_2SAP for Retail – Associate Academy

I

SAP for Industries - SAP for Retail

Date

Training Center

Instructors

Education Website

Participant HandbookCourse Version: 62Course Duration: 10 Day(s)Material Number: 50089893

An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Copyright

Copyright © 2008 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without theexpress permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

Trademarks

• Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® areregistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

• IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®,AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

• ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

• INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered trademarksof Informix Software Incorporated.

• UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

• Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks ofCitrix Systems, Inc.

• HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World WideWeb Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

• JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

• JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license fortechnology invented and implemented by Netscape.

• SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAPEarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com aretrademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries allover the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of theirrespective companies.

Disclaimer

THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLYDISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUTLIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE, INFORMATION, TEXT,GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS CONTAINED HEREIN. INNO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDINGWITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROMTHE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.

g200892903422

About This HandbookThis handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of thiscourse, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic ConventionsAmerican English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographicconventions are also used.

Type Style Description

Example text Words or characters that appear on the screen. Theseinclude field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well asmenu names, paths, and options.

Also used for cross-references to other documentationboth internal (in this documentation) and external (inother locations, such as SAPNet).

Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles ofgraphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT Names of elements in the system. These include reportnames, program names, transaction codes, table names,and individual key words of a programming language,when surrounded by body text, for example SELECTand INCLUDE.

Example text Screen output. This includes file and directory namesand their paths, messages, names of variables andparameters, and passages of the source text of a program.

Example text Exact user entry. These are words and characters thatyou enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation.

<Example text> Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that youreplace these words and characters with appropriateentries.

2008 © 2008 SAP AG. All rights reserved. iii

About This Handbook TIRT10_2

Icons in Body TextThe following icons are used in this handbook.

Icon Meaning

For more information, tips, or background

Note or further explanation of previous point

Exception or caution

Procedures

Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor'spresentation.

iv © 2008 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2008

Contents

Course Overview .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viiCourse Goals. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . viiiCourse Objectives . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . viii

Unit 1: Promotion Process ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Promotion Process .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .2

Unit 2: Planning... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Strategic Planning / Merchandise and Store Planning.. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 55Assortment Planning / Layout Workbench .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 86Open-to-Buy Planning .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 99Operational Assortment Planning and Control. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .104Slow Seller Management / Price Planning Workbench .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .124

Unit 3: Requirements Planning & Stock Allocation ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Requirements Planning .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .135Replenishment Planning.. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .150SAP Forecasting and Replenishment . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .161Pricing .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .176SAP Demand Management . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .192

Unit 4: Purchasing ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Purchase Order Management .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .213Order Optimizing.. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .234Collective Purchase Order. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .239Perishables Planning.. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .252Invoice Verification. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .264Vendor Relationship . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .273Foreign Trade .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .285

Unit 5: Logistics ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297

Warehouse Processing .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .298Inventory Management . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .341Transportation Management . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .356

2008 © 2008 SAP AG. All rights reserved. v

Contents TIRT10_2

Unit 6: Multi-Channel Retailing... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Store Connection .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .366SAP Workforce Management . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .383Customer Relationship. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .387

Unit 7: SAP Retail Store (SRS) ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395

SAP Retail Store – Introduction. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .398Store Assortment List . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .408Store Order . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .424Purchase Orders. .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .453Goods Receipt . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .465Incoming Invoice . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .479Goods Movements . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .494Physical Inventory . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .512Stock Entry . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .535Sales Processes ... . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .538Cash Balancing .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .579Expense Invoice . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .588

Unit 8: Reports in SAP Retail Store ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597

Reports in SAP Retail . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .598Allocation Tables . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .601Promotion.. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .605

Unit 9: Accessing Master Data ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609

Introduction to Master Data . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .610Article Master Data . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .621Vendor Master Data Maintenance.. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .634

Glossary ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645

vi © 2008 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2008

Course OverviewThe training courses TIRT10 (SAP for Retail - Associate Academy I) and TIRT20(SAP for Retail - Associate Academy II) both have a duration of two weeks andform the basis for the associate certification in SAP Retail. The academy takes placefor a total of four weeks.

This course contains the basic contents of course IRT310 (Master Data in SAP forRetail), SAPIRT (Function Overview in SAP for Retail), and IRT370 (SAP RetailStore). It covers both application functions and Customizing settings.

The first week of TIRT10 (SAP for Retail – Associate Academy I) covers theorganizational structures and master data in SAP Retail. These organizationalstructures must be maintained before master data, such as the article or vendor masterrecord, is created. This is also required to correctly implement all of the SAP Retailprocesses.

During the second week, the course is based on the business scenarios in the RetailSolution Map and explains the functions using a sample core process for a retailcompany. The process begins with promotion planning for stores, and demonstratesthe subsequent logistics processing, and goods distribution from the vendor throughthe distribution center to the stores.

The Planning unit describes the most important planning functions in SAP Retail inconnection with SAP NetWeaver BI (SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence).

The areas of requirements planning and stock allocation are only introduced brieflysince these are explained in greater detail in TIRT20.

The purchasing area introduces perishables planning, invoice verification, and vendorevaluation. Only the main features of purchase order management, order optimization,and seasonal procurement are discussed since these are explained in more detail inthe subsequent TIRT20 course.

Inventory management, picking, and merchandise distribution are logistics themesand are discussed in detail. Multi-channel retailing is explained in detail in courseIRT370 (SAP Retail Store), which also includes additional functions regarding thesubject of stores.

As alternatives to TIRT10 and TIRT20, to prepare for the certification check, you canalso attend the regular courses SAPIRT (5 days), IRT310 (5 days), IRT320 (5 days),IRT330 (5 days) and IRT370 (2 days).

2008 © 2008 SAP AG. All rights reserved. vii

Course Overview TIRT10_2

Target Audience

This course is intended for the following audiences:

• Organizational/IT managers

• Members of the project team

• R/3 consultants

Course Prerequisites

Required Knowledge

• A basic knowledge of retailing

• Experience of working with Windows applications

Course GoalsThis course will prepare you to:

• Gain a detailed overview of the solution offering for retailers according to theRetail Solution Map

• Learn about typical process flows in a retail company and how they can bemapped in SAP Retail

Course Objectives

After completing this course, you will be able to:

• Name the most important functions in SAP Retail

• Describe some related components and solutions that are connected to the SAPRetail solution

viii © 2008 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2008

Unit 1Promotion Process

Unit OverviewThe promotion process is an end-to-end business process that passes through allthe areas in the SAP Retail Solution Map. It begins with promotion planning andsubsequent processing. In addition to price activation, this also involves generatingan allocation table. You generate procurement documents from the allocation table.You post goods issue at your distribution center, perform merchandise distribution,and supply your stores.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

• Create a promotion and trigger the follow-on functions

• Name the most important functions of the allocation table

• Explain the advantages of merchandise distribution by means of cross-docking

• Use the merchandise distribution monitor to perform the most important stepsin merchandise distribution

• Post goods receipt

Unit ContentsLesson: Promotion Process .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .2

Exercise 1: Promotion Process.. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 27

2008 © 2008 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 1

Unit 1: Promotion Process TIRT10_2

Lesson: Promotion Process

Lesson OverviewYou plan a promotion to deliver merchandise to certain stores. You then transfer yourplanned promotion data to an allocation table, which you use to control and monitorsupplies to this store. The vendor is to deliver the articles prepackaged and they arethen to be distributed at your distribution center by means of cross-docking.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:






Business ExampleYou use a promotion to plan the initial buy allocation for a new store. You defineimportant data in the promotion, such as the desired articles, quantities, prices, andperiods. You then transfer the promotion data to an allocation table, which youcan use to control and monitor supplies to this store. The vendor is to deliver thearticles prepackaged and they are then to be distributed at your distribution center bymeans of cross-docking. You make the necessary settings and generate the follow-ondocuments from the allocation table.

The articles are delivered to the distribution center. You post goods receipt andmonitor the cross-docking process using the distribution monitor. You then post goodsissue. The merchandise is now in stock in transit. Once you have entered the goodsreceipt in the store, the merchandise is posted to the store stock.

Promotion CreationRepetition:

A continuous sample scenario demonstrates how the five areas Planning,Requirements Planning and Stock Allocation, Purchasing, Logistics, andMulti-Channel Retailing are connected.

Sample scenario Promotion Process:


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Promotion Process

Your retail company introduces a new merchandise category. You want to use apromotion to sell the new articles in this merchandise category at your stores. Youbegin with promotion planning and then start subsequent processing (Planning), forexample, to list articles, activate promotion prices, and generate allocation tables.

An allocation table (Requirements Planning & Stock Allocation) is used to distributeplanned merchandise quantities among several stores according to certain rules andto generate the necessary documents. Subsequent processing for the allocation tableinvolves generating purchase orders for the vendor and purchase orders between thedistribution center and store (stock transport orders). These documents belongto Purchasing.

Once you have posted the goods receipt in your distribution center (Logistics), youcommence merchandise distribution. The merchandise delivered is allocated to thecorresponding end consumers and goods issue is posted directly.

You now complete the sample scenario by posting the goods receipt at the store,for example, using SAP Retail Store (Multi-Channel Retailing). Sales of the newmerchandise can now begin.

Figure 1: Process Flow for Promotion Creation

Promotions can be defined as higher-level promotions or assigned to a higher-levelpromotion. A higher-level promotion is used to group the operational promotionsassigned to it according to logical criteria. Promotion processing itself is performedby the operational promotions; that is to say, subsequent processing does not takeplace for higher-level promotions.



When you assign site groups, you can choose whether to assign site groups from theclassification system or promotion-specific site groups. They differ in that local sitegroups can only be created and used within the promotion. By contrast, site groupsfrom the classification system are for all promotions. You can convert site groupsfrom the classification system to local site groups. You can also check whether sitesare repeated in the site groups assigned.

You can create discounts at article hierarchy node level in a promotion. When doingso, you can choose between percentage and absolute discounts. You can also restrictthe level of the article hierarchy node to a specific season and season year.

Figure 2: Prerequisites for Promotions

You can use the promotion type to specify promotions from a technical perspective. Itdescribes specific characteristics of the promotion and controls subsequent processingby means of default settings and indicators.



The following default data is specified for the promotion header:

• Lead- and follow up time for purchasing conditions for start and end ofpromotion sales

• Lead- and follow up days for promotion announcement for start of promotionsales

• Lead- and follow up time for article listing for start and end of promotion sales

• Lead days for goods receipt at store before start of promotion sales

• Allocation table type to control default for allocation table item category

• Application, schema, and announcement category to control output determination

• Condition type group for purchasing

• Condition type group for sales

Figure 3: Promotion Periods

You can define different validity periods for different store groups participating in thepromotion. For example, a promotion for swimwear might begin earlier and run fora longer period in stores located in warm regions than in stores located in coolerregions. If you define different validity periods for different store groups, the systemregards the entire promotion period as the period from the earliest start date to thelatest end date for all participating stores.



Generating Allocation Tables

Figure 4: Promotion Subsequent Processing

You can also execute the subsequent processing steps - listing, supply sourcedetermination, stock allocation, price activation, and announcement - by startingcorresponding reports in background processing.



Figure 5: Promotion Using Allocation Table

You can have the system generate an allocation table during subsequent processingfor a promotion.

An allocation table is a tool used by a head office to plan, control, and monitorsupplies to sites (stores, distribution centers). It is used, for example, in initialdistribution of articles, distribution of promotional goods, distribution of stocks, anddistribution of imported goods procured centrally.

You can process article distribution in dialog using the site group assigned in thepromotion. However, you can also use an allocation rule, which either contains fixedquantities or relative shares for each site in the site group.

Caution: The site group that is assigned to the allocation rule must representa superset of the site group for the promotion.

You can create allocation rules manually or generate them based on key figuresfrom the information system or from SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAPNetWeaver BI). You can do this using planning and statistical data. You can also useyour own information structures.

You can have the system generate documents for Logistics for each businesstransaction (controlled by the item category) in subsequent processing for theallocation table. You can generate stock transport orders or outbound deliveries forstock reduction. You can also generate a sales order as a follow-on document fromthe allocation table.



Figure 6: Structure of Allocation Table

The allocation table comprises the following structural elements:

The header contains information such as the allocation table number, theorganizational levels (purchasing organization and purchasing group) and a headertext.

An item is assigned to the allocation table header and contains information such asthe item category, article number, planned quantity, allocation rule or site group,allocation strategy, and status information.

A site group is assigned to an allocation table item. The site group containsinformation such as the site group number, the number of sites in the group, allocationshares, and planned quantities. You can use site groups created in the classificationsystem or within the promotion for allocation.

A site/customer is assigned to a site group. You receive information on asite/customer, such as the site/customer number, planned quantity, source of supply,and delivery dates, for each allocation table item. Each distribution center is assignedto one or more sites as a delivery site.

Information on a distribution center such as the distribution center number, plannedquantity, and external vendor, is available for each allocation table item.



Figure 7: Control Settings for Allocation Table

The allocation table type contains the following default parameters for quantitycalculation for the allocation table:

• Rounding: that is, how rounding takes place during quantity calculation forsites; you can make a setting that takes rounding profiles into consideration.

• Distribution of remaining quantities: how remaining quantities in quantitycalculation are distributed

• Whether or not minimum and maximum quantities be taken into considerationby the allocation table

The item category for the allocation table defines the business transaction. It defineswhich follow-on documents are to be generated using the allocation table. The itemcategory plays a very important role when it comes to defining the merchandise flow.

Specific item categories exist for controlling merchandise movements (merchandisedistribution) in the distribution center (cross docking, flow through) which can be usedspecifically for purchase orders that are placed with the distribution center.

You can make the generation of follow-on documents dependent on the notification.Do you want to generate follow-on documents immediately after the allocation tableis posted or wait until the notification procedure has been completed?



Figure 8: Allocation Table: Possible Business Transactions (1/5)

Direct Delivery Order:

The purchaser sends the vendor order for the sites to the external vendor. The vendoris asked to delivery the merchandise directly to the sites/customers for whom theorder was placed.

Supply source determination can only be used in this case for external vendors.




Stock reduction:

In this case, a purchase order is not placed with a vendor. The sites or customer(s)defined in the allocation table are supplied with data from the warehouse stock forthe distribution center.

Stock can be reduced using stock transfer orders or deliveries.

Supply source determination for a particular site/customer(s) is limited solely to thedefinition of a distribution center.



Figure 10: Allocation Table:Possible Business Transactions (3/5)

Purchase order via distribution center:

This can be divided into two steps:

• Step one involves placing a purchase order for a distribution center with anexternal vendor. The vendor then delivers the ordered merchandise to thedistribution center.

• Step two contains the merchandise flow from the distribution center to thestore/customer. This is triggered by a stock transfer order or delivery.




Order via distribution center with merchandise distribution:

You can plan merchandise distribution in the DC using an allocation table and thecorresponding item category. Item category CA controls merchandise distributionusing cross-docking and item category CB controls the distribution methodflow-through. When you generate follow-on documents for the allocation table, thesystem updates merchandise distribution data in the system. The data is then used laterto control merchandise distribution (cross-docking/flow-through) in the distributioncenter. These are procurement and issue documents. Procurement documents arepurchase orders for the distribution center from the external vendor. The vendorthen delivers the ordered merchandise to the distribution center. Issue documentscontrol the flow of goods from the distribution center to the stores/customers. This istriggered by stock transfer orders or deliveries. Merchandise distribution is processedin the distribution center. The distribution data is adjusted to match the quantitiesactually available at goods receipt. The merchandise is then distributed to recipientsor placed in storage. The merchandise is then moved to the goods issue zone, wherethe goods issue is then posted.




Business transactions for customer:

The business transactions third-party business, stock reduction, orders via distributioncenter with putaway, or orders via distribution center with merchandise distribution,can also be performed for customers. Additional item categories have been definedfor this purpose. The customer must be created in the system as a customer masterrecord. The system generates a sales order when generating the follow-on documentsfor the allocation table.



Figure 13: Store Communication/Notification

There are different kinds of notifications depending on the business transaction:

• Headquarters notifies the stores: Stock allocation notification, requestnotification, request notification with confirmation notification

• Headquarters notifies the distribution center: Stock allocation notificationdistribution center

In addition to these notifications, sites also receive change notifications that providethe stores with additional information about changes (quantities, delivery dates)made at a later date by headquarters. These notifications only contain the allocationtable items that were changed. Change notifications are created for stock allocationnotifications, request notifications, confirmation notifications and stock allocationnotifications for distribution centers. You can then inform your sites about theallocation of merchandise by post or by EDI (IDocs). Sites can report back theirrequested quantities (store merchandise management system).

You can define the notification form by selection the notification category indicator inthe subitems for the allocation table (for each article and site) or for each allocationtable item (for each article).

Reminder: The notification “Reminder confirmation” is intended to remind sites thatthey have not responded to a request from headquarters (for example, your requestedquantities have not been transferred).

Notifications can be printed or sent as IDocs.



Figure 14: Functions of the Allocation Table

When creating an allocation table, you can perform mass selection by articles, whichallows you to select all the articles on a certain level in the article hierarchy or inan article list.

When you create an allocation table, you can reference existing vendor orders; forexample, you can select these according to the delivery date. When creating anallocation table, you can also reference shipping notifications and contracts.

Figure 15: Functions of the Allocation Table



The function for generating follow-on documents allows you to create vendor orders(or release orders), stock transport orders, outbound deliveries, and sales orders froman allocation table. However, you can still change the recipients (stores or customers)for the allocation table after generating the vendor order follow-on document. Forexample, if a store closes, you can distribute the quantities among the other stores.This is done using the quantity distribution function.

On the other hand, if certain changes are made to a vendor order for whichan allocation table already exists, the system synchronizes the allocation tableautomatically. The changes that trigger synchronization are changes to the deliverydates for the DC, changes to the DC, changes to quantities or units of measure, and thedeletion of purchase order items. This synchronization only takes place if follow-ondocuments have not been created for the recipients (stock transfer orders, outbounddeliveries, and sales orders).

Figure 16: Allocation table list

Allocation tables are listed according to specific selection criteria in an allocationtable list. For example, you can specify the elements in the article hierarchy (hierarchyID and hierarchy nodes), the merchandise category, and the article as selectioncriteria. You can also select by the relevant sites, vendors, or by vendor orders alreadygenerated.



You can access change or display mode for a selected allocation table from the articlelist. You can access the article master directly from the detailed view of allocationtable item(s). Depending on the notification category of the allocation table, you canaccess the item overview for the allocation table from the list, so as to enter requestedand confirmed quantities for each site.

The Creating Application column indicates how the allocation table was created.A signifies a promotion, B perishables planning, C merchandise and assortmentplanning, D dialog, and E detailed assortment planning.

Generating Follow-On Documents for the AllocationTableFollow-on documents are generated from the allocation table according to the itemcategory. When this takes place, distribution data is updated in the system and is thenused to control the flow of goods in the distribution center after goods receipt. If theallocation table is created with a link to a purchase order or a shipping notification, aprocurement document already exists, meaning that issue documents are generatedas follow-on documents.

Figure 17: Allocation Table with Cross-Docking



Once you have planned merchandise distribution in the allocation table (itemcategory), you generate the follow-on documents. First, standard purchase ordersare generated.

Figure 18: Process Flow for Merchandise Distribution

Planned merchandise distribution among n stores results in n standard single-storepurchase orders, which are all grouped under a collective number. This number isdisplayed in the details on the allocation table. An important feature of generatedstandard purchase orders is that main items and subitems are displayed in the itemoverview. One subitem is created for a main item. In the Display Purchase Ordertransaction, the recipient for the subitem is displayed on the SLS tab page, but isdisplayed in the Service Data column in the item and schedule line data in seasonalprocurement.

The issue documents (stock transport orders or outbound deliveries) are then generatedas follow-on documents for the allocation table in a second step. While doing this, thesystem updates the distribution data, which forms the link between procurement andissue documents.



Figure 19: Follow-On Documents

The most important procurement documents that you can generate as follow-ondocuments from an allocation table are the standard purchase order and stock transportorder. Purchase orders are usually requests from a purchasing organization to a vendorto deliver a certain quantity of merchandise at a certain time.

The document type controls the structure of purchasing documents. These arebasically subdivided into three areas: the document header, the item overview, and theitem details. Each document can have one header and several items.

The document header contains the data that applies to the entire document, and theitem overview lists the merchandise for procurement. In a purchase order, data on thevendor and document number are included in the purchase order header, while theindividual items indicate the article number and purchase order quantity.

Item details contain additional information on an item; these are not directly relatedto the procurement data on the item. Additional data includes SLS data (such as therecipient and recipient quantity) and purchase order history of an item, which containinformation on previous goods and invoice receipts for the item.



Merchandise Distribution

Figure 20: Merchandise Distribution: Push

In push, the flow of goods begins with the external vendor, who delivers prepackedmerchandise to the distribution center. The merchandise is transported directly fromthe goods receipt area to the goods issue area without putaway so that it can be bookedout. The merchandise is now en route to the recipients (stores). This process istermed cross-docking. It can be performed using an allocation table, but also usingthe price-shop report (planning element for procurement documents in operationalassortment planning and control) or using collective purchase orders.



Figure 21: Merchandise Distribution: Control

The site distribution profile is used to define the basic characteristics of a site formerchandise distribution:

• Do you plan to use cross-docking/flow-through at the site?

• Do you want to use picking for deliveries in cross-docking?

You can define the times for adjusting distribution data for each business process(push, pull, returns), for example:

• Goods receipt

• Goods receipt, checking size of variance

• Manual

You can also define the times for the generation of follow-on documents (outbounddelivery, distribution order), for example:

• Goods receipt

• After adjustment

• Manual

The article distribution profile primarily defines the processing method and thequantity adjustments that are made at goods receipt. The assignment of the distributionprofile to the article (logistics data view) is a prerequisite for using the merchandisedistribution functions for the article.



Figure 22: Process Flow for Cross-Docking

The processing phase takes place in the distribution center at which the merchandiseordered is delivered by the vendor. When goods issue is posted, the distribution data isadjusted according to the actual quantities and the merchandise is distributed amongthe recipients. The merchandise is then sent to the goods issue area, where goodsissue are then posted. Since the merchandise is delivered prepacked, picking is notrepeated at the distribution center.

The stock transport orders (= purchase orders from store to distribution center)generated from the allocation table are related to the standard purchase order generatedand are displayed together in the distribution monitor. One stock transport order isdisplayed for each standard purchase order.

The vendor delivers the articles ordered to the distribution center.



Figure 23: Processing Merchandise Distribution: Cross-docking

The merchandise arrives at GR for the distribution center and can be posted to across-docking storage location. Deliveries are then generated, and picking is notrequired.

Pre-Picked Cross-Docking:

For pre-picked cross-docking, the vendor must be told the quantities ordered bythe individual recipients. This is mapped in the system using the SLS function(Supplementary Logistic Services).

In the case of non-mixed packages, the recipients (customer/store) may not alwaysreceive complete packages. For this reason it is also possible for the vendor to pre-pickthe goods. The vendor creates packages, which are already picked by the vendor foreach recipient, but are actually delivered to the recipient from the distribution center.These packages can therefore contain different articles.




These packaged articles are not repacked between processing at goods receipt andgoods issue in cross docking.


Outbound deliveries are generated from the stock transport orders. Finally, thepackaged articles are transported to the goods issue zone and goods issue is posted.



Goods Receipt at the Store

Figure 26: Posting Goods Receipt at Store



Exercise 1: Promotion Process

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:

• Plan a promotion

• Perform subsequent processing for the promotion; execute listing and supplysource determination, activate prices, and generate an allocation table

• Generate the follow-on documents standard purchase order and stock transportorder for the allocation table

• Post goods receipt for a standard purchase order

• Process merchandise distribution with cross-docking using the merchandisedistribution monitor at the distribution center

Business ExampleBecause a new store will be opened in the near future, you plan a promotion for certainarticles. You use the allocation table for merchandise procurement and supply andgenerate standard purchase orders and stock transport orders as follow-on documents.

An external vendor delivers the merchandise to your distribution center, and youpost the goods receipt and then perform merchandise distribution. After goods issueposting, the merchandise is on its way to the new store. Once you have posted goodsreceipt, the merchandise can be put on sale.

Task 1: Creating a PromotionYou want to plan a promotion in SAP Retail because a new store will open in thenear future.

1. Create a promotion with promotion type 0002. Call your promotion Openingand specify USD as currency. Your promotion is to run in the first two weeks(1st - 15th) of the month after next.

You want to schedule your articles in the merchandise categories RF12211(Handbags) and RF12222 (Plastic Frames). To do this, choose Insert Items.Enter these two merchandise categories in the article selection, and enter thearticles R1TA1*##. Then choose [Execute].

You return to the fast entry screen. Delete all items except for the following,and add the following data:

Continued on next page



Article SUn Pld sales qty Plnd Crrncy

R1TA11## EA 400 USD

R1TA12## EA 1200 USD

Caution: Note that the articles may be displayed in a different sequence.

2. Go to the header data for the promotion and indicate that you belong topurchasing group R30 in the purchasing organization R300. Save yourpromotion and write down your promotion number:

______________________________

3. The promotion is to take place at your stores R1## and R2##. These are groupedtogether in a site group. It has the key PROM_SG##. Check which sites areassigned to this site group. How do you do this?

4. On the Quantity planning tab page, plan distribution of the article quantitiesusing an allocation table. You can define the distribution in an allocation rule.Use the F4 help to find the allocation rule. Which allocation rule does the systempropose? What does this rule indicate?

5. In the Quantity planning overview, select both rows and the Alloc. tbl qtycolumn, and use the Mass Maintenance function. Make the following settings:

Field Name or Data Type Values

Amount Blank

Percentage 10

+/- sign +

Base Planned sales qty

Allocation unit Explicit output in CSE

Confirm by selecting [Execute]. To control the business transaction, checkwhether the system proposed item category CA (Purchase order via DC -cross-docking) for both items. Save your promotion.




Task 2: Promotion Subsequent ProcessingAfter planning your promotion, you want to trigger subsequent steps in a specificorder. This includes the automatic listing of the selected articles for the sites of thepromotion.

1. To do this, access the Listing overview from promotion subsequent processing.Carry out the listing and save your promotion.

2. As the second step in the subsequent processing for promotions, run supplysource determination for both articles. Then check to make sure that bothstore R1## and store R2## are supplied by distribution center R7##. Saveyour promotion.

3. Activate the prices for your promotion. To do this, go to the Price activationoverview. Select both items and run price activation. In the dialog box thatappears, choose Background price calc.. Save your promotion.

4. In the next step, generate an allocation table. To do this, go to the Allocationtable generation overview. Check whether the default data for the allocationhas been copied from the promotion correctly. Select both items and choosethe pushbutton for generating the allocation table with an allocation rule. Inthe dialog box that appears, enter 1 day as the lead time for goods receipt atthe distribution center.

Caution: If you receive warnings indicating that the delivery date tothe stores is not a business day, confirm the messages and continue.(Note: You can, however, remove the warning by leaving subsequentprocessing for promotions without saving your data and by changingthe goods receipt date for the site group in promotions planning. Thenreturn to subsequent processing for the allocation table and generatethe allocation table again.)

Note down the number of the allocation table you have generated and saveyour promotion.

______________________________




Task 3: Generating Follow-On Documents for theAllocation TableNow generate the follow-on documents for your allocation table.

1. Choose Environment→ Allocation table→ Display to switch from the displayversion of your promotion to the display of the generated allocation table. Selectone item at a time and go to the site view. Which quantities are assigned tothe individual stores?

Site Planned quantity forR1TA11##

Planned quantity forR1TA12##

R1##

R2##

2. Go from the item overview of the allocation table to the detail view for thedistribution center and check the processing method for the purchase order.Check whether the purchase order is a single-recipient order.

3. Generate the follow-on documents for your allocation table (vendor orders andstock transport orders).

Note down the number of the vendor orders you generated:

______________________________

4. View the first one of the vendor orders that were generated. What do you notice?

5. Access the menu for generating follow-on documents again and create stocktransport orders. Note down the numbers of the stock transport orders yougenerated:

______________________________

6. Display one of the stock transport orders that have been generated. What doyou notice?




Task 4: Merchandise DistributionThe merchandise ordered from an external vendor arrives at your distribution center.You post the goods receipt and then perform merchandise distribution. Before you doso, check the necessary settings in the article and site master, so that you can use thecross-docking procedure to distribute the merchandise.

1. First take a look at the vendor orders you generated. To which site are thearticles to be delivered? At which storage location do you want to processthe goods receipt?

2. Before merchandise distribution, check that the additional SLS (RT211131Supplementary Logistics Services) is entered in the additional data for the articlemaster data on R1TA11## and R1TA12##. Which method is selected?

3. Now check the distribution profile for your distribution center. In your R7##distribution center, the distribution profile 004 (Adjustment & Doc. Manually)must be entered in the Purchasing/Distribution view.

4. The complete merchandise is first delivered to distribution center R7##. Post thegoods receipt for both vendor orders.

5. After goods receipt at the distribution center, this goods receipt quantity isdistributed to the stock transport order(s). In a second step, the follow-ondocuments are generated.

To do this, go to the merchandise distribution monitor. Display the merchandisedistribution for your distribution center R7## and your vendor orders fromtask 3 (Generating Follow-on Documents for the Allocation Table), no. 3. UseLayout/SAPIRT.

How do you identify that no adjustments have yet been made?

6. From the distribution monitor, go to goods receipt adjustment. To do this, selectthe items in your vendor order(s). They are highlighted in red. What quantitiesof merchandise for the two articles have been planned for cross-docking?

Save the entire distribution.

Article Proposed CD quantity Unit

R1TA11##

R1TA12##




7. After adjusting merchandise distribution, you return to the distribution monitor.What has changed?

8. The next step to generate follow-on documents. They represent outbounddeliveries that document the distribution of merchandise from the distributioncenter to the stores.

Access follow-on document generation from the distribution monitor. To do this,select the items in your stock transport order(s) (white) from task 3 (GeneratingFollow-on Documents for the Allocation Table, no. 4).

The system generates the outbound deliveries in the background. Based onthe purchase order history (tab page in a purchase order), you can take a lookat your stock transport order to see if an outbound delivery has already beengenerated and, if so, which document type, number and other information havebeen assigned.

9. Look at one of your outbound deliveries. Which storage location has been foundfor picking the individual items? What is the picking status of the article items?How does this influence how your delivery is processed?

Remain in your outbound delivery.

10. Post the goods issue from within your outbound delivery.

Then return to the distribution monitor and refresh its display. Access the displayof one of your stock transport orders again. What do you find?




Task 5: Posting Goods Receipt at StoreThe goods issue for your distribution center has been posted, and the goods are ontheir way to the store.

1. To complete the process, you need to post the goods receipt for both articles instore R1## (or store R2##).

Caution: You can post a goods receipt at a store only if you havepreviously posted the goods issue for the corresponding stock transportorder.



Solution 1: Promotion Process

Task 1: Creating a PromotionYou want to plan a promotion in SAP Retail because a new store will open in thenear future.

1. Create a promotion with promotion type 0002. Call your promotion Openingand specify USD as currency. Your promotion is to run in the first two weeks(1st - 15th) of the month after next.

You want to schedule your articles in the merchandise categories RF12211(Handbags) and RF12222 (Plastic Frames). To do this, choose Insert Items.Enter these two merchandise categories in the article selection, and enter thearticles R1TA1*##. Then choose [Execute].

You return to the fast entry screen. Delete all items except for the following,and add the following data:

Article SUn Pld sales qty Plnd Crrncy

R1TA11## EA 400 USD

R1TA12## EA 1200 USD

Caution: Note that the articles may be displayed in a different sequence.

a) Master Data→ Retail Promotion→ Promotion→ Create

Make your configurations as specified in the task. The sales prices ofthe two articles are determined automatically. The data comes from thearticle master record. The prices are USD 8.99 for R1TA12## and USD8.59 for R1TA11##.

2. Go to the header data for the promotion and indicate that you belong topurchasing group R30 in the purchasing organization R300. Save yourpromotion and write down your promotion number:

______________________________

a) Goto→ Header Data

Choose the Planning tab page. Make your settings as specified in the task.

b) Choose Promotion→ Save. Your promotion number appears in the statusbar.




3. The promotion is to take place at your stores R1## and R2##. These are groupedtogether in a site group. It has the key PROM_SG##. Check which sites areassigned to this site group. How do you do this?

a) Master Data→ Retail Promotion→ Promotion→ Change

Choose [Enter].

Go to the Site groups tab page and enter site group PROM_SG##.Double-click the site group to display the sites assigned to it. These arethe two stores R1## (Store GR## Philadelphia) and R2## (Store GR##Wilmington). Return to the promotion overview.

4. On the Quantity planning tab page, plan distribution of the article quantitiesusing an allocation table. You can define the distribution in an allocation rule.Use the F4 help to find the allocation rule. Which allocation rule does the systempropose? What does this rule indicate?

a) Go to the Quantity planning tab page. Choose the allocation rule ARAK##for both items.

b) Select at least one of your items and choose Environment→ AllocationRule→ Display. Enter your allocation rule ARAK## and confirm byselecting [Enter]. The Base site group column displays your site groupPROM_SG##. Select this line and choose Goto→ Sites. This allocationrule uses the quota category A, which means that the quantity to beallocated is allocated to the sites concerned at a defined ratio. The ratiobetween the stores R1## and R2## is 2:1.

Then return to your promotion overview.

5. In the Quantity planning overview, select both rows and the Alloc. tbl qtycolumn, and use the Mass Maintenance function. Make the following settings:


Amount Blank

Percentage 10

+/- sign +

Base Planned sales qty

Allocation unit Explicit output in CSE




Confirm by selecting [Execute]. To control the business transaction, checkwhether the system proposed item category CA (Purchase order via DC -cross-docking) for both items. Save your promotion.

a) Stay in the Quantity planning overview and make the settings as specifiedin the task. The system calculates 110 cases as allocation table quantityfor article R1TA11## and 220 cases as allocation table quantity for articleR1TA12##.

b) Choose Promotion→ Save.

Task 2: Promotion Subsequent ProcessingAfter planning your promotion, you want to trigger subsequent steps in a specificorder. This includes the automatic listing of the selected articles for the sites of thepromotion.

1. To do this, access the Listing overview from promotion subsequent processing.Carry out the listing and save your promotion.

a) Master Data→ Retail Promotion→ Promotion→ Subseq. Processing

If the data is not already displayed by default, enter the number of yourpromotion. Choose [Listing]. Confirm the message that appears, statingthat listing is to be generated automatically (a promotion module isgenerated). Go back and save your promotion.

2. As the second step in the subsequent processing for promotions, run supplysource determination for both articles. Then check to make sure that bothstore R1## and store R2## are supplied by distribution center R7##. Saveyour promotion.


If the data is not already displayed by default, enter the number of yourpromotion. Choose [Supply source determination]. Select both items andchoose [SS proposal]. To check, choose [Change SS] for each item. Foreach store, the distribution center R7## is proposed in the Vendor column.Go back and save your promotion.




3. Activate the prices for your promotion. To do this, go to the Price activationoverview. Select both items and run price activation. In the dialog box thatappears, choose Background price calc.. Save your promotion.


If the data is not already displayed by default, enter the number of yourpromotion. Choose [Price activation]. Select both items and choose[Activate prices]. You can select the periods for price activation in thedialog box. Choose the button as specified in the task, and save yourpromotion.

4. In the next step, generate an allocation table. To do this, go to the Allocationtable generation overview. Check whether the default data for the allocationhas been copied from the promotion correctly. Select both items and choosethe pushbutton for generating the allocation table with an allocation rule. Inthe dialog box that appears, enter 1 day as the lead time for goods receipt atthe distribution center.

Caution: If you receive warnings indicating that the delivery date tothe stores is not a business day, confirm the messages and continue.(Note: You can, however, remove the warning by leaving subsequentprocessing for promotions without saving your data and by changingthe goods receipt date for the site group in promotions planning. Thenreturn to subsequent processing for the allocation table and generatethe allocation table again.)

Note down the number of the allocation table you have generated and saveyour promotion.

______________________________


If the data is not already displayed by default, enter the number of yourpromotion. Choose [Allocation table generation overview] and make yoursettings as specified in the task. The generated allocation table numberappears in the Allocation table column. Save your promotion.




Task 3: Generating Follow-On Documents for theAllocation TableNow generate the follow-on documents for your allocation table.

1. Choose Environment→ Allocation table→ Display to switch from the displayversion of your promotion to the display of the generated allocation table. Selectone item at a time and go to the site view. Which quantities are assigned tothe individual stores?



R1##

R2##

a) Promotion→ Display,Environment→ Allocation table→ Display

Go to the site view as specified in the task. The following quantities aredisplayed:



R1## 73 CSE 147 CSE

R2## 37 CSE 73 CSE

Next, return to the item overview of the allocation table.




2. Go from the item overview of the allocation table to the detail view for thedistribution center and check the processing method for the purchase order.Check whether the purchase order is a single-recipient order.

a) Promotion→ Display,Environment→ Allocation table→ Display

Select one item at a time and go to the detail view for the distributioncenter (Goto→ Distribution Centers→ Distribution Centers in Item). Thesystem issues the following message for item 10: 1 distribution centermaintained for item 00010

The distribution center R7## is determined for both items. Next, select therow and choose Goto→ Distribution Centers→ Details. The desireddata is displayed on the Control tab page. The processing method is 2 =Cross-docking. A special cross-docking storage location is found, and thepurchase orders are single-recipient orders.

Exit the item overview for the allocation table and the promotion.

3. Generate the follow-on documents for your allocation table (vendor orders andstock transport orders).

Note down the number of the vendor orders you generated:

______________________________

a) Purchasing→ Allocation→ Allocation Table → Create Follow-onDocuments

In the Doc. Cats section, choose Vendor Purchase Orders. On the GeneralCriteria tab page, enter the number of the allocation table you havegenerated (from task 2 (Subsequent Processing for Promotions), no. 4). Donot enter a date here. If a date is proposed by the system, delete it.

Switch to the Vendor Purchase Order tab page and check whether Gen.Seasonal is selected. Choose [Execute], select all rows, and then choose[Generate Documents]. The system generates two vendor orders, but onlydisplays the first one in this list.

4. View the first one of the vendor orders that were generated. What do you notice?

a) Double-click the generated purchase order number to access the displayof the purchase orders from seasonal procurement. This is a single-storepurchase order.This means that there are main item(s) and subitem(s) in theitem overview. One subitem is created for a main item.




5. Access the menu for generating follow-on documents again and create stocktransport orders. Note down the numbers of the stock transport orders yougenerated:

______________________________

a) Purchasing→ Allocation → Allocation Table → Create Follow-onDocuments

In the Doc. Cats section, choose Warehouse Orders. On the GeneralCriteria tab page, enter the number of the allocation table you havegenerated (from task 2 (Subsequent Processing for Promotions), no. 4). Donot enter a date here. If a date is proposed by the system, delete it.

Go to the Warehouse Order tab page, delete the indicator for generatingreturn items and set the indicator to generate separate orders for each site.

The Follow-On Document Generation Allocation Table dialog box displaysthe data to be distributed from the allocation table. Select all rows andchoose [Generate Documents]. Two stock transport orders are generatedand displayed. Note down the numbers of your stock transport orders:

____________________________

____________________________

6. Display one of the stock transport orders that have been generated. What doyou notice?

a) Double-click the generated purchase order number to access the purchaseorder display. The Site column displays the recipient. It is one of thestores R1## or R2##. Your supplying site is distribution center R7##.The item category of the two items in the purchase order is therefore U(stock transfer).




Task 4: Merchandise DistributionThe merchandise ordered from an external vendor arrives at your distribution center.You post the goods receipt and then perform merchandise distribution. Before you doso, check the necessary settings in the article and site master, so that you can use thecross-docking procedure to distribute the merchandise.

1. First take a look at the vendor orders you generated. To which site are thearticles to be delivered? At which storage location do you want to processthe goods receipt?

a) Purchasing→ Purchase Order→ Purchase Order→ Display

Choose the Other Purchase Order button. Enter the purchase order numberof the vendor orders from task 3 (Generating Follow-on Documents for theAllocation Table), no. 3. Confirm with [Enter].

Hint: You can also use the F4 help to search for your vendororder. Search for vendor R1TV12## and choose a document withthe highest end number.

In the Item overview, the Site column displays the responsible distributioncenter, and the Stor. Location column displays the cross-docking storagelocation 0006. Exit the purchase order display.

2. Before merchandise distribution, check that the additional SLS (RT211131Supplementary Logistics Services) is entered in the additional data for the articlemaster data on R1TA11## and R1TA12##. Which method is selected?

a) Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Display

Enter the article number R1TA11## or R1TA12## and select the BasicData view. Confirm with [Enter]. On the Basic Data screen, choose[Additional Data] and then the Additionals tab page. There is one entry;the additional is called RT211131, and the assigned procedure is 0005 =SLS: Prepacking. Exit the article master.

3. Now check the distribution profile for your distribution center. In your R7##distribution center, the distribution profile 004 (Adjustment & Doc. Manually)must be entered in the Purchasing/Distribution view.

a) Master Data→ Site Data→ Site→ Display

Confirm with [Enter]. Choose the Purchasing/Distribution tab page. Thedistribution profile 004 (Adjustment & Doc. manually) is assigned. Exitthe site master.




4. The complete merchandise is first delivered to distribution center R7##. Post thegoods receipt for both vendor orders.

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Goods Receipt→ Goods Receipt For PurchaseOrder

Enter the following data on the initial screen, and then confirm with[Enter]:


Movement Type 101

Purchase Order(s) Purchase order numbers of vendororders from task 3 (GeneratingFollow-on Documents for theAllocation Table), no. 3

Site R1## or R2##

Storage Location Blank

Conform the data from the selection screen and choose [Adopt + Details].The system issues the following message for each item:

Check Service SLS: Prepacking.

Confirm the message with [Enter]. Choose Goods Receipt→ Post.

5. After goods receipt at the distribution center, this goods receipt quantity isdistributed to the stock transport order(s). In a second step, the follow-ondocuments are generated.

To do this, go to the merchandise distribution monitor. Display the merchandisedistribution for your distribution center R7## and your vendor orders fromtask 3 (Generating Follow-on Documents for the Allocation Table), no. 3. UseLayout/SAPIRT.




How do you identify that no adjustments have yet been made?

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Merchandise Distribution→ Distribution→Monitor


Distribution Center R7##

PO number Vendor orders from task 3(Generating Follow-on Documentsfor the Allocation Table), no. 3

Document types Select all

Display variant /SAPIRT

Choose Program→ Execute. Expand the individual items. No adjustmentshave yet been made, since the Act. pro Unit or Act. iss Unit is not yetdisplayed for the individual items (they still have the value 0).

6. From the distribution monitor, go to goods receipt adjustment. To do this, selectthe items in your vendor order(s). They are highlighted in red. What quantitiesof merchandise for the two articles have been planned for cross-docking?

Save the entire distribution.

Article Proposed CD quantity Unit

R1TA11##

R1TA12##

a) Choose the Adjust button. The CD quantity column contains thecross-docking quantities for each of the stock transport items for the articleconcerned. Choose Goto→ Next procurement item to go to the next item.

Article Proposed CDquantity

Unit

R1TA11## 73/37 CSE

R1TA12## 147/73 CSE

Choose Distribution→ Save→ Total. The system issues the followingmessage: Distribution adjusted. Follow-on documents created in linewith settings.




7. After adjusting merchandise distribution, you return to the distribution monitor.What has changed?

Answer: The CD quantity column contains the cross-docking quantities for eacharticle and for each stock transport item.

8. The next step to generate follow-on documents. They represent outbounddeliveries that document the distribution of merchandise from the distributioncenter to the stores.

Access follow-on document generation from the distribution monitor. To do this,select the items in your stock transport order(s) (white) from task 3 (GeneratingFollow-on Documents for the Allocation Table, no. 4).

The system generates the outbound deliveries in the background. Based onthe purchase order history (tab page in a purchase order), you can take a lookat your stock transport order to see if an outbound delivery has already beengenerated and, if so, which document type, number and other information havebeen assigned.

a)

Hint: The distribution monitor displays the stock transport ordersonly if you have expanded the items.

In the distribution monitor, select the two stock transport orders (white)and choose [Generate deliveries]. The system generates the follow-ondocuments and issues the following message: Outbound orders are/wereposted.

Double-click on a stock transport order (white) to access the display of thecorresponding purchase order. On the Purchase Order History tab page,you can see that an outbound delivery has been generated.




9. Look at one of your outbound deliveries. Which storage location has been foundfor picking the individual items? What is the picking status of the article items?How does this influence how your delivery is processed?

Remain in your outbound delivery.

Answer: Double-click on one of your outbound deliveries. Choose the Pickingtab page. Storage location 0006 (cross-docking storage location) was found.

Go to the Status Overview tab page. The picking status for the delivery itemsis not relevant. This means that the goods issue for this delivery can be postedimmediately without first having to run picking in the warehouse for thedistribution center.

10. Post the goods issue from within your outbound delivery.

Then return to the distribution monitor and refresh its display. Access the displayof one of your stock transport orders again. What do you find?

a) Use the Display - Change button to go to the change mode for youroutbound delivery. You post the goods issue by choosing Post GoodsIssue (or by choosing Subsequent Functions→ Post Goods Issue). Thesystem issues the following message: Replenishment delivery 8000000Xhas been saved.

b) Then return to the distribution monitor and refresh its display. TheCD quantity column no longer displays any cross-docking quantities.Double-click on a stock transport order (white) to access the display of thecorresponding purchase order. On the Purchase Order History tab page,you can see that a goods issue (GI) was posted for the outbound delivery.

Task 5: Posting Goods Receipt at StoreThe goods issue for your distribution center has been posted, and the goods are ontheir way to the store.

1. To complete the process, you need to post the goods receipt for both articles instore R1## (or store R2##).




Caution: You can post a goods receipt at a store only if you havepreviously posted the goods issue for the corresponding stock transportorder.

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Goods Receipt→ Goods Receipt For PurchaseOrder

Enter the following data on the initial screen, and then confirm with[Enter]:


Movement Type 101

Purchase Order(s) Purchase order numbers of stocktransport orders from task 3(Generating Follow-on Documentsfor the Allocation Table), no. 4

Site R7##

Storage Location Blank

Conform the data from the selection screen and choose [Adopt + Details].The system issues the following message for each item: Document flow fordelivery cannot be updated.Confirm this message with [Enter]. ChooseGoods Receipt→ Post.



Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:







Unit Summary TIRT10_2

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:







TIRT10_2 Test Your Knowledge

Test Your Knowledge

1. Which settings control the characteristics of a promotion and its subsequentprocessing?

2. Which steps in subsequent processing for promotions are you familiar with?

3. An allocation table

Choose the correct answer(s).

□ A is a central instrument for monitoring and controlling procurementand/or distribution of merchandise among stores and customers

□ B can be generated from SAP MAP

□ C can generate purchase orders as follow-on documents□ D can generate sales orders as follow-on documents

4. The item category


□ A is used at header level in the allocation table

□ B is used at item level in the allocation table□ C controls which follow-on documents are to be generated for each

allocation table□ D controls which follow-on documents are to be generated for each

allocation table item


Test Your Knowledge TIRT10_2

5. Generation of follow-on documents for an allocation table


□ A depends on the item category in the allocation table header□ B depends on the item category of the allocation table item

□ C can be executed for specific sites□ D can be executed for each delivery date

6. What are the main differences between the recipient- and article-basedflow-through procedures?

7. Name the two steps for merchandise distribution and describe how they areperformed.

8. Which settings in article master data control the creation of main items andsubitems in a collective purchase order?

9. Which function allows you to monitor and control merchandise distribution?



Answers

1. Which settings control the characteristics of a promotion and its subsequentprocessing?

Answer: Period, site groups, announcement category, item category, promotiontype

2. Which steps in subsequent processing for promotions are you familiar with?

Answer: Listing, supply source determination, price activation, announcement,additionals, generate allocation table

3. An allocation table

Answer: A, B, C, D

An allocation table is a central instrument for monitoring and controllingprocurement and/or distribution of merchandise among stores and customers.It can be generated from SAP MAP. Purchase orders and sales orders can begenerated as follow-on documents.

4. The item category

Answer: B, D

The item category is used at item level in the allocation table. It controls whichfollow-on documents are to be generated for each allocation table item.

5. Generation of follow-on documents for an allocation table

Answer: B, C, D

Generation of follow-on documents for an allocation table depends on the itemcategory of the allocation table item. Generation can be executed for specificsites and delivery dates.



6. What are the main differences between the recipient- and article-basedflow-through procedures?

Answer: The merchandise is prepacked in cross-docking. Merchandise is movedfrom goods receipts to goods issue without being placed in temporary storage.

In flow-through, the merchandise is picked at the distribution center.

7. Name the two steps for merchandise distribution and describe how they areperformed.

Answer: 1. Plan merchandise distribution

2. Post goods receipt (generate documents)

8. Which settings in article master data control the creation of main items andsubitems in a collective purchase order?

Answer: This is set up in the settings for additionals (0005) under Article Data→ Basic Data→ Additional Data→ Additionals

9. Which function allows you to monitor and control merchandise distribution?

Answer: You can monitor merchandise distribution using the merchandisedistribution monitor.


Unit 2Planning

Unit OverviewThis unit introduces the most important planning options. Strategic planning is the topplanning level; this is then subdivided into merchandise and store planning. Furtherplanning levels include OTB planning and assortment planning. You will learn aboutthe most important functions of the purchasing list in operative assortment planningand control.

The section on Slow Seller Management describes markdown planning and control,and the connection to the Price Planning Workbench.


• Use important terms in SAP NetWeaver BI

• Give an overview of the BI Content for SAP MAP

• Prepare and execute simple planning of store business volume in the system

• Display general assortments belonging to assortment category C

• Display the article and store assignments to layout modules in the LayoutWorkbench.

• Assign further assortment users to layout modules using the assignment tool

• Explain the OTB planning process and the most important steps

• Explain the term OTB budget and what it entails

• Name the three key figures in operational assortment planning and their function

• Describe the structure of the purchasing list

• List the subsequent functions in operational assortment planning and control

• Distinguish between markdown planning and control

• Describe the use of the slow seller analysis

• Explain the advantages of the Price Planning Workbench and its functions


Unit 2: Planning TIRT10_2

Unit ContentsLesson: Strategic Planning / Merchandise and Store Planning .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . 55

Exercise 2: Strategic Planning / Merchandise and Store Planning .. . . . . . 77Lesson: Assortment Planning / Layout Workbench .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 86

Exercise 3: Assortment Planning / Layout Workbench .. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 93Lesson: Open-to-Buy Planning ... . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 99Lesson: Operational Assortment Planning and Control . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .104

Exercise 4: Operational Assortment Planning and Control . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 113Lesson: Slow Seller Management / Price Planning Workbench.. . . . . . . .. . . . .124


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Strategic Planning / Merchandise and Store Planning

Lesson: Strategic Planning / Merchandise and StorePlanning

Lesson OverviewThis lesson describes strategic planning and merchandise and store planning in thebusiness scenario for SAP Merchandise and Assortment Planning (SAP MAP). Thelesson begins with an introduction to analyses in SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence(SAP NetWeaver BI) to facilitate your understanding of the technical prerequisites.





Business ExampleYou want to coordinate a planning process for different areas of your retail company.Planning in SAP NetWeaver BI provides you with tools and functions you need tomap your planning processes in the system. SAP MAP also provides you with BIContent that supports many retail business processes.



Figure 27: Analysis and Planning in SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence

A data warehouse system is primarily used to provide information from different datasources. This data, information, and the resulting reports constitute the basis forsuccessful processing of business processes in a company.

Reports and analysis functions allow the user to check data for differences orinconsistencies. For example, you can use SAP NetWeaver BI in Retail to performthe following tasks:

• Monitoring the merchandise assortment to identify slow-moving and fast-sellingitems

• Performing analyses to determine the profitability of different branches

• Different branches

• Analyzing warehouse stock

• Market-basket analysis to evaluate cash register receipt data

This kind of system can be implemented for employees at all levels of a firm (forexample, manager, head of department).

SAP NetWeaver BI also contains planning functions and gives you the option ofretracting plan data to ERP systems. You use the component SAP Business Planningand Simulation to support planning processes. You can link strategic planning in SAPNetWeaver BI with operative planning in ERP (“closed-loop process”).



Sample process:

1. Extracting actual data from the ERP system

2. Using the actual data as the basis for forecasting and budget planning

3. Retraction of planned budgets to ERP

4. Repeated extraction of actual data

5. Analysis of plan/actual variances and revision of plan data, if necessary

Figure 28: SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence Architecture

SAP NetWeaver BI can be used to analyze data from operational SAP applications andother business applications, as well as from external data sources, such as databases,online services, and the Internet.

For homogenous, consistent data collection, there must be one central point fromwhich data can be called. For this reason, SAP NetWeaver BI uses a separate databasein which a standalone application environment is able to provide the services required.

It is absolutely imperative that efficient analysis techniques with clear, meaningfulmultimedia display options are available at presentation level in SAP NetWeaverBI. Simple but comprehensive preparation of the required data is all that the sourcesystem need do before transferring the data to SAP NetWeaver BI.

The system (data retention, loading processes, reporting), preconfigured by theBusiness Content for core areas and processes, allows numerous different views ofcompany-wide business.



The Administrator Workbench (AWB) is the working environment for BIadministrators. SAP NetWeaver BI is configured, controlled, and managed usingAWB functions.

There are two types of data storage. Firstly, physical data stores, which includeInfoCubes and DataStore objects, and secondly, logical views of these physical datastores.

The Business Explorer (BEx) is the SAP NetWeaver BI component that provides aflexible reporting and analysis tool for strategic analysis and support purposes. If youhave the necessary authorization, you can analyze different levels of both historicaland current data and from various perspectives, using both the Internet and MicrosoftExcel.

A DataStore is used to store data at basic level (document level). It is generally usedto clean up and consolidate datasets. Datasets are often from different data sourcesor source systems.

Figure 29: SAP NetWeaver BI: Business Content

Business Content constitutes preconfigured role- and task-related data models inSAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence that are based on consistent metadata. TheBusiness Content provides selected roles in a company with the information they needto perform their specific tasks.



These data models primarily comprise roles, workbooks, queries, InfoSources,InfoProviders, DataStore objects, key figures, characteristics, update rules, andextractors for SAP applications.

InfoObjects are characteristics and key figures. For more information, see the slideand its note.

InfoProviders are objects in SAP NetWeaver BI that either physically contain data(as is the case for InfoCubes and DataStore objects) or that do not physically containdata (for example, MultiProviders).

A query comprises a selection of characteristics and key figures (InfoObjects)for analyzing the data in an InfoProvider. A query always refers to exactly oneInfoProvider, but any number of queries can be defined for an InfoProvider.

Workbooks are used to display queries. This involves creating a link between cellareas of the workbook and the data in the InfoProvider on which the query is based.This connects the BEx and the SAP NetWeaver BI server.

An analytical application is based on the consistent data stored in the DataWarehouse. These applications integrate business processes and contain predefinedbusiness scenarios that complement and support each other. They also providepredefined key figures that measure the effectiveness of business processes and giveusers the option of intervening to make corrections if required.

A role relates to a specific function in a company, for example, Purchasing Manager.It is linked to a particular task area, area of responsibility, and the information requiredfor these.

Business Content:

• Can be used in certain industries without modification

• Can be adjusted; that is, refined or extended

• Can be used as a template or example for Business Content you create yourself



Figure 30: SAP NetWeaver BI: InfoObjects, Characteristics, and Key Figures

Characteristics represent business evaluation objects, such as a company code,region, or store. In addition, time characteristics must also be defined, for examplefiscal year and calendar week. An InfoProvider usually only contains a subset ofthe characteristic values from the master data table. The master data includes theallowed values for a characteristic, the characteristic values. Units of characteristicscan represent specifications of quantities or amounts (expressed in currencies).

Key figures are quantifiable values of all kinds that are used to measure technical,business, and human performance within the company. In addition to the key figuresstored on the database, you can also define calculated (derived) key figures duringquery definition in the Business Explorer. These key figures can be calculated fromthe key figures in the InfoProvider using a formula.

• Examples of key figures: business volume, fixed costs, sales quantity, or numberof employees

• Examples of calculated key figures:business volume per employee, variance inpercent, or contribution margin.

Key figures can represent cumulative or non-cumulative values. Since the latterare time-related, there are limits to how far they can be aggregated. This appliesparticularly to stocks. While SAP Business Planning and Simulation only workswith cumulative key figures, you can also use non-cumulative key figures in SAPMerchandise and Assortment Planning.



Figure 31: SAP NetWeaver BI: Defining a Query

You define a query in the Business Explorer (BEx) Query Designer by selectingInfoObjects or reusable query elements (such as structures) from an InfoProvider anddefining a view on the data in the InfoProvider by distributing them among filters,lines, columns, and free characteristics.

Queries can be used to generate data providers in BI applications or can be openedand executed for analysis directly in a standard view in the BEx Web Analyzer orBEx Analyzer.



The BEx Query Designer is divided into six subareas.

• Directory tree of the selected InfoProvider: After the required InfoProviders havebeen selected, all the objects available (dimensions, key figures, structures) aredisplayed in the left-hand side of the Query Designer screen as a directory tree.

• Rows and columns

• User-defined characteristics: In the user-defined characteristics area, thecharacteristics that are not displayed in the initial view after the query hasrun online or in the BEx Analyzer are transferred. It is, however, possible tointegrate these characteristics using navigation steps (right mouse click). Thesecan also be used to select filter values in the report.

• Filter: The characteristics displayed in the filter do not appear in the breakdownor as user-defined characteristics during the analysis of the query. They are onlyused as global filters to filter data from the InfoProvider.

• Preview: This area provides a preview of the results area of the defined query.

Figure 32: SAP NetWeaver BI: Business Explorer, Web Query, and Reportingwith Exceptions

The BEx Web covers all BEx tools that are themselves Web-based applications, orthat are used to create these. The BEx Web comprises the following components:



The BEx Web Application Designer, the central desktop application for creatingWeb applications, can be used to create HTML pages that contain BI-specific content,such as various tables, charts, or maps. You can save the Web applications as aURL, and access them via the Intranet or mobile terminals. You can also save Webapplications as iViews and integrate them into an Enterprise Portal.

The BEx Web applications created are Web-based applications from the BusinessExplorer used for data analysis, reporting, and analytical applications on the Internet.The BEx Web Analyzer is a standalone Web application that can be used for easydata analysis, and allows you to define queries online.

You can also use BEx Mobile Intelligence to call your Web applications remotely.You can call them online (in which case, you must be connected to the BI WebApplication server), or offline using static, preformatted HTML pages. MobileIntelligence also allows you to send SMS messages to a mobile terminal, as soon as anexception arises that has been defined in the Web application.

The functions in exception reporting enable you to highlight variances in key figurevalues in a query. The differences of the predefined threshold values or intervals aredisplayed in different colors in the query total if the exception is active. This meansthat differences can be identified in advance ,and appropriate, timely action can betaken to deal with them.

Figure 33: SAP Business Planning and Simulation and SAP Merchandise andAssortment Planning



SAP Business Planning and Simulation (SAP BPS) provides you with the tools andfunctions you need to map your planning processes. You can set up a planning modelthat contains strategical and operational planning, as well as analysis tools. SAP BPShas the following features that support your planning, budgeting, and forecasting:

• Top-down and bottom-up planning with a wide range of planning functions

• User interfaces for manual planning and evaluations (SAP GUI and Webapplications)

• Process monitoring (for example, status monitoring)

SAP Merchandise and Assortment Planning (SAP MAP) uses many of the SAPBPS functions. SAP MAP also provides BI Content that supports many retail businessprocesses; for example, planning of trading goods (non-seasonal and seasonalmerchandise), markdown planning, and open-to-buy planning (OTB planning).

The Content for SAP MAP gives you the following advantages:

• You can plan on a quantity or value basis.

• The Content contains templates for analyzing and planning the businessprocesses.

• You can create and change master data in planning.

• You use MS Excel for planning.

• It provides open interfaces so that planning can be connected to operationalprocesses, for instance using SAP Exchange Interface (XI).

• It provides standardized interfaces with SAP Retail.



Figure 34: SAP Merchandise and Assortment Planning: Overview

SAP Merchandise and Assortment Planning (SAP MAP) comprises the followingcomponents:

Strategic planning: A retail company defines its strategic targets in the strategicplan, also referred to as the business plan. The business plan is created on the highestlevel for the entire firm, but also for individual distribution channels or higher levelsof the merchandise hierarchy.

Store and merchandise planning:

• The store plan is the concrete form of the strategic plan, taking into accountdifferent factors from within the store hierarchy: Regional marketing, the currentcompetition, demographic changes, preferences, and specific events.

• By contrast, merchandise planning is the more detailed embodiment of thehigher-level, strategic guidelines. Planning takes place along the merchandisecategory hierarchy, but no details are given about the actual merchandise.

Assortment planning:The aim of assortment planning is to create assortments, thusdeciding which products are to be listed for which stores, and which quantities are tobe assigned to the individual stores. Different levels can be planned within the articlehierarchy, for example, product (style), color (variant), or the price band.



Slow seller management:The aim of slow seller management is to ensure that at theend of a selling period the smallest possible amount of stock (particularly for fashion orhigh-fashion goods) remains, thus keeping the number of markdowns to a minimum.

OTB planning: One of the central goals of seasonal procurement processes is to usethe available budget efficiently. The cross-system application Open-to-Buy supportsyou in doing this in the following way:

• In SAP NetWeaver BI, you can use SAP BPS (Business Planning andSimulation) to map your retail planning and plan budgets. You can define thebudgets flexibly and adjust them according to your requirements.

• Once planning is complete, you can transfer the budgets to SAP Retail.

• The SAP Retail system takes the planned budgets into account during purchasing,for example in the OTB check when creating or changing a purchasing document.

The Business Content for merchandise and assortment planning supports planning andreporting for your business activities in the area of merchandise and assortments asan overall process. Both value- and quantity-based planning are possible. Planningcan take place at any level in a hierarchy, for example distribution chain, store, orproduct level. For example, you might define your strategic goals at a rough planninglevel and then concretize them step by step as far as segment, assortment, or productlevel. You can compare plan versions that were created in parallel and in this waygradually develop a final version from them.

Planning is used to define important key figures, such as the business volume, grossprofit, and margin for a future period (for example, a season). Comparing planned,actual, and past data allows you to define future business performance in a mostefficient way.

You can define the process flow for planning, the characteristics, and the selection ofkey figures according to your requirements.



You can run high-performance reports on the following areas in SAP NetWeaver BI:

• Merchandise planning: You can use merchandise planning to evaluatemerchandise plans and POS sales and stock data for a week or a month.Ready-made reports, such as a planning comparison, and a sales or stockscorecard, make for efficient controlling.

• Assortment planning: You can use assortment planning to evaluate theassortment plan, POS sales, and stock for a week. The reports Sales Coverageof Products, Slow Seller Management Analysis, and Assortment Analysis &Valuation are just some of the reports that can be useful in determining theoptimum assortment.

• Store planning: You can evaluate actual and plan data in store planning. POSsales and stocks can be evaluated for a week or a month. You can do this usingreports such as Store Sales Scorecard, Score Stock Scorecard, Plan Analysis,or Regional Analysis.

Figure 35: SAP Merchandise and Assortment Planning: Connection with SAPRetail

You plan the articles and quantities that are to be available at a specific time in yourstore or distribution center assortment, and transfer these items to the order list in theOperational Assortment Planning and Control (OAPC) application.



The system collects potential purchase order items in the order list, which it uses tocreate an initial worklist for purchase orders to be generated.

You can create grouped purchase order documents or purchase orders from the orderlist. The order list reports the modified processing status of the item to OAPCplanning; the grouped purchase order document (GPOD) and the purchase order alsoreport the status and document changes (quantity, date, site).

The system bundles items in the grouped purchase order document using fixed(vendor) and variable criteria (site) for a provisional internal document in each case.

You can generate purchase orders from the grouped purchase order documents ifsufficient budget is available.

The Price Planning Workbench is a work environment for making price changesfor price planning processes, rule-based markup control, promotions, and manualprice changes.

The Layout Workbench is the central access to all the functions for spacemanagement and layout.

Figure 36: Main Planning Steps in SAP MAP

The main planning steps in the SAP MAP Content begin with strategic planning,which defines business objectives for the coming years at a high level.

These objectives from the basis for the further steps of store and merchandise planning.



Figure 37: Main Planning Steps in SAP MAP: Assortment Planning for Basicsand Seasonal Merchandise

Merchandise planning can also be subdivided into assortment planning forreplenishable basics and assortment planning for non-replenishable, seasonalmerchandise. SAP provides MAP Content for both types of trading goods, and youcan use both MAP Contents in parallel.



Figure 38: Sample Planning Scenario

You want to coordinate a planning process for different areas of your retail company.You first create a long-term (possibly lasting several years) business plan thatcontains strategic financial objectives, such as business volume, margins, and costs(for example, inventory, marketing). You run this planning function at higher levels,such as merchandise categories (fashion, hardware, food, ...), distribution channels(supermarket, wholesale trade), or on the upper nodes in the merchandise categoryhierarchy.

Planning the business plan forms the basis for lower level store and merchandiseplanning:

• The regional managers run store planning: for example, they plan businessvolume for individual stores in a certain region and distribution chain.

• In parallel, the merchandise planners plan on the level of merchandise categoriesor other article groupings, such as categories in an article hierarchy.

During the planning process, you compare the plans, make adjustments, and definefurther objectives. The regional manager and merchandise planner check theirplanning with regard to the adjustments and new objectives, and make any necessarycorrections.

This means that the planning scenario constitutes an iterative process that containsplanning and analysis.



Figure 39: SAP Business Planning and Simulation: Basic Planning Area

SAP Business Planning and Simulation is part of SAP NetWeaver BI. You use BPS tomap your planning scenario in SAP NetWeaver BI. SAP Merchandise and AssortmentPlanning supports you with preconfigured Content.

You make central settings for all the assigned planning levels, packages, and functionsin the planning area.

The system recognizes the following types of planning area:

• Basic planning area: An individual planning area is assigned exactly oneInfoCube, which constitutes the data basis for this planning area.

• Multi-planning area: A multi-planning area can comprise several basicplanning areas and contains all their characteristics and key figures.

A variable defines a characteristic list of selected characteristics and their value range.



Figure 40: Multi-Planning Area

You assign one or more basic planning areas to a multi-planning area. For example,you could use a basic planning area for actual data and another one for planned data.You normally use real-time InfoCubes in planning. This type of InfoCube allowsseveral users write access at the same time. In addition, this InfoCube type is suited tostore inventory data. (In contrast, you normally use standard InfoCubes, which areoptimized for read access, for analyses in SAP NetWeaver BI.)



Figure 41: Planning level

A planning level contains a selection of characteristics and key figures that is requiredfor a certain business analysis. It defines the degree of detail with which planningtakes place. Characteristics of the planning area that are not contained in the planninglevel can be used, for example, in data aggregation. There can be several planninglevels for a multi-planning area.



Figure 42: Planning package

You define planning packages to define certain task areas within the overall planningprocess. You can then assign these to the persons responsible at a later date.

A planning package determines the data range in which the planning functions operate.You can restrict characteristic values, either in the planning level, or in the planningpackages that are assigned to the planning level. You can restrict the characteristicvalues in the planning packages so that the assigned users process precisely the datafor the stores for which they are responsible.



Figure 43: Planning Method

Planning methods are assigned to a planning level. There are several types of planningmethods:

Manual planning: This method allows you to create actual data and enter plan data.You plan key figure values for a certain selection of characteristics. You create aplanning layout so that you can run manual planning later.

Planning function: Planning functions are used for data manipulation. You canuse them to carry out calculations, such as aggregation and disaggregation of dataon higher and lower levels, copying data, and creating forecasts (using a variety offorecasting strategies, such as trends, seasons, and exponential smoothing).

Planning sequence: You can have several planning functions run one after the other.For example, the planning sequence "Revaluation" could comprise the functions"Delete Plan Data", "Load Actual Data from Previous Year", and "Add 5% Markup".

Documents: You can store qualitative information as text or graphical documentshere.



Figure 44: Planning Folder: Example of Store Planning

You run manual planning in the planning folder.

Planning levels, packages, layouts, and functions within a previously defined planningarea are united in a planning folder. You can execute a planning folder using auser-friendly interface that contains all the objects listed.

You can assign planning folders to the employees responsible.

You can also use planning folders for Web applications (for example, for iViews inportals).

SAP MAP Content also contains queries, which you can use to analyze the actualand plan data.



Exercise 2: Strategic Planning / Merchandiseand Store Planning


• Prepare and execute simple planning of store business volume in SAPNetWeaver BI

Business ExampleAs a regional manager in your company, you are responsible for the sales figuresof your region. You familiarize yourself with the necessary settings in a BusinessIntelligence System and then carry out the planning for your area.

Task 1: Changing a Planning FolderYou want to change an existing planning folder.

1. From your favorites, choose the Retail Training EN folder, and there the menupath Planning Folders of Merchandise Planning. Open the folder IDES Demo -MAP Fashion Training and then the folder Ides Demo - MAP Fashion Training40X. Choose your planning folder named Planning Folder SAPIRT User ## bydouble-clicking it. The planning folder has the technical name RTTPMU##.

Confirm the message informing you that (for example) the planning foldercontains no input layout.

Which multi-planning areas does the system display?

2. On the left-hand side, expand your multi-planning area RTTMMU## anddisplay eleven variables.

Select your multi-planning area and choose Edit object from the context menu(right mouse click). Choose the Variables tab page on the right.

Select your multi-planning area again on the left and choose Change area fromthe context menu. Choose the Variables tab on the right again.

Choose Create on the right-hand side to add the variable CTRY00 (Country) tothe eleven already displayed. Enter Country Group ## as the description, andselect CHAR Characteristic Value as the variable type.

Add the characteristic 0COUNTRY and assign the selection condition US.




Now save your entries and exit the transaction by returning to Change PlanningFolder.

3. On the left side, expand the variables of your multi-planning area RTTMMU##again. Now the system displays twelve variables.

Open your planning folder SAPIRT User## with the technical name RTTPMU##also on the right. Now select the variable Country Group ## (CTRY00) fromyour multi-planning area RTTMMU## on the left and assign it to the variablesof your planning folder on the right using drag and drop.

In a second step, open the planning level group ## RTTMPU## on the left-handside in your multi-planning area RTTMMU##. The ad hoc package is displayed.Double-click on the ad hoc package, and the system displays your planninglayout group ## RTTL## in the lower screen area when you expand Manualplanning in the planning functions. Select your planning layout User ##RTTL## and also assign it to the input layouts for your planning folder on theright by drag and drop.

Make the following settings:

Field Name or DataType

Values

Object description Layout Group ##

Quick Info Text Layout Group ##

Technical name LAY0##

A planning formula Increase 10% is displayed in the screen area at the bottomleft for planning functions. Select it and assign it to the Global PlanningFunctions for your planning folder on the right as well using drag and drop.



Values

Object description Increase 10%

Quick Info Text + 10 % Group ##

Technical name PFKT0##




Now save the settings for your planning folder and choose the green arrow toreturn to the planning folders for merchandise planning.

Hint: Skip all the warning messages that are displayed.

The system displays the warning message "In Level RTTMPU## (objectLAY0##) variable STOR00 (area…) is missing" twice because it refersto both the planning layout and the formula. The message can appearif the variable STOR00 was not filled with a single value (and actualstore). This enables the planner to enter planning data for several stores.

Task 2: Executing a Planning FolderAfter you have successfully changed your planning folder, you now want to execute it.

1. Select planning folder SAPIRT User ## RTTPMU## and choose Execute.

If you still need to enter some values for variables before you can execute yourplanning folder, make the following settings:

Description of thevariable

Values

Country Group ## US

Store R40X

Sales Organization RG10

Region 1##

Fiscal Year Variant K0

Fiscal Year StorePlanning

Next year

County Code 1

Currency USD

Distribution Chain R1

The actual sales figures are displayed for the current year for several stores(for example, R1## and R2##). You can now enter planning data in the salescolumn (next year). The fields are blue, which means they are ready for input.You can change these values afterwards using the planning formula (Increase10% pushbutton).




2. Enter plan data for your two stores R1## and R2## for next year and save yourentries.

Note down the data displayed:

Store Sales next year Sales in current year

R1##

R2##



Solution 2: Strategic Planning / Merchandiseand Store Planning

Task 1: Changing a Planning FolderYou want to change an existing planning folder.

1. From your favorites, choose the Retail Training EN folder, and there the menupath Planning Folders of Merchandise Planning. Open the folder IDES Demo -MAP Fashion Training and then the folder Ides Demo - MAP Fashion Training40X. Choose your planning folder named Planning Folder SAPIRT User ## bydouble-clicking it. The planning folder has the technical name RTTPMU##.

Confirm the message informing you that (for example) the planning foldercontains no input layout.

Which multi-planning areas does the system display?

a) Make your settings as per the task. Three multi-planning areas aredisplayed on the left side of the screen:

Multi-planning area Training User ## (RTTMMU##)

RT MAP: Plan Data Stores User ## (RTTMPU##)

RT MAP: Actual Data Stores (RTTMP004)

2. On the left-hand side, expand your multi-planning area RTTMMU## anddisplay eleven variables.

Select your multi-planning area and choose Edit object from the context menu(right mouse click). Choose the Variables tab page on the right.

Select your multi-planning area again on the left and choose Change area fromthe context menu. Choose the Variables tab on the right again.

Choose Create on the right-hand side to add the variable CTRY00 (Country) tothe eleven already displayed. Enter Country Group ## as the description, andselect CHAR Characteristic Value as the variable type.

Add the characteristic 0COUNTRY and assign the selection condition US.




Now save your entries and exit the transaction by returning to Change PlanningFolder.

a) Favorites→ Retail Training EN→ Planning Folders of MerchandisePlanning

Make your settings as per the task.

3. On the left side, expand the variables of your multi-planning area RTTMMU##again. Now the system displays twelve variables.

Open your planning folder SAPIRT User## with the technical name RTTPMU##also on the right. Now select the variable Country Group ## (CTRY00) fromyour multi-planning area RTTMMU## on the left and assign it to the variablesof your planning folder on the right using drag and drop.

In a second step, open the planning level group ## RTTMPU## on the left-handside in your multi-planning area RTTMMU##. The ad hoc package is displayed.Double-click on the ad hoc package, and the system displays your planninglayout group ## RTTL## in the lower screen area when you expand Manualplanning in the planning functions. Select your planning layout User ##RTTL## and also assign it to the input layouts for your planning folder on theright by drag and drop.



Values

Object description Layout Group ##

Quick Info Text Layout Group ##

Technical name LAY0##

A planning formula Increase 10% is displayed in the screen area at the bottomleft for planning functions. Select it and assign it to the Global PlanningFunctions for your planning folder on the right as well using drag and drop.






Values

Object description Increase 10%

Quick Info Text + 10 % Group ##

Technical name PFKT0##

Now save the settings for your planning folder and choose the green arrow toreturn to the planning folders for merchandise planning.

Hint: Skip all the warning messages that are displayed.

The system displays the warning message "In Level RTTMPU## (objectLAY0##) variable STOR00 (area…) is missing" twice because it refersto both the planning layout and the formula. The message can appearif the variable STOR00 was not filled with a single value (and actualstore). This enables the planner to enter planning data for several stores.

a) Favorites→ Retail Training EN → Planning Folders of MerchandisePlanning

You can continue to work in your planning folder Planning FolderSAPIRT User ## by opening your multi-planning area on the left and yourplanning folder on the right. You assign the variable, the layout and theformula as specified in the task, and then save your entries.

Return to the planning folders of Merchandise Planning.

Task 2: Executing a Planning FolderAfter you have successfully changed your planning folder, you now want to execute it.

1. Select planning folder SAPIRT User ## RTTPMU## and choose Execute.

If you still need to enter some values for variables before you can execute yourplanning folder, make the following settings:

Description of thevariable

Values

Country Group ## US

Store R40X




Sales Organization RG10

Region 1##

Fiscal Year Variant K0

Fiscal Year StorePlanning

Next year

County Code 1

Currency USD

Distribution Chain R1

The actual sales figures are displayed for the current year for several stores(for example, R1## and R2##). You can now enter planning data in the salescolumn (next year). The fields are blue, which means they are ready for input.You can change these values afterwards using the planning formula (Increase10% pushbutton).

a) Favorites→ Retail Training EN→ Planning Folders of MerchandisePlanning

You execute your planning folder RTTMPU## ([Execute] pushbutton).Add any missing data for the variables as described in the task. An Exceltable is displayed that allows you to enter the sales planning data for thefollowing year. The actual sales figures are displayed for the current yearfor the two stores R1## and R2##.

2. Enter plan data for your two stores R1## and R2## for next year and save yourentries.

Note down the data displayed:

Store Sales next year Sales in current year

R1##

R2##

a) Enter the displayed data in the table and save your entries.



Lesson Summary







Lesson: Assortment Planning / Layout Workbench

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the connection between strategic assortment planning in SAPMAP and forwarding data to SAP Retail as general assortments, layout modules withlayout module versions, and store assignments.





Business ExampleStrategic assortment planning normally begins in SAP MAP (Merchandise andAssortment Planning). The process involves defining general assortments; assortmentversions with different validity periods are defined so that the time constraints canbe different. In a second step, the relevant stores (sites) are assigned to the generalassortments.

When a planned general assortment is released together with its dependent objects inSAP MAP, a layout module is created for each general assortment in SAP Retail and alayout module version is generated for each assortment module version. Assignmentsof stores (sites) to general assortments are also copied.

Once you have performed assortment planning in SAP MAP, you can display theresults in the Layout Workbench (in SAP Retail) and continue processing.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Assortment Planning / Layout Workbench

Layout Workbench

Figure 45: Planning in SAP for Retail



Figure 46: Assortment Creation Using Layouts

The layout concept allows you to optimally structure the sales area of your storesin connection with your assortment. At the same time, it forms the basis for usingspace management systems.

A store can contain one local and several general assortments. An assortment is anSAP Retail object to which articles are assigned, or listed, for a particular validityperiod. The articles are only available to the relevant user for use in the differentbusiness functions when they have been assigned to an assortment user (retail sites,such as stores, distribution centers, and customers). This availability for use isdetermined by the type of assortment user (local assignment = type A or B, generalassortment = type C).

You can now assign layouts to the assortments for a store. Every layout consists oflayout modules that represent a fixed area in a store (for example, a shelf). You uselayout areas to map the spatial assignment of the layout modules in the layout.



Figure 47: Strategic Assortment Planning

You can start strategic assortment planning in SAP MAP. When doing so, you definegeneral assortments on the level of the consumer decision tree (from the articlehierarchy, for example the category). You can define assortment versions withdifferent validity periods so that they are defined for specific times and so that thesetimes can be different. In a second step, you now assign the relevant stores (sites) areassigned to the general assortments. You can do this using SAP MAP, where you cancarry out automatic assignment of stores to different assortment variants for eachcategory based on a maximum of 3 key figures.

You can use the fixtures as additional objects for capacity planning purposes. You canonly place a limited number of fixtures on a sales floor, so that a number of fixtures isassigned to an assortment version. This means an assortment version can compriseone or more fixtures, regardless of the dimensions of the fixture.



Figure 48: Strategic Assortment Planning

As soon as a planned, general assortment or its dependent objects are released in SAPMAP, the following objects are created automatically:

For a general assortment, the system creates a layout module in SAP Retail, andlayout module versions are created for each assortment version. In a layout module,the validity periods for individual versions are unique and cannot overlap. Due to thistime-based scheduling, you can, for example, map seasonal changes in a shelf.

Assignments of stores (sites) to general assortments are also copied. If you usefixtures as additional objects, they are assigned to a layout module version.

You can assign articles to the layout module versions in strategic assortment planningin SAP MAP. This is advisable if the article data is available and complete at an earlystage (for example, in the area of food).

Once you have performed assortment planning in SAP MAP, you can display theresults in the Layout Workbench (in SAP Retail) and continue processing. Theassortment type in Customizing allows you to control whether layout modules arecreated automatically for a planned general assortment, and if so which ones.



Figure 49: Layout Workbench

The Layout Workbench is the central access to all the functions for space managementand layout. You can use it to display the results of strategic assortment planningfrom SAP MAP. The layout and the assigned layout modules and their versions aredisplayed as a hierarchy for a store, and all the articles in a module are displayeddirectly by selecting the module in question. The articles assigned are displayedboth for the layout module version and for the layout module version variant (localdeviations in a layout version). If the article data was not available when assortmentplanning took place or you have not performed planning, you can make the assignmentin the Layout Workbench at a later point in time. If you use fixtures, the system alsodisplays the fixtures that are assigned to a layout module version. You can select oneor more layout module versions and list the fixtures assigned. If the layout moduleversions have been assigned planogram files for a space management system, these arealso displayed in the overview. You can access these planogram files from the displayfor current changes to your planograms or for changes that will be valid at a laterpoint. You can also start listing from the Layout Workbench. When doing this, youcan generate listing conditions, either for all the layout module versions that have beenreleased, for those that are currently valid, or for those that will be valid in the future.You can also select individual layout module versions for which you want to executelisting. The listing conditions are only generated for the relevant store. You can accessan external space management program (SMP) from the Layout Workbench. You canalso use the Layout Workbench for planning purposes without a space managementinterface. You also have the option of carrying out mass maintenance, which can be



used to assign a large number of articles to a layout module in one step (for example,all the articles in a merchandise category, articles that match your selection criteria,or all articles that have a certain matchcode). You can access fast article entry (coremaster record) from the Layout Workbench. The system copies the articles enteredinto the Layout Workbench. You can also select an OAPC (operational assortmentplanning and control) relevance indicator in the Layout Workbench to control whicharticles appear in the purchasing list for further procurement activities.



Exercise 3: Assortment Planning / LayoutWorkbench





Business ExampleStrategic assortment planning normally begins in SAP MAP. This is where generalassortments are defined. To enable differences with regard to validity times,assortment versions are planned with different validity periods. In a second step, youassign the relevant stores (sites) to these general assortments.

When a planned general assortment and its dependent objects is released in SAP MAP,a layout module is created for each general assortment in SAP Retail and a layoutmodule version is generated for each assortment version. Assignments of stores (sites)to general assortments are also copied.

Once you have performed assortment planning in SAP MAP, you can display theresults in the Layout Workbench (in SAP Retail) and continue processing.

Task 1: Displaying General AssortmentsYou now want to display the master data of a general assortment. You are interested inthe assortment category, the layout modules that have been created, and the assignedsites. Select the general assortment R1OUTD##.

1. To which assortment category is your general assortment R1OUTD## assigned?

2. What is the name of the layout module that was created automatically for thisassortment?

3. Which assignments can you make in the master data of a general assortment?




Task 2: Layout WorkbenchYou use the Layout Workbench to display the article and store assignments for yourlayout module.

1. To do this, choose Start: Layout Modules. Enter your layout moduleR1OUTD## and start the Layout Workbench. How many versions are displayedfor your layout module and what do they mean?

2. Click on the layout module version 000 to access the article assignments. Howcould you assign other articles?

3. Select your general assortment R1OUTD## in the Layout Workbench anddisplay the assigned stores. How do you do this?

Task 3: Assigning Assortment UsersFinally, you want to display the assortment users who are assigned to your generalassortment.

1. To do this, go to the Assortment Assignment Tool and access the function usingyour layout module R1OUTD##. What is displayed on the left and right handsides in the assignment tool? Which functions are available here?

2. Which stores are already assigned to your layout module R1OUTD##?



Solution 3: Assortment Planning / LayoutWorkbench

Task 1: Displaying General AssortmentsYou now want to display the master data of a general assortment. You are interested inthe assortment category, the layout modules that have been created, and the assignedsites. Select the general assortment R1OUTD##.

1. To which assortment category is your general assortment R1OUTD## assigned?

a) Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment→ General Assortment→ Display

The assortment category is displayed in the header data. It is C = Customerassignment category.

2. What is the name of the layout module that was created automatically for thisassortment?

a) Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment→ General Assortment→ Display

You can see on the Control Data subscreen whether and, if so, which layoutmodule has been created. The layout module R1OUTD## has the samename as the general assortment R1OUTD##. The Customizing settings forthe assortment type ensure that when a new general assortment is created,the system creates a layout module of the same name automatically. Inassortment maintenance, the layout module is shown as not ready for input.

3. Which assignments can you make in the master data of a general assortment?

a) You can assign merchandise categories and assortment users (stores andcustomers).




Task 2: Layout WorkbenchYou use the Layout Workbench to display the article and store assignments for yourlayout module.

1. To do this, choose Start: Layout Modules. Enter your layout moduleR1OUTD## and start the Layout Workbench. How many versions are displayedfor your layout module and what do they mean?

a) Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Layout→ Layout Workbench

Choose Start: Layout Modules and enter the layout module R1OUTD##.Choose [Execute]. In the overview that is displayed next, expand themenu for your layout module. The system displays a version 000 withthe status Released.

In a layout module, the validity periods for individual versions are uniqueand cannot overlap. Due to this time-based scheduling, you can, forexample, map seasonal changes in a shelf.

2. Click on the layout module version 000 to access the article assignments. Howcould you assign other articles?

a) Select layout module version 000, choose Article Assignments, and viewthe articles that have already been assigned. You could choose AssignArticles to assign other articles.

3. Select your general assortment R1OUTD## in the Layout Workbench anddisplay the assigned stores. How do you do this?

a) In the Layout Workbench, select R1OUTD## and choose Stores (AssignedStore Display).




Task 3: Assigning Assortment UsersFinally, you want to display the assortment users who are assigned to your generalassortment.

1. To do this, go to the Assortment Assignment Tool and access the function usingyour layout module R1OUTD##. What is displayed on the left and right handsides in the assignment tool? Which functions are available here?

a) Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment→ General Assortment→ Assign Assortment User

Enter your layout module R1OUTD## in the Layout Module field. Choose[Execute] and expand all of the tree structure.

On the left side, you see the selected layout modules with the sites thathave already been assigned to them.

The right side displays a list of all sites that were created in SAP Retail.You can restrict this display by choosing one of the following options:

• Display All Sites

• Display Non-Assigned Sites

• Display New Sites Only

In this context, Display New Sites Only means that only those sites aredisplayed that have never been assigned to an assortment before.

2. Which stores are already assigned to your layout module R1OUTD##?

Answer: Stores 1101, 1102, and 1103 are assigned.



Lesson Summary






TIRT10_2 Lesson: Open-to-Buy Planning

Lesson: Open-to-Buy Planning

Lesson OverviewOpen-to-Buy (OTB) is a tool that supports buyers in planning and monitoringtheir purchasing budget. Budget planning takes place in SAP NetWeaver BusinessIntelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI).




Business ExampleOTB planning is part of merchandise planning. The plan data in merchandise planningforms the basis for actual OTB planning. Open-to-buy calculation is performed foreach time unit based on this plan data and the order volume of the open purchaseorders from the procurement phase. This planning step is performed once the planningprocess is completed. It is used to monitor how your purchasing budget is used.



Figure 50: OTB planning

Figure 51: In-Season Phase in OTB Planning



OTB planning can be split into three consecutive phases:

• Planning phase

• Procurement phase

• In-season phase

Planning phase:

OTB planning is the fine-tuned control in merchandise planning. The key figuresplanned in merchandise planning (such as value- and quantity-based stock figures andrevenue) form the basis for OTB planning. The OTB budget is calculated based onthese plan figures (for example, for business volume, closing stock, markdowns, andinventory differences).

Procurement phase:

You can enter purchase orders with a delivery date that is in the planning period a longtime before the season and sales of the merchandise begin. The planned OTB budgetis available for this purpose. All purchase orders reduce the limit, so that the share ofthe planned OTB budget that has not yet been used is displayed at all times.

In-season phase

You can compare plan figures for business volume, stock, goods receipts, and so on,with updated actual figures during this phase. During this phase, OTB calculation usesthe available plan and actual figures, so as to prevent significant plan/actual variancesin good time. For example, if the business volume in a period is greater than planned,the functions here can be used to purchase more merchandise. If the planned businessvolume is not reached, it is important to prevent procurement of additional stock, andif possible to reduce existing stock by means of promotions.



Figure 52: OTB Planning and OTB Check



Lesson Summary






Lesson: Operational Assortment Planning and Control

Lesson OverviewFashion and seasonal merchandise usually has a relatively short life cycle and a longlead time. This means that articles of this kind are normally only planned once, andare then ordered and moved to stores. You can use operational assortment planningand control (OAPC) to to define the articles and quantities that you want to order fordelivery to stores and putaway at the distribution center. To do this, you create apurchasing list and then add articles to it. You can also display open-to-buy data here.This data is transferred to the SAP Retail system using a Business Add-In (BAdI).You can also define prepacks.





Business ExampleYou plan to sell fashion merchandise at your stores during the next season. You wantto enter planned quantities of these articles for the initial buy allocation for your shops.You do this according to the sales targets in open-to-buy planning. Procurementdocuments are generated once your purchasing list has been released.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Operational Assortment Planning and Control

Figure 53: Operational Assortment Planning and Control

Fashion merchandise usually has a short life cycle and a long lead time. This meansthat articles of this kind are normally only planned once and are then ordered andmoved to stores.



Figure 54: Functions of the Purchasing List

You can use operational assortment planning and control (OAPC) to define thearticles and quantities that you want to order for delivery to stores and those youwant to put away at the distribution center.

To do this, you create a purchasing list and then add articles to it. You can use thefollowing articles: articles in SAP Retail, PRICAT articles, whose data you receivedfrom your vendors by means of IDocs, and completely new articles for which datadoes not yet exist. You can also specify additional colors or sizes for new articles.



Figure 55: Key Figures in Planning

Quantity planning in the purchasing list takes place using three key figures:

Initial distribution fixed:

This is the initial quantity distributed to the stores ("bottom-up" stock allocation) whenmerchandise is procured for the first time. You plan the quantities for assortmentswithin a hierarchy node here. In stock allocation, each store that is assigned to aspecific assortment is receives precisely the quantity entered here. This quantity is"protected": that is to say, it is not overridden by quantities in an allocation tablegenerated later by the system.

Initial distribution variable:

This is the quantity of new merchandise that is to be procured if sales at the store freeup capacities that can be used for this merchandise ("top-down" stock allocation). Youalso plan the quantities for the individual stores in the assortment here. However, inthis case, the system only calculates the total quantity for all stores and transfers it tothe allocation table, where stock allocation takes place for the merchandise accordingto the corresponding allocation strategies or rules.

Putaway quantity:



This is the article quantity that is not delivered directly to the stores but isautomatically put away at the distribution center (DC). In this case, you do not plandirectly for assortments but for the distribution centers that supply the stores assignedto the assortments. The putaway quantities are then used to supply stores whoselocal stock sinks due to sales below a certain threshold value. Some stores that areassigned to the assortments are supplied by different distribution centers. This meansthat several distribution centers are displayed when you plan your putaway quantities.The quantity you enter is exactly the quantity that is delivered to the correspondingdistribution center. This reserve quantity can then be distributed to the stores asrequired. For example, a large portion of the reserves can be sent to a store in whichthe merchandise in question is selling particularly well, while a store at which it is notselling well may not receive merchandise from this stock.

Figure 56: Connection to Seasonal Procurement

Operational assortment planning and control (OAPC) helps you plan and procureseasonal retail goods, for example, in the area of fashion. You plan the articles andquantities that are to be available at a specific time in your store or distributioncenter assortment and transfer these items to the seasonal procurement order list.The system collects potential purchase order items in the order list, which it uses tocreate an initial worklist for purchase orders to be generated. You can create groupedpurchase order documents (GPD) or purchase orders from the order list. The



order list reports the modified processing status of the item to OAPC planning. Thegrouped purchase order document and the purchase order then also report the statusand document changes (quantity, date, site). The system bundles items in the groupedpurchase order document according to fixed (for example, vendor) and variable (forexample, site) criteria for a provisional internal document in each case. You cangenerate purchase orders from the grouped purchase order documents if sufficientbudget is available. The OTB check analyzes whether sufficient budget is availablefor the entire document or for each item. You cannot create a purchase order unlesssufficient budget is available. If you change other documents and in doing so transfertheir budget, you can create a positive OTB check result. If the OTB check determinessufficient budget, you can generate the purchase order document and send this tothe vendor. The purchase order reports that the planned article has been orderedto OSPS planning.

Figure 57: The Planning Process

The planning process in SAP Retail begins with the purchasing list. It is used toplan the quantities of seasonal articles for the assortments. The system uses thescheduling function to calculate the presentation date of goods in your stores for eachpurchasing list item. You then release the purchasing list items using a release report,thus generating order list items in seasonal procurement. Next (depending on thesettings), you perform a complete OTB check and generate purchase orders, provided



that sufficient budget is available. These are usually standard purchase orders to besent to the vendor. You can control the distribution of your planned and orderedgoods in another step using an allocation table, which is automatically created withreference to your (seasonal) standard purchase order. The system determines certaininformation from the purchasing list, for example, which stores are assigned to theassortments. Articles, quantities, delivery dates, distribution centers and so on arealso copied from the standard purchase order. Other follow-on documents for theallocation table are stock transport orders.

With automatic allocation table generation (transaction WA10), you must alwaysspecify an allocation strategy. This allocates the planned quantities on your purchasinglist according to certain criteria, such as existing sales ratios.

Allocation strategies are very flexible. You can use existing strategies or define yourown based on templates. You can access any key figure defined in BI (for example,historical sales, planned targets, calculated key figures, and so on) and define it as amethod in a strategy. A query is always defined behind a method in SAP BI.

You then create variants for these strategies (for example, with dynamic datedetermination for BI access), which are used in WA10.

With allocation strategies, the quantities are thus always dynamically determined.These strategies can also take account of on-order stock and the current stocksituations at the site.



Figure 58: Purchasing List Structure

The purchasing list comprises the following sections:

• General data area

• Overview

• Details

You must specify a purchasing organization in the general data area so that you canspecify the purchase price (at vendor/purchasing organization level) and perform thesubsequent processes (purchase order handling, allocation table generation). You mustalso enter a purchasing group, which the system uses to determine user authorization.

The purchasing organization and distribution channel are required for the salesprices. You must specify an article hierarchy and hierarchy node in order to createa purchasing list.

Once you have created the list, you can add your articles.

The system displays the total quantities from the upstream planning processes in unitof measure and value (purchasing price, sales price) on the Global Strategy tab in thegeneral data area on the purchasing list screen.



In the overview area, you first create the articles (articles that already exist on thedatabase; planned articles created in OAPC but not yet transferred to the database,and PRICAT items from vendors' price catalogs received by means of electronicdata transfer).

You then plan the quantities for your articles.

Articles are not usually ordered as single articles (or single article variants) butas prepacks, each of which contains certain quantities of different variants of anarticle. To do this, you access the details on a purchasing list item. For example,a prepack of 12 shirts could contain shirts in four different colors in sizes XL, L,and M. You can create prepacks only for generic articles with variants. The systemautomatically creates variants for planned generic articles if these are required todefine a prepack. This is the usual procedure for creating variants. You can eitherdefine the composition of a prepack yourself - that is, the total quantity it contains andthe way in which it is distributed between individual sizes and colors - or have thesystem propose a distribution according to your quota scales. You can also displayopen-to-buy data here. This data is transferred to the SAP Retail system using aBusiness Add-In (BAdI).

It is also possible to add a characteristic value (such as a new color) to an article. Ifyou want to add a completely new color that has not yet been created in the SAPsystem, you must first define this option as admissible in characteristic maintenance.You can then add the new characteristic value to the characteristic using the AddColor function.



Exercise 4: Operational AssortmentPlanning and Control


• Display a purchasing list in SAP Retail

• Display sales targets (plan data from BI) in the purchasing list

• Enter fixed quantities for an initial buy allocation for each assortment

Business ExampleYou want to further process an existing purchasing list in operational assortmentplanning and control. When you do this, you can create new planned articles. Youexecute planning at different levels (planning at assortment level, planning at prepacklevel and planning at variant level). You can compare the planned values of thedifferent levels with each other and you can use a top-down or a bottom-up distributionto distribute them to more detailed or higher levels. At the end of this exercise, yourelease your purchasing list items.

Task:You want to display an existing purchasing list and add an item in operationalassortment planning and control.

1. Display purchasing list EKL##. To which season year and season is yourpurchasing list assigned?

2. To which organizational structures is your purchasing list assigned?

3. Go to the target values tab page and display the target values for the fixedinitial buy allocation key figure. What targets have been specified for yourtwo assortments?




Assortments R1KIDSL## Currency R1KIDSS## Currency

Total valuesfor basicpurchasingprice in USD

Total valuesfor net/netpurchasingprice in USD

Number ofdifferentarticles

Total targetquantities inunits in PC

Next, exit the target values display and go to the overview area of yourpurchasing list.

4. Go to the detail view for your article R1TA01## in the overview area for thepurchasing list and display the possible colors for this article. How do youdo this?

Hint: If the articles in your purchasing list are displayed with the articletext, you can use the Show Article Description pushbutton to change theview.

5. Now display the possible sizes for this article by specifying a color. How doyou do this?

6. Go to the detail view for article R1TA01## and select the article tab page there.Determine the following for your article R1TA01##:


Mdse Catgry

Artl category

Article Type

Characteristics Profile




7. Choose the Purchasing/Sales tab page and find out the name of the vendor fromwhom this purchasing list item is ordered.

Vendor: ______________________

What is the purchasing and sales price of your article and in which currencyhas it been ordered from the vendor?

Purchasing Price: _______________________________

Sales price: _______________________________

Currency: _______________________________

8.

Now display the scheduling for this article in the Item Data tab page. Whichdata has the system calculated for the Delivery Date DC and PO Generation?Display the scheduling (Display Dates). How were these dates calculated?

Then exit the detail view and return to the overview area.

9. You now want to add a new item to your purchasing list. To do this, close thedetailed view for your purchasing list item and choose Add Item → ExistingArticle in the overview area. Enter the article number R1TA03## and add thepresentation date in the new line that has appeared. This should be the same dateas you entered in the existing items.

10. Now access the item details on your new purchasing list item and performscheduling on the PL Item Detail tab. Which data has the system calculated forthe Delivery Date DC and PO Generation? Display the scheduling (DisplayDates). What do you notice if you compare this item with your other purchasinglist item?

11. You do not want to procure this article R1TA03## as a prepack, but insteadper variant. Choose the Variant Assignment tab in the prepack view. Addassortments for the key figure fixed initial buy allocation (Add Assortments) andplan the following total quantities (Input Total) for each assortment:




Large assortment Small assortment

Color red 500 100

Color green 800 150

Color royal blue 1000 300

Then choose Compare Planning VS Assignment to copy the quantities youplanned into the overview area for planning. Since you have not yet enteredplanned quantities in the overview area for this article, choose Overwriteplanning in the dialog box. This copies the quantities as planned quantitiesfrom the purchasing list item. The system also checks the entries against thesales targets.

12. You now want to release your new purchasing list item. To do this, go tothe overview area (item view) again, close the detailed view and chooseRelease/Unrelease→ Purchasing List Item→ Release Immediately. Confirmall the warning messages that appear. What is the new status of your releasedpurchasing list item (you may have to exit your purchasing list and then re-enterit)?

13. Now save the data to exit the purchasing list. The system automatically displaysa log. What does this log indicate?



Solution 4: Operational AssortmentPlanning and Control

Task:You want to display an existing purchasing list and add an item in operationalassortment planning and control.

1. Display purchasing list EKL##. To which season year and season is yourpurchasing list assigned?

a) Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Operational Assortment Planningand Control→ Maintain Purchasing List

Make your entries according to the exercise and confirm them by pressing[Enter].

Season year: Six months from today

Season category: 0001

2. To which organizational structures is your purchasing list assigned?

Answer: Purchasing organization: R300

Purchasing group: R30

Sales organization: RG10

Distribution channel: R1

3. Go to the target values tab page and display the target values for the fixedinitial buy allocation key figure. What targets have been specified for yourtwo assortments?




Assortments R1KIDSL## Currency R1KIDSS## Currency





Next, exit the target values display and go to the overview area of yourpurchasing list.

a) The following target values are displayed:

Assortments R1KIDSL## Cur-rency

R1KIDSS## Currency


15200 USD 10800 USD


18284 USD 13262 USD


50 EA 40 EA


1000 EA 800 EA




4. Go to the detail view for your article R1TA01## in the overview area for thepurchasing list and display the possible colors for this article. How do youdo this?

Hint: If the articles in your purchasing list are displayed with the articletext, you can use the Show Article Description pushbutton to change theview.

a) When you double-click on the relevant line, the colors red, green and royalblue are also displayed for article R1TA01##.

5. Now display the possible sizes for this article by specifying a color. How doyou do this?

a) When you double-click the relevant line (for example, article R1TA01## inred), the size(s) 8 are also displayed. If you have chosen another color, thenthe relevant other sizes are displayed.

6. Go to the detail view for article R1TA01## and select the article tab page there.Determine the following for your article R1TA01##:


Mdse Catgry

Artl category

Article Type

Characteristics Profile

a) Place the cursor on any of the lines for article R1TA01## and choose theShow Item Attributes pushbutton. Choose PL Item Details for purchasinglist item and then select the Article tab page from the detail area. Thefollowing basic data is displayed:


Mdse Catgry RF14221

Artl category 01 Generic article

Article Type FASH

Characteristics Profile RFP06




7. Choose the Purchasing/Sales tab page and find out the name of the vendor fromwhom this purchasing list item is ordered.

Vendor: ______________________

What is the purchasing and sales price of your article and in which currencyhas it been ordered from the vendor?

Purchasing Price: _______________________________

Sales price: _______________________________

Currency: _______________________________

a) Vendor: R1TV02## Chinese Clothes GR##

Purchasing Price: 100 CNY/PC

Sales price: USD 47.99

Currency: CNY

8.

Now display the scheduling for this article in the Item Data tab page. Whichdata has the system calculated for the Delivery Date DC and PO Generation?Display the scheduling (Display Dates). How were these dates calculated?

Then exit the detail view and return to the overview area.

Answer: The scheduling for this article is displayed in the Item Data tabpage. The dates are calculated according to the transportation chain and thetransportation times defined in days. The transportation chain is stored in thevendor master. The following data is calculated:

Delivery Date DC: the first working day 6 months from now, minus 4 workingdays for transportation time

PO Generation: Beginning of the scheduling, calculated by backward scheduling

9. You now want to add a new item to your purchasing list. To do this, close thedetailed view for your purchasing list item and choose Add Item→ ExistingArticle in the overview area. Enter the article number R1TA03## and add thepresentation date in the new line that has appeared. This should be the same dateas you entered in the existing items.

a) Choose the Add Item→ Existing Article pushbutton and make your entriesaccording to the exercise.




10. Now access the item details on your new purchasing list item and performscheduling on the PL Item Detail tab. Which data has the system calculated forthe Delivery Date DC and PO Generation? Display the scheduling (DisplayDates). What do you notice if you compare this item with your other purchasinglist item?

a) The scheduling for this article is displayed in the Item Data tab page.The dates are calculated according to the transportation chain and thetransportation times defined in days. The transportation chain is stored inthe vendor master.

This article is procured from a different vendor. Since this vendor isassigned a different transportation chain, this results in different dates forDC delivery and purchase order generation.

The following data is calculated:

Delivery Date DC: the first working day 6 months from now, minus 4working days for transportation time

PO Generation: Beginning of the scheduling, calculated by backwardscheduling

11. You do not want to procure this article R1TA03## as a prepack, but insteadper variant. Choose the Variant Assignment tab in the prepack view. Addassortments for the key figure fixed initial buy allocation (Add Assortments) andplan the following total quantities (Input Total) for each assortment:

Large assortment Small assortment

Color red 500 100

Color green 800 150

Color royal blue 1000 300

Then choose Compare Planning VS Assignment to copy the quantities youplanned into the overview area for planning. Since you have not yet enteredplanned quantities in the overview area for this article, choose Overwrite




planning in the dialog box. This copies the quantities as planned quantitiesfrom the purchasing list item. The system also checks the entries against thesales targets.

a) You start from the item details and go to the prepack view for the VariantAssignment tab page. Enter the data according to the exercise in the Input(Total) column, and confirm by pressing [Enter]. Proceed as specified inthe exercise. Check the results in the overview area: The planned quantitiesof 2300 and 550 PC are displayed in your line of article R1TA03##.

12. You now want to release your new purchasing list item. To do this, go tothe overview area (item view) again, close the detailed view and chooseRelease/Unrelease→ Purchasing List Item→ Release Immediately. Confirmall the warning messages that appear. What is the new status of your releasedpurchasing list item (you may have to exit your purchasing list and then re-enterit)?

Answer: The status of your item R1TA03## is: Article released, purchasinglist item released

13. Now save the data to exit the purchasing list. The system automatically displaysa log. What does this log indicate?

Answer: Your purchasing list item for article R1TA03## was releasedimmediately. Purchasing list items were created for the purchase order managerworkbench for all the article variants for which you have entered and releasedplanned quantities. These all start with 43....



Lesson Summary







Lesson: Slow Seller Management / Price PlanningWorkbench

Lesson OverviewThis lesson describes the technical relationship between SAP MAP and the SAP Retailsystem. You plan markdowns in BI first and then assign the markdown proposals tothe relevant articles in a second step. You then execute the slow seller analysis toobtain proposals for price changes using the markdown profiles generated.





Business ExampleYou can carry out time-related markdown planning using Slow Seller Management inMerchandise and Assortment Planning. This allows you to reduce warehouse stock atthe end of a season, and minimize markdown losses due to planned price cuts.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Slow Seller Management / Price Planning Workbench

Slow seller management

Figure 59: Slow Seller Management and Price Planning Workbench



Figure 60: Slow seller management: concept

The Slow Seller Management component is part of the SAP NetWeaver BI (SAPNetWeaver Business Intelligence) solution.

The Slow Seller Management process is subdivided into markdown planning andmarkdown control. During the planning phase, you define strategies and rules forgenerating markdown proposals during the control phase.

The control phase takes place in BI and begins for products with the planned start ofthe presentation period or with the first goods receipt at a store. Markdown proposalsare determined based on the sales and stock data and the rules defined. You cantransfer the markdown proposals to a system in which the proposals are inspected andoperational price changes are made if necessary. Data exchange can take place usingthe open XML standard and using SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure (SAP XI).You also have the option of transferring markdown proposals directly to the pricingworklist in an SAP Retail system and continuing processing there.

The slow seller analysis uses sales and stock data in SAP NetWeaver BI to generateproposals for price changes using the markdown profiles.

The Price Planning Workbench (PPW) is a new function in SAP Retail (as of ERP6.0) and represents the central tool for processing markdowns, manual price changes,and promotions (creating promotions directly, controlling promotions).


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Slow Seller Management / Price Planning Workbench

When processing markdowns, the PPW is the central tool for calculating the new salesprice based on the markdown proposal, for calculating the markdown volume, andcomparing it with the available markdown budget, which can be transferred from BI.You can create conditions manually and supply the POS systems with price changedata.



Lesson Summary






TIRT10_2 Unit Summary


















Test Your Knowledge

1. The Business ContentChoose the correct answer(s).

□ A is part of SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence□ B comprises elements such as workbooks, queries, and roles

□ C is a separate database□ D is a data store



Answers

1. The Business Content

Answer: A, B

The Business Content is part of SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence. Itprovides role- and task-based data models, such as workbooks, queries,InfoSources, InfoProviders, key figures, and characteristics.


Unit 3Requirements Planning & Stock

Allocation

Unit OverviewThis section describes requirements planning procedures that are typical of retail, bothfor distribution centers and for stores. It also introduces the replenishment processusing the SAP Forecasting and Replenishment solution.

The pricing section contains information on pricing in SAP Retail.


• Describe the requirements planning process

• Explain special requirements planning procedures

• Explain how the planning workbench works

• Explain the basic principles of the “Replenishment” and “Store Order” functions

• Make a distinction between the two inventory management types inreplenishment planning

• Use the parameter overview and the replenishment monitor for replenishmentplanning

• Describe the replenishment process using SAP F&R.

• Explain the special features of a causal-based forecast.

• Name the systems that you require to use SAP F&R.

• Use sales price calculation in SAP Retail

• Explain the differences between one-step and two-step calculations

• Explain the purchasing pricing process in SAP Retail

• Explain the process flow of price optimization in SAP DM

• Name the retailer's options for influencing the optimization mechanism

• Understand the meaning of the most important parameters, such as priceelasticity and price image


Unit 3: Requirements Planning & Stock Allocation TIRT10_2

Unit ContentsLesson: Requirements Planning .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .135

Exercise 5: DC Requirements Planning.. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .141Lesson: Replenishment Planning.. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .150

Exercise 6: Replenishment. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .153Lesson: SAP Forecasting and Replenishment . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .161Lesson: Pricing. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .176

Exercise 7: Pricing .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .181Lesson: SAP Demand Management . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .192


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Requirements Planning

Lesson: Requirements Planning

Lesson OverviewThe role of requirements planning is to guarantee the availability of goods for therecipient (stores or customers), and therefore also for consumers. To ensure thatrequirement quantities can be determined and entered on time, certain activities mustbe triggered in the system, such as monitoring stocks, creating forecasts, calculatingrequirement quantities and generating follow-on documents for procurement. Theseactivities can be executed by automatic requirements planning. Purchase requisitionsare generated by a requirements planning run here. These can be converted to purchaseorder proposals (automatically if necessary) and are used as the basis for purchasing.





Business ExampleYou carry out requirements planning for your merchandise at regular intervals in thewarehouse. A worklist containing purchase requisitions is generated as a result ofyour requirements planning. These purchase requisitions can be converted to purchaseorders in a subsequent step.



Figure 61: Requirements Planning: Targets

The main purpose of requirements planning in retailing is to monitor stock andautomatically generate procurement proposals for Purchasing. This aim is achievedusing various requirements planning procedures.

Both the use of a centralized purchasing policy, with ordering autonomy in the handsof the head office alone and local purchasing autonomy (partial or complete) aresupported by the system.



Figure 62: Requirements Planning: Process Flow

The result of requirements planning is a worklist of purchase requisitions, which aregenerated by the requirements planning run.

The requirements planning run can be generated in two ways:

• Total Planning

In this case, entries are read from a planning file and requirements are plannedfor the articles specified in this file. The entries in this planning file are createdby events affecting requirements planning (such as goods receipts or issues,changes in master data, and sales orders). They can also be created manually orusing the planning cycle defined for an article for which time-phased planningis performed. Total planning can be triggered online or scheduled in thebackground.

• Partial Planning

In this case, requirements planning is carried out for an individual article, or acertain number of articles from a particular vendor (irrespective of the entriesthat exist in the planning file). In the latter case, you can for example selectarticles according to the vendor subrange (VSR), merchandise category (MC),purchasing group, or stock planner.

The requirements planning run includes existing documents (for example, purchaseorders or sales orders) using planned goods issues and receipts.



Planning Workbench

Figure 63: Planning Workbench

Stock planners use the Planning Workbench to create planning data online and useInternet services. The stock planner can use online planning for external vendors tocarry out planning online. They can have vendors proposed to them on the basis of theorder days planned (order cycle) and can see all existing purchase orders. They canthen for example decide whether they should increase the quantity or whether theyneed to order additional articles.

The planning workbench provides you with a worklist from which you can jump tothe application (for example, online planning) at a click of the mouse. This makesnavigation easy. You can specify how the worklist and the application are displayed.

Online planning combines the advantages of automatic requirements determinationwith those of manual order processing. For external vendors the system can proposearticles and purchase order quantities that the stock planner is then able to verifyusing other available details. All details are provided in one overview, for example,a vendor's articles, the available purchase orders for this vendor and details relevantfor requirements planning, such as the current stock, regular purchase orders, salesfor the last period.



Apart from those articles which you definitely know are required, in online planningyou can also plan for articles for which no requirement has been determined, so that,for example, you can meet minimum order criteria. It is therefore possible for you toselect all the articles that a vendor can supply.



Exercise 5: DC Requirements Planning


• Name the planning-related settings in SAP Retail

• Display historical consumption values and forecast consumption values forarticles.

• Perform requirements planning

Business ExampleToday (Wednesday) is the day that you can place orders with your vendor. Youtherefore want to plan requirements for your distribution center with this vendor.

Task 1: MRP-Related SettingsYou want to find out how certain articles in your distribution center are planned.You therefore display some settings for requirements planning in the site and articlemasters. Pay attention to the validity areas in the header area.

1. How do you normally run requirements planning and forecasting for articlesR1TA04## and R1TA05## in your distribution centers?

R1TA04## R1TA05##

RP type

RP lot size

Forecast model

Period indicator

2. Use the [RP/Forecast Data] pushbutton to display additional information aboutrequirements planning and forecasting. Find the historical values that are takeninto consideration when running forecasting for article R1TA04## and theperiods for which requirements have been forecasted.

Historical periods: _________________

Forecast periods: ______________________




3. Now check the settings for article R1TA04## in your distribution center R7##.Where are the differences? On what day of the week are articles for distributioncenter R7## ordered? When are they delivered? You will find the answer to thisin the planning cycle and delivery cycle:

Planning cycle (planning day): _________________

Delivery cycle (day of delivery): __________________

4. Display the historical consumption values and the forecasted consumption valuesfor articles R1TA04## and R1TA05##in distribution center R7##.

Task 2: Execute requirements planningYou want to run requirements planning for the articles that you order from vendorR1TV05## for distribution center RT7##.

1. Trigger requirements planning for vendor R1TV05##, purchasing organizationR300 and distribution center R7##. The planning date should be set toWednesday of this week so that the requirements planning data that is created ismore usable. First display the article selection for the vendor.

2. You are in the article selection for vendor R1TV05##. Today, you just want toorder articles R1TA04## and R1TA05## from this vendor. You therefore selectthese articles in the article list that is displayed. Run interactive planning for botharticles. Find the following data for your distribution center R7##:

Article R1TA04## R1TA05##

Stock:

Pur Rqs:

Safety St:

Delivery date of thepurchase requisition:

Purchase requisitionnumber:

Save your planning data.




Task 3: Stock/Requirements ListYou can use the stock/requirements list to obtain information about your planningresults (also at a later date).

1. Display the stock/requirements list for your articles R1TA04## and R1TA05##for your distribution center R7##. You can choose to access this list usingindividual access or collective access.



Solution 5: DC Requirements Planning

Task 1: MRP-Related SettingsYou want to find out how certain articles in your distribution center are planned.You therefore display some settings for requirements planning in the site and articlemasters. Pay attention to the validity areas in the header area.

1. How do you normally run requirements planning and forecasting for articlesR1TA04## and R1TA05## in your distribution centers?

R1TA04## R1TA05##

RP type

RP lot size

Forecast model

Period indicator


Enter only the article number according to the exercise and select theLogistics: Distribution Center view. Confirm with [Enter].

R1TA04## R1TA05##

RP type R1 R1

RP lot size EX EX

Forecast model D D

Period indicator W W

Then stay in the Logistics: Distribution Center view in the article master.

2. Use the [RP/Forecast Data] pushbutton to display additional information aboutrequirements planning and forecasting. Find the historical values that are takeninto consideration when running forecasting for article R1TA04## and theperiods for which requirements have been forecasted.

Historical periods: _________________




Forecast periods: ______________________

a) In article master R1TA04## choose the [RP/Forecast Data] pushbutton togo to the Number of periods required subscreen.

Historical periods: 60

Forecast periods: 12

Use [Back] to return to the Logistics: Distribution Center view.

3. Now check the settings for article R1TA04## in your distribution center R7##.Where are the differences? On what day of the week are articles for distributioncenter R7## ordered? When are they delivered? You will find the answer to thisin the planning cycle and delivery cycle:

Planning cycle (planning day): _________________

Delivery cycle (day of delivery): __________________

a) Choose Edit→ Switch area of validity in the menu bar and enter yourdistribution center according to the exercise. The following data isdisplayed:

R1TA04##

RP type R2

RP lot size EX

Forecast model D

Period indicator W

Planning cycle P02 (Order Day Wednesday)

Delivery cycle L02 (Delivery Day Friday)

Historical periods 10

Then stay in the Logistics: Distribution Center view in article masterR1TA04##.




4. Display the historical consumption values and the forecasted consumption valuesfor articles R1TA04## and R1TA05##in distribution center R7##.

a) You are still in the Logistics: Distribution Center view in article masterR1TA04## and you choose [Consumption vals]. The consumption valuesfor article R1TA04## are constant at 1152 pieces per week.

Choose [Back] and then choose [Forecast values]. Twelve forecast valuesare calculated, which are constant at 1152 pieces per week.

Choose [Back] to return to the initial screen of the article master.

b) For article R1TA05## go back into the Logistics: Distribution Center viewin the article master and choose [Consumption Values]. The consumptionvalues for article R1TA05## are constant at 1440 pieces per week.

Choose [Back] and then choose [Forecast values]. Twelve forecast valuesare calculated, which are constant at 1440 pieces per week.

Task 2: Execute requirements planningYou want to run requirements planning for the articles that you order from vendorR1TV05## for distribution center RT7##.

1. Trigger requirements planning for vendor R1TV05##, purchasing organizationR300 and distribution center R7##. The planning date should be set toWednesday of this week so that the requirements planning data that is created ismore usable. First display the article selection for the vendor.

a) Purchasing→ Requirements Planning→ Requirements Planning→ Planby Vendor

Make the settings as specified in the task and confirm the informationmessage: Please check input parameters.

2. You are in the article selection for vendor R1TV05##. Today, you just want toorder articles R1TA04## and R1TA05## from this vendor. You therefore selectthese articles in the article list that is displayed. Run interactive planning for botharticles. Find the following data for your distribution center R7##:


Stock:

Pur Rqs:




Safety St:

Delivery date of thepurchase requisition:


Save your planning data.

a) Select both articles R1TA04## and R1TA05## in the list and chooseRequirements Planning→ Interactive planning.

The table is read row by row:

Date RP element/Data R1TA04##

Today (Wednesday) Stock: 384 pieces

Safety St: None

Friday Pur Rqs: 1344 pieces


Date RP element/Data R1TA05##

Today (Wednesday) Stock: 2172 pieces

Safety St: 12 pieces

One week from Friday Pur Rqs: 1440 pieces


The current stock is shown the Available qty column and has the RPelement data (stock). The second row contains the requirement quantitydetermined in the Rec./Reqd.qty column with the RP element PurRqs(purchase requisition) on the right hand side. The number of the purchaserequisition created is displayed in the RP element data column. This entryis relevant for planning for the specified date (left-hand column).

Choose Planning→ Save and save both of the requirements plans.




Task 3: Stock/Requirements ListYou can use the stock/requirements list to obtain information about your planningresults (also at a later date).

1. Display the stock/requirements list for your articles R1TA04## and R1TA05##for your distribution center R7##. You can choose to access this list usingindividual access or collective access.

a) Purchasing→ Requirements Planning→ Requirements Planning→Stock/Requirements List

Article R1TA04##, distribution center R7##. The system displays theresults of the planning run here. The table is read row by row. The currentstock is shown the Available qty column and has the RP element data(stock).

The second row contains the requirement quantity determined in theRec./reqd.qty column with the RP element PurRqs (purchase requisition).The number of the purchase requisition created is displayed in the RPelement data column. This entry is relevant for planning for the specifieddate (left-hand column).



Lesson Summary







Lesson: Replenishment Planning

Lesson OverviewReplenishment planning is a procedure for the demand-oriented merchandise supplyof recipients (sites or external customers). When planning replenishment, therequirements are determined using the stock situation and then follow-on documentsare generated automatically for the merchandise supply. Replenishment planningis usually performed as background processing. It can only be used for stores orcustomers.





Business ExampleDuring replenishment planning, the system observes requirements according to thegoods movements that have taken place in the stores affected. Sales are entered in thestores here and posted as goods issues using POS inbound processing. A specific typeof inventory management is used according to the replenishment procedure selected.The system determines the replenishment requirement quantity and transfers this tothe store order function. Once supply source determination has taken place, the storeorder function generates a procurement document according to the setting made here.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Replenishment Planning

Figure 64: Replenishment

Replenishment is a procedure for the demand-oriented merchandise supplyof recipients (sites or external customers). When planning replenishment, therequirements are determined using the stock situation and then follow-on documents(for example, purchase requisitions, purchase orders, sales orders and outbounddeliveries) are generated automatically for the merchandise supply.

Replenishment for customers is used within the framework of Vendor ManagedInventory (VMI), to carry out the requirements planning as a service.



Exercise 6: Replenishment


• List the master data used to control replenishment

• Run replenishment in SAP Retail and control the documents that are generated

Business ExampleYou want to generate future purchase orders for the distribution center or externalvendors automatically on the basis of the sales data in your system.

Task:You plan to supply your stores R4## and R5## centrally with merchandise usingreplenishment planning.

1. Use the parameter overview to display the articles that are procured for recipientsR4## and R5## using replenishment planning. What is the RP type for articlesR1TA15## and R1TA16## ?

2. Which replenishment master data is maintained in the parameter overview forthe following articles?

Store Article Stock Targetstock

Reorderpoint

Safetystock

R4## R1TA15##

R4## R1TA16##

R5## R1TA15##

R5## R1TA16##




3. How do you know if replenishment-based Inventory Management is activatedfor an article? For which articles is replenishment-based Inventory Managementactivated?

4. What is the function of the reorder point? Use the F1 Help.

5. Trigger replenishment planning for articles R1TA15## and R1TA16## for yourstore (recipient) R5##.

What article quantities are suggested for procurement?

R1TA15## R1TA16##

Replenishmentrequirement quantity(EA)

6. Have the system generate follow-on documents and look at the result in thereplenishment monitor.

Go to the view for each generated document. What types of follow-on documentshave been generated? Determine the following data:

Follow-on document 1 Follow-on document 2

Order Type

Vendor

Supplying site

Article

Document number




7. What quantities of these articles do you want to order? Which article master datawas used to calculate these PO quantities? (To find this information, go to thearticle master for both articles and check the units of measure).

R1TA15## R1TA16##

PO Quantity



Solution 6: Replenishment

Task:You plan to supply your stores R4## and R5## centrally with merchandise usingreplenishment planning.

1. Use the parameter overview to display the articles that are procured for recipientsR4## and R5## using replenishment planning. What is the RP type for articlesR1TA15## and R1TA16## ?

a) Sales→ Replenishment→ Overview→ Parameters


Recipient R4## and R5##

Article R1TA15## and R1TA16##

Execute the program. The RP type is found in the RP type column. ArticlesR1TA15## and R1TA16## have the RP RP type.

2. Which replenishment master data is maintained in the parameter overview forthe following articles?


Reorderpoint

Safetystock

R4## R1TA15##

R4## R1TA16##

R5## R1TA15##

R5## R1TA16##

a) The following values are maintained in the parameter overview:


Reorderpoint

Safetystock

R4## R1TA15## 79 1500 300 230

R4## R1TA16## 0 1500 300 10

R5## R1TA15## 38 1500 300 250

R5## R1TA16## 0 1500 400 25




3. How do you know if replenishment-based Inventory Management is activatedfor an article? For which articles is replenishment-based Inventory Managementactivated?

Answer: Replenishment-based Inventory Management is activated for thearticles for which the fields in the Replenishment-based IM and Correct RScolumns are flagged.

Replenishment-based Inventory Management is activated for article R1TA16##.

4. What is the function of the reorder point? Use the F1 Help.

Answer: The reorder point is the quantity (stock level) below which thereplenishment process triggers the procurement transaction. If no reorder pointis specified, the procurement transaction is triggered as soon as there is ashortfall of the target stock.

5. Trigger replenishment planning for articles R1TA15## and R1TA16## for yourstore (recipient) R5##.

What article quantities are suggested for procurement?

R1TA15## R1TA16##


a) Sales→ Replenishment→ Replenishments Planning→ Execute



Recipient R5##


and run the program. The following replenishment requirement quantitiesare calculated:

R1TA15## R1TA16##


1462 pieces 1500 pieces




6. Have the system generate follow-on documents and look at the result in thereplenishment monitor.

Go to the view for each generated document. What types of follow-on documentshave been generated? Determine the following data:

Follow-on document 1 Follow-on document 2

Order Type

Vendor

Supplying site

Article

Document number

a) Replenishment requirements→ Follow-on documents

Confirm the dialog box with [Enter] and double-click the relevant purchaseorder (purchase order number).

Follow-on document1

Follow-on document2

Order Type STO SPO

Vendor - R1TV06##

Supplying site R8## -


Document number 45..... 45.....

7. What quantities of these articles do you want to order? Which article master datawas used to calculate these PO quantities? (To find this information, go to thearticle master for both articles and check the units of measure).




R1TA15## R1TA16##

PO Quantity

a)

R1TA15## R1TA16##

PO Quantity 121 CSE 4 PAL

b) Stay in the relevant purchase order, select the item in the item overviewand use Environment→ Article to go to the article master. Now select thebasic data view. The order unit/warehouse unit of issue is defined forboth articles using CSE. The warehouse unit of issue is used for the stocktransport order (article R1TA15##). The system converts the replenishmentrequirement quantity to CSE (1462 EA / 12 = 121.8333 CSE).

Also select the purchasing view for vendor R1TV06## for articleR1TA16##. Here the order unit is specified using PAL. The systemconverts the replenishment requirement quantity to PAL (1500 EA / 360= 4.1666 PAL).



Lesson Summary






TIRT10_2 Lesson: SAP Forecasting and Replenishment

Lesson: SAP Forecasting and Replenishment

Lesson OverviewThis lesson describes the central features of the business scenario SAP Forecastingand Replenishment (SAP F&R).





Business ExampleYou want to optimize replenishment at your stores or distribution centers by:

• Using a very good forecast that observes specific events

• Displaying purchase order proposals, which can be released at a very highpercentage rate without any additional processing.

• Highly automate the process

• Monitor the process using the analyses in SAP NetWeaver BI.

To do so, use the SAP Forecasting and Replenishment component in SAP SupplyChain Management.



Figure 65: SAP Forecasting & Replenishment

SAP Forecasting and Replenishment is a component of SAP Supply ChainManagement (SAP SCM, as of Release 4.1); an SAP Retail System (as of Release4.6C, PI 2004.1) or any other SAP system can be connected as a master data system.

Main features:

• Exact forecast that observes specific events, such as public holidays and retailpromotions, reduction in stocks and ranges of coverage.

• Short-term and long-term operative planning for products that are procuredregularly or seasonally.

• High level of automation

• Data provision (sales, forecasts etc.) for vendors (Collaborative Planning,Forecasting and Replenishment).

SAP also offers a workshop on SAP Forecasting and Replenishment (W26FRW).



Figure 66: Possible system landscape

You can only use SAP Forecasting and Replenishment if you connect it to an ERPsystem providing SAP F&R with relevant data (master data, stock levels, etc.).Inbound interfaces for SAP F&R are fully included. If you are using SAP Retail (fromRelease 4.6C, Plug-In 2004.1), the standard interfaces for providing SAP F&R withdata and importing purchase orders are available.

POS data is also required during planning for stores. Many different types ofconnection are possible here. In terms of performance, SAP recommends loading thePOS data to SAP F&R using a SAP Business Information Warehouse in conjunctionwith SAP POS Data Management, so that data does not first have to be updated inthe SAP Retail System. However, it is also possible to reference sales from the SAPRetail System.

There is also the option of using SAP Business Intelligence to evaluate SAPF&R-relevant business quantities. To do so, data (such as master data, stocks) fromthe SAP Retail System and SAP F&R-specific data (SAP F&R master data and keyfigures) is extracted from SAP F&R. SAP F&R Business Content (as of BI CONT3.53) is available to you for the evaluation.



Figure 67: Core Process in SAP F&R

The system performs a replenishment run in the SAP F&R business scenario, whichconsists of the main steps forecast, requirements calculation and requirements quantityoptimization.

The requirements calculation involves calculating the safety stock and the netrequirement. The basis for this calculation is data determined during scheduling, suchas order, delivery and availability days, as well as actual stocks, target stocks and opengoods receipt and goods issue quantities.

Requirements quantity optimization covers:

• Logistical rounding

• Observation of vendor restrictions (such as minimum order quantities)

• Determination of an optimum purchase order quantity according to capital tie-up(warehouse costs versus purchase order costs).



Figure 68: Causal-Based Forecast

Historical sales (POS data) on the article for the last two years is used as the basis forforecasting articles for a store.

The following can be used as the basis for forecasting:

• Goods issues from the DC

• Aggregated store purchase orders

• Aggregated sales data from stores

The forecast is carried out at location product level.

The causal-based forecast also takes account of the influence of events, such as publicholidays, retail promotions or sales price changes.

The forecast contains the identification of seasonal behavior and trends.

The forecast horizon and the frequency profile can be defined flexibly according towhether the forecast is to be performed for a short-term replenishable article or anarticle with a longer replenishment lead time. The system also supports the forecastfor articles that are temporarily not listed.



References, whose historical data is used as the basis for forecasting the new article,can be used for new articles that do not yet have a sales history. It is also possible touse an artificial history, which the system calculates from historical data for a group ofreferences (such as the entire goods group).

In addition to the operative forecast, a tactical forecast can also be created, which canbe made available to a vendor during collaborative planning (Collaborative Planning,Forecasting and Replenishment, CPFR). The tactical forecast has the same content asthe operative forecast, but may have a different forecast horizon.

Figure 69: Demand influencing factors

A demand influencing factor (DIF) is an external event with a significant influenceon sales or on the demand for an article in a site. The following are a few examplesof demand influencing factors:

• Public holidays, such as Easter or Christmas

• School holidays or the start of term

• Retail promotions

• Sales prices (and their changes)

• Local events, such as sports events

• Unusual weather, such as hurricanes or heat waves

• The number of stores supplied by one distribution center



A DIF occurrence is an actual occurrence of a DIF, such as Easter this year. Variousassignments are made for this: time periods, sites, articles, etc.

If you enter the actual DIF occurrence for locations and location products inthe system, the system analyzes the effect of historical occurrences on sales orconsumption of a product. This is included in the forecast for future DIF occurrences.The greater the frequency of a DIF occurrence in the past, the greater the accuracyof the forecast for a future occurrence of the same DIF.

Example: The system identifies an increase in consumption of a location productduring a historical promotion. The system will then include this increase for theforecast if this location product is found in the promotion again.

In addition, SAP F&R can also analyze related sales dependencies. For example, aretail promotion for a certain product could reduce sales of competing products, orconversely, increase the sales of products that are often purchased with the advertisedproduct or placed near it. Examples: During a promotion for a brand of cola itexperiences increased sales (promotion effect), sales for the competing cola brandsdrop (cannibalization effect), and in turn, potato chips are also stronger in demand(affinity effect).

A forecast that observes the demand influencing factors is referred to as acausal-based forecast.

Demand influencing factors can be divided into various types, such as:

Boolean: The event takes place or does not take place. It does not have an assignedvalue. The system checks the influence of the boolean event on the historical sale orrequirement, and calculates the forecast for a future occurrence of the event takingaccount of the increase or decrease factor determined. Example: Retail promotionsand advertising campaigns, public holidays.

Variable Season: You can use this type for events with a longer duration, such asChristmas or Easter. The system determines a separate effect for every week. Thismeans that variable trends can be represented.

Metric: The event has a value at all times. The system analyzes the connectionbetween the level of the value and sales.

Value: Similar to metric, but with restricted validity periods. Example: heat waves

Sales price: Metric DIF using sales prices that are obtained from the SAP RetailSystem master data.

Time series: Metric DIF using any time series (such as the number of stores suppliedby a DC, temperature).



Correction factors:

• Multiplicative: Forecast values are multiplied by a correction factor, for exampleduring the initial occurrence of an event (since the system has no previousexperience of this event).

• Additive or absolute: The correction value is added to the forecast or replacesthis, for example to represent planning data from retail promotions: thepromotion quantities can also be procured using SAP F&R.

• Weighting factor: Use of profiles that represent the development of forecastvalues over time (for example, higher sales at the start of a retail promotion andreduction in sales towards the end of the promotion).

• Ignore history: Historical periods are not observed in the forecast. Example:Store refit, or if planned quantities are made available by stock reductionduring a promotion and no increased replenishment is to be calculated for thedistribution center.

Figure 70: Multi-level replenishment based on aggregated order forecasts

As of Release SAP F&R 5.1, you can also use multi-level replenishment(Multi-Echelon Replenishment, MER) in distribution centers as an alternative tothe conventional replenishment. MER in SAP F&R means that replenishment iscalculated at every level of a delivery network using the requirements that have beenforecasted for all subordinate levels. The goal is to improve replenishment at the levelof the supplying locations (central and regional distribution centers).



Example: Your company has a two-level supply network of distribution center andseveral stores. When you want to use multi-level replenishment for the distributioncenter, the system proceeds as follows:

• Besides calculating sales forecasts for the stores, it also calculates their orderforecasts. Apart from considering the sales forecast for each location product, thesystem also takes into account order and delivery cycles, as well as forecastedstocks and a rounding to logistical units of measure.

• At the distribution center level the system totals the order forecasts of thesupplied stores for each product to form an aggregated order forecast. Thequantities are added up on the staging date of the distribution center, whichmeans the system takes into account on which date the quantities to be deliveredmust be available.

• The aggregated order forecasts can be used for the replenishment of thedistribution center in the following ways:

Indirectly, as a demand influencing factor, meaning the aggregated orderforecast influences the forecast for goods issues

Directly, as a forecast replacement, which means that the aggregated orderforecast serves as the basis for the requirements calculation, instead of theforecast for goods issues

You can also use the same principle in more complex networks that have more thantwo levels. Furthermore, you can also use aggregated order forecasts in connectionwith Collaborative Planning, Forecasting and Replenishment (CPFR) by making thedata available to external vendors for a collaboration.



Figure 71: SAP F&R – Process Overview

Forecasting, requirements calculation and optimization all take place in theForecasting and Replenishment processor. Purchase order proposals are generatedfor a requirement.

Exceptions can be generated in all steps. The exceptions are processed in theexception handling/manual release process.

The system can release purchase order proposals automatically in release management.If serious exceptions have occurred or release conditions have not been met, releasemanagement blocks automatic release. You must release these types of purchase orderproposal manually once the exceptions have been processed.

Purchase order proposals that have been released manually or automatically can betransferred to the SAP Retail System, where they are converted to purchase ordersautomatically.

To perform a qualitative evaluation of SAP Forecasting and Replenishment, youcan perform analyses in SAP Business Intelligence or another legacy system. TheSAP F&R Business Content in SAP NetWeaver BI contains a series of pre-definedevaluations.



During operative SAP F&R processing, the system determines key figures, whichare used as the basis for the analyses in SAP NetWeaver BI . Two types of reportscan be created:

• Exception-based reports: Exception situations such as understock and overstock,stockouts, lost sales and undelivered products are entered here.

• Non-exception-based reports: These reports trace development over a specifictime period, such as variances of minimum stock level, stock history, servicegrade history, range of coverage, dead stock, forecast quality and history ofmanually changed purchase order proposals.

Depending on the business targets in place, the reports can be ordered according tocategories, such as warehouse stock, forecast quality, stability of solution and manualaccess frequency. The objective here is to improve to optimize the quality of SAPF&R by adjusting parameters or changing demand influencing factors.

SAP F&R also provides optional data, which is made available to vendors to optimizetheir processes (procurement, production). This can be POS data, operative andtactical forecast data and forecast values, which are caused by demand influencingfactors.

Figure 72: Example of transferring a promotion from SAP Retail



Retail promotions in the SAP Retail System can be handled in a variety of differentways in SAP F&R:

• Demand influencing factor of the boolean type (no transfer of planned quantities)You require at least one occurrence of the same type of historical promotionso that the system can determine the influence of this historical event onconsumptions and use this for the forecast.

• Demand influencing factor of the absolute correction factor type. This meansthat the planned quantities are transferred to SAP F&R and replace the forecastvalues, assuming that the promotion quantities already contain the standardrequirements.

• Demand influencing factor of the additive correction factor type. This meansthat the planned quantities are transferred to SAP F&R and added to the forecastvalues, assuming that the promotion quantities do not contain the standardrequirements.

Alternatively, you can also ignore the promotion in SAP F&R by planning andprocuring the entire promotion in SAP Retail, but observing the purchase orders asopen purchase order quantities in SAP F&R, so that you do not need to additionallyprocure requirements in SAP F&R.

Figure 73: Planning Workbench in SAP F&R



The planning workbench in SAP F&R is the central tool for the stock planner. Theycan check purchase order proposals that were generated automatically, release anypurchase order proposals that have not yet been released, and create manual purchaseorder proposals.

The stock planner receives detailed information for each purchase order proposal item:Master data, movement data, demand influencing factors, costing results from theSAP F&R processor, logistical rounding settings. This data can also be used to supportmanual planning and requirements simulation and planned goods issues and receipts.

The stock planner also receives detailed information on commercial and technicalexception situations (if information on the latter is required). They can for example beinformed by the system that an article in a store is not found in a sufficient quantity tobe available by the delivery date. Alternatively, they can be warned that the stockswere not updated during the replenishment calculation. These types of exceptionscan be distributed between the different roles in the retail company and support dataand system maintenance.

In addition to location-based requirements planning in the planning workbench,product-based requirements planning is also available to the stock planner in theproduct workbench. Here he or she can monitor the entire assortment and, forexample, manually plan requirements for all products that were not automaticallyplanned. In order to find these products, he or she can define criteria such as zerostock, backlogged purchase orders or specific exception messages, which the systemcan use to find critical products and suggest for manual planning.



Figure 74: SAP F&R Analyses

SAP F&R provides key figures and key performance indicators, which you can use toevaluate the quality of SAP F&R in any data warehouse (ideally with SAP NetWeaverBI). SAP NetWeaver BI contains comprehensive BI content for SAP F&R, whichyou can use to analyze the operative section of the business scenario. This includesstandard analyses, which provide stock planners with important information onthe replenishment process, the level of automation, the forecast quality and stockdevelopment etc.



Lesson Summary







Lesson: Pricing

Lesson OverviewYou can use the sales price calculation to create the purchase price and the salesprice for a group of articles (mass maintenance) in the system. The system displaysimportant parameters here, such as pricing currency, unit of measure, plannedmarkups.

Purchasing pricing shows you how the system searches for existing conditions duringcreation of a purchase order and uses these to determine a price in the purchase order.Pricing takes place in the background in a series of steps: You can display the result ofthis using the analysis in each document.





Business ExampleYou want to use retail pricing in your company. For this reason, you find out abouthow to display the sales price calculation in the form of a pricing table and familiarizeyourself with the different control elements of sales price calculation. There isa general rule in your company that sales prices for consumers are rounded topsychologically significant price points.

Using the example of a vendor purchase order, display pricing in the purchasing area.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Pricing

Retail Pricing

Figure 75: One-Step Price Calculation

When sites are supplied directly from vendors, a sales price calculation called"one-step price calculation" is used. The calculation of the sales prices for the storesis based on the purchase price from the external vendor. You may therefore end upwith different purchase prices for stores, for example, from different store-dependentbasic purchase prices or vendor discounts.

It is also possible to perform the sales price calculation based on the sales price youwant to use. The system will then automatically calculate different factors, such as themargin. The actual markup that is determined can also be overwritten.



Figure 76: Two-step price calculation

In addition to stores being supplied directly by an external vendor, you also findanother process in the logistics of a retail company: the vendor first sends the articlesto a distribution center, from where they are then distributed within the company tostores and franchisees.

In accordance with this two-step process, a two-step calculation can be performed inthe sales price calculation, in which the purchasing prices of the stores are based onthe transfer price of the distribution center.



Price Determination

Figure 77: Price Determination

When you create a purchase order, the system searches for existing conditions in thepurchasing view for the article (article info record), in contracts (when a contract iscalled) and in the general conditions. The conditions are then used as default valuesfor the new document.

Price determination consists of the following steps:

• The relevant calculation schema is determined using the schema assignment

• All the condition types listed in the calculation schema are searched to determineif they contain condition records - this can only be done if an access sequence isassigned to a condition type

• Condition records are searched for in the sequence that is defined using theaccess sequence

• The search is complete when a valid condition record has been found. Theexclusive indicator in the access sequence gains in importance when this done.The exclusive indicator controls whether the search is cancelled or not when thefirst valid condition record is located. Alternatively, the last located recordis valid.



Exercise 7: Pricing


• Distinguish between a one-step and two-step price calculation

• Maintain prices for each distribution chain in pricing

• Use the price overview to find out about article prices

• Display the analysis of purchase price determination

• Understand purchase price determination in a standard purchase order anddisplay the analysis of it

Business ExampleYou want to make price changes for several articles in a specific distribution chain.Use pricing to do so, and then display the sales prices using a price overview.

Task 1: Create PricingYou want to change the sales prices for articles R1TA06## and R1TA15## fordistribution chain RG10/R1.

1. To do this, you want to create a new price calculation with the following data:



Distribution Chain RG10/R1 and R5

Validity Today until end of this month

Copy all other settings and access pricing. What final prices are displayed forthe article in the price calculation when it is accessed?

DistributionChain

Vendor R1TA15## R1TA06##

RG10/R1 R700

RG10/R5 R1TV05## /R1TV06##




2. Maintain a markup of 10% for the article R1TA15## and distribution chainRG10/R5 and a final price of 2.99 USD for distribution chain RG10/R1. Thearticle R1TA06## is to have a final price of 1.99 USD.

You then select both lines for both articles and save your entries. Access thepricing again. Which data is displayed as the old final price (Cur Retail)?

DistributionChain


RG10/R1 R700

RG10/R5 R1TV05## /R1TV06##

3. How do you know if this is a one-step or two-step price calculation?

4. Access the article master record R1TA15## from the price calculation anddisplay the Supply source field in the Logistics: Store view. Which setting isdisplayed and what does it mean?

5. Now go to the price overview and maintain the following data:




Copy all other settings and access the price overview. What data is displayedfor the articles in the price overview?




DistributionChain

R1TA15## R1TA06##

Current month RG10/R1

Remaining time RG10/R1



Exit the price overview.

Task 2: Analysis of Purchase Price DeterminationYou want to track purchase price determination in a purchase order.

1. For your vendor R1TV05## you create a standard purchase order for yourdistribution center R8## in storage location 0001 (standard). Before creating thearticles and quantities in the item overview, use the option for defining defaultvalues (Default Values pushbutton). Enter the following data:


Delivery date in a week

Site R8##

Storage Location 0001 (standard)

Create a standard purchase order:

Maintain the following values at header level for organizational data:


Purchasing Org. R300

Purchasing group R30

Company code R300

Maintain the following values in the item overview:





Article R1TA15##

PO Quantity 1

Order unit CSE

What happens when you press [Enter] ?




2. Now access the conditions on the item detail screen. Which supplementaryconditions are determined?

3. Choose the line with the condition type FRB1 (Freight (Value) and display thecorresponding condition record. What is displayed?

4. Go back to the item detail screen and display the (purchase price determination)analysis. What is displayed? Which calculation schema was determined?

5. Open the condition record called Article Info Record in the condition type PB00(Basic purchase price) and double click on the found condition value 1.99 USD.What is displayed?

Now exit the application without saving the purchase order.



Solution 7: Pricing

Task 1: Create PricingYou want to change the sales prices for articles R1TA06## and R1TA15## fordistribution chain RG10/R1.

1. To do this, you want to create a new price calculation with the following data:




Validity Today until end of this month

Copy all other settings and access pricing. What final prices are displayed forthe article in the price calculation when it is accessed?

DistributionChain


RG10/R1 R700

RG10/R5 R1TV05## /R1TV06##

a) Master Data→ Pricing→ Price calculation→ Create

Enter the data in the fields as specified in the task and select [Execute].The following final prices are displayed:

DistributionChain


RG10/R1 R700 2,59 1,29

RG10/R5 R1TV05## /R1TV06##

23,88 12,36

2. Maintain a markup of 10% for the article R1TA15## and distribution chainRG10/R5 and a final price of 2.99 USD for distribution chain RG10/R1. Thearticle R1TA06## is to have a final price of 1.99 USD.




You then select both lines for both articles and save your entries. Access thepricing again. Which data is displayed as the old final price (Cur Retail)?

DistributionChain


RG10/R1 R700

RG10/R5 R1TV05## /R1TV06##

a) Make your entries according to the exercise and then save your pricecalculation. The system issues the following message: Data saved; pricingdocument X created. When you access it again, the following old finalprices (Cur. Retail) are displayed:

DistributionChain


RG10/R1 R700 2,99 1,99

RG10/R5 R1TV05## /R1TV06##

26,27 12,36

3. How do you know if this is a one-step or two-step price calculation?

Answer: If, for example, you make a change in the second line (distributionchain RG10/R5) in the Final Price column that is ready for input, this affects thefirst line and therefore also affects the sales price for distribution chain RG10/R1.The price calculation of both lines is related. It is a two-step price calculation.

4. Access the article master record R1TA15## from the price calculation anddisplay the Supply source field in the Logistics: Store view. Which setting isdisplayed and what does it mean?

a) Use Environment→ Article to access the article master record R1TA15##from the price calculation. Display the Source of Supply field in theLogistics: Store view. The source of supply key is 2 = Stock transfer. Thismeans that it is a two-step price calculation.

5. Now go to the price overview and maintain the following data:







Copy all other settings and access the price overview. What data is displayedfor the articles in the price overview?

DistributionChain

R1TA15## R1TA06##





Exit the price overview.

a) Pricing→ Conditions→ Price overview

Make your settings as specified in the task. The following data is displayed:

DistributionChain

R1TA15## R1TA06##

Current month RG10/R1 2,99 1,99

Remaining time RG10/R1 2,59 1,29

Current month RG10/R5 26,27 12,36

Remaining time RG10/R5 - -

Then exit the price overview.

Task 2: Analysis of Purchase Price DeterminationYou want to track purchase price determination in a purchase order.

1. For your vendor R1TV05## you create a standard purchase order for yourdistribution center R8## in storage location 0001 (standard). Before creating thearticles and quantities in the item overview, use the option for defining defaultvalues (Default Values pushbutton). Enter the following data:





Delivery date in a week

Site R8##


Create a standard purchase order:

Maintain the following values at header level for organizational data:




Company code R300

Maintain the following values in the item overview:


Article R1TA15##

PO Quantity 1

Order unit CSE

What happens when you press [Enter] ?

a) Purchasing→ Purchase Order→ Purchase Order→ Create→ VendorKnown

Enter the values from the exercise and then confirm them by pressing[Enter]. The system determines a purchase price. This is displayed in theNet Price column. It is USD 1.99.

2. Now access the conditions on the item detail screen. Which supplementaryconditions are determined?

Answer: Supplementary condition FRB1 (Freight (Value) is displayed with10 USD.




3. Choose the line with the condition type FRB1 (Freight (Value) and display thecorresponding condition record. What is displayed?

Answer: The gross price from the article master, the scales that have beenmaintained here and the supplementary condition FRB1 (Freight (Value) aredisplayed.

4. Go back to the item detail screen and display the (purchase price determination)analysis. What is displayed? Which calculation schema was determined?

Answer: On the Conditions tab page, choose the Analysis pushbutton. Inan overview tree on the left part of the screen the four levels of conditiondetermination are displayed: calculation schema, condition type, conditionaccess and condition record. The determined calculation schema is RMISR0.

5. Open the condition record called Article Info Record in the condition type PB00(Basic purchase price) and double click on the found condition value 1.99 USD.What is displayed?

Now exit the application without saving the purchase order.

Answer: The gross price from the article master and the scales that have beenmaintained here are displayed. The gross price is 1.99 USD. From 100 EAthe gross price is 1.50 USD.



Lesson Summary







Lesson: SAP Demand Management

Lesson OverviewYou can optimize sales prices using SAP Demand Management (SAP DM). SAPDM supports you in all price tasks with the three areas: normal price calculation,promotion pricing and markdown calculation.





Business ExampleYou want to implement SAP Demand Management in your enterprise. You want touse it to optimize your sales prices for certain article groupings. You want to do thisfor normal price calculation, promotion pricing and markdown calculation. You havechosen articles that have a sales history and have experienced price changes duringthis time.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: SAP Demand Management

Figure 78: Possible system landscape with connection from SAP DemandManagement

SAP Demand Management (SAP DM) is a component of the SAP Portfolio forRetail and comprises the three applications: promotion price, markdown price andregular price optimization. For a price analysis with subsequent optimization, SAPDM first requires master data for the articles to be analyzed. This can come from anSAP Retail system or another retailing system. The data is loaded into separate textfiles either directly or using PI (Process Infrastructure). The files are transferredto SAP DM using a file server.

The last two years of sales data of the articles to be analyzed is also required, whichcan come from either SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP BI) or anotherdata warehouse system. This data is also loaded into corresponding text files onthe file server and transferred from there to SAP DM. Here it is advantageous if thearticle concerned experienced regular price changes (in the sales price) during thetime window.



Figure 79: Traditional Pricing

Traditional retail pricing can proceed in various ways:

You define percentage markups and add them to the purchase price using markupcalculation. Psychological price point rounding can be taken into account here. Thesystem determines a sales price.

In the competitor calculation, sales prices of the competition are used as anorientation point to determine the sales prices.



Figure 80: Traditional Pricing II

Sales prices in the form of promotion prices are created for each promotion, and theyare valid for specific stores and for a specific time period.

In the case of markdowns, the actual sales price is reduced according to specificrules. The system proposes a markdown price.



Figure 81: Traditional Retail Pricing

These four different options for determining prices in retail can be used in each phaseof the price life cycle. For example, promotion prices are specified for an articlethat is brand new on the market, and therefore in the introductory phase. However,promotions can in turn reduce the decline in sales at the end of a maturity phase, whenthe article transitions into the decline phase.



Figure 82: Analyzing the customer's purchase behavior

Pricing and price optimization in SAP DM have a new approach. In this case,customer behavior forms the basis for pricing. This means that customer behavior isanalyzed on the basis of sales data (approximately two years in the past). It indicateswhen and how the decision to purchase was influenced by price changes.



Figure 83: Overview of the Process Flow of Price Optimization

Price optimization in SAP DM can be used for three areas:

• For normal price calculation

• For promotion pricing

• For markdown calculation

In all three cases, you need sales figures from the past. Ideally, price changes occurredduring this time period.



Figure 84: Three different types of price optimization

There are three different areas of price optimization: Normal price calculation,promotion pricing and markdown calculation. For all three areas, SAP DMrequires sales figures from the past. Based on these figures, the system calculatesformulas/parameter values, irrespective of which price optimization area you decideto use. Using these formulas/parameter values and the specified area, SAP DMdetermines an optimized price.

In demand modeling, all sales data and the corresponding prices for an article for eachstore and time (week) are plotted on a graph. In this case, influences from seasons,warehouse shortages, promotions, markdowns, competitors, events (and so forth) aretaken into account. This process takes place in the background and, depending on thedepth of the data, returns a large number of analysis values (for example, two years ofhistorical values produce 104 time intervals; 100 stores produce 104 * 100 values).

From this information, SAP DM calculates a model that is frozen for the time windowof one week. All optimizations during this week are made on the basis of this model.When the week is over, new sales data is loaded and a new model is calculated. Thiscalculated model produces a variety of parameters, such as elasticity.



Figure 85: Opportunity curve

If the price optimization is to refer to the normal price calculation, then the articlesconcerned are summarized in groups (beverages/cola, for example) and the systemcreates an opportunity curve for each group. This forms the basis for the calculationof the optimized prices. It is created for each article grouping and shows the maximumattainable combinations of profit and sales for this article grouping.

The red dot in the opportunity curve symbolizes a price of an article grouping at thatpoint in time when no price optimization has yet occurred in SAP DM. In terms ofprofit and sales, it lies in the suboptimal area. By optimizing the price you can nowtry to move this point (graphically) closer to the green opportunity curve. If youmove it vertically upward, you maximize your profit, and if you move it horizontallyto the right, it would only mean a sales optimization. Usually you want a balance ofthe two, meaning an increase in both profit and sales. Depending on the retailer'spreferences concerning profit, sales and price image, SAP DM uses this opportunitycurve as a guide to calculate optimized prices for the articles concerned in the groupthat will ensure maximization.



Figure 86: Business Rules

You need to specify business rules so that SAP DM can suggest optimized pricesusing the calculated parameter values such as price elasticity, price image or priceindex. These include psychological price points and other constraints that must betaken into account for the calculation of the optimized price.

In this way you can specify absolute upper and/or lower limits. For price optimizationthis means, for example, that the suggested optimized price should not fall below avalue of 1 USD. In addition, you can specify rules, price ranges or margins, so that(for example) the highest sales value from the past is exceeded by no more than 5%.



Lesson Summary







Test Your Knowledge

1. Which settings are mandatory in the article master and logistics distributioncenter, so that you can plan an article for a distribution center?


□ A Planning profile□ B RP type

□ C Lot size□ D Vendor

□ E Order unit

2. A purchase requisition


□ A Is assigned to one vendor uniquely

□ B Is an internal SAP document□ C Can be the result of a requirements planning run

□ D Defines the requirement of an article□ E Can be converted to a purchase order

3. Replenishment Planning


□ A Is a requirements planning procedure for stores and distributioncenters.

□ B Is a requirements planning procedure for stores only.

□ C Can be executed for articles with the RP requirements planning type.□ D Can be executed for articles with the RF requirements planning type.

□ E Requires a target stock



4. The store order function


□ A Is an internal SAP document

□ B Triggers the follow-on documents to be generated from replenishmentplanning

□ C Processes the replenishment requirement quantity calculated fromreplenishment planning.

□ D Processes the replenishment requirement quantity calculated fromexternal systems.

□ E Can generate a sales order for external customers.

5. Which calculation levels are available to you when you access the sales pricecalculation?


□ A Site group

□ B Delivery date□ C Currency

□ D Vendor□ E Site

6. The list variant displayed when the sales price calculation is accessed controls


□ A Which list fields are displayed□ B Whether a one-step or two-step calculation is involved

□ C The drilldown level used to access the sales price calculation□ D Whether planned markups are displayed

7. A one-step calculation for an article is defined by the following:


□ A Only one distribution chain is displayed

□ B The source of supply is defined as stock transfer in the article master,stores logistics view

□ C The source of supply is defined as normal in the article master, storeslogistics view

□ D External vendors only are displayed

□ E No transfer price is available for the DC



8. A two-step calculation for an article is defined by the following:


□ A Only one distribution chain is displayed□ B The source of supply is defined as stock transfer in the article master,

stores logistics view

□ C The source of supply is defined as normal in the article master, storeslogistics view

□ D External vendors only are displayed

□ E External and internal vendors are displayed□ F A transfer price is available for the DC

9. The price overview:


□ A Displays purchase and sales prices□ B Displays sales prices

□ C Displays all possible sources of supply□ D Displays condition types and condition tables

□ E Site-specific display of prices is possible in the price overview



Answers

1. Which settings are mandatory in the article master and logistics distributioncenter, so that you can plan an article for a distribution center?

Answer: B, C

Settings for the lot size and RP type must be made for requirements planning fora distribution center.

2. A purchase requisition

Answer: B, C, D, E

A purchase requisition is an internal SAP document The purchase requisitiondefines the requirement of an article and can be the result of a requirementsplanning run. A purchase requisition can be converted to a purchase order

3. Replenishment Planning

Answer: B, C, D, E

Replenishment Is a requirements planning procedure for stores. It be executedfor articles with the RP or RF requirements planning type. Replenishmentrequires a target stock.

4. The store order function

Answer: B, C, D, E

The store order function defines the follow-on documents to be generated fromreplenishment planning, and processes the replenishment requirement quantityfrom replenishment planning or external systems. A sales order for externalcustomers can also be generated.

5. Which calculation levels are available to you when you access the sales pricecalculation?

Answer: A, E

The site and site group are available to you when you access the sales pricecalculation.



6. The list variant displayed when the sales price calculation is accessed controls

Answer: A, D

The list variants control which list fields are displayed and whether plannedmarkups are displayed.

7. A one-step calculation for an article is defined by the following:

Answer: B, D, E

No transfer price is available for the DC in the one-step calculation. The systemonly displays external vendors and the source of supply is defined as stocktransfer in the article master.

8. A two-step calculation for an article is defined by the following:

Answer: C, E, F

The source of supply is defined as normal in the article master for the two-stepcalculation. External and internal vendors are displayed, and a transfer price isavailable for the DC.

9. The price overview:

Answer: B, D, E

Sales prices, condition types and condition tables can be displayed in the priceoverview. Site-specific display of prices is possible.


Unit 4Purchasing

Unit OverviewThis unit describes the process flows in order management and optimization. It alsodemonstrates the uses of a collective purchase order. The perishables planning listexplains how you can generate procurement documents. Vendor invoices can beentered and verified in SAP Retail. The term "vendor relationships" refers to supplysource determination logic, and the course explains this process flow. You can use theforeign trade functions to support and optimize international procurement processes.


• Create a purchase order for basics

• Name the seasonal procurement functions.

• Name the most important functions for adjusting quantities

• Explain the investment buying process

• Describe the special features of a collective purchase order

• Explain the use of Supplementary Logistics Services (SLS) and how theyinfluence the merchandise distribution process

• Explain the perishables planning functions in SAP Retail

• Generate an assortment list and a perishables planning list in the system andcreate the follow-on documents

• Describe the procedure and process flow for invoice verification in SAP Retail

• Name the options for manual correction

• Perform invoice verification in the system

• Explain the subsequent settlement process flow in SAP Retail

• Name the different options of determining a supply source

• Describe the most important functions of SAP Global Trade Services

• Explain the three areas import and export checking, customs processing, andrisk management


Unit 4: Purchasing TIRT10_2

Unit ContentsLesson: Purchase Order Management . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .213

Exercise 8: Purchase Order Management . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .227Lesson: Order Optimizing.. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .234Lesson: Collective Purchase Order . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .239

Exercise 9: Collective Purchase Order . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .243Lesson: Perishables Planning.. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .252

Exercise 10: Perishables Planning.. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .257Lesson: Invoice Verification . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .264

Exercise 11: Invoice Verification. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .269Lesson: Vendor Relationship. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .273

Exercise 12: Vendor Relationships. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .279Lesson: Foreign Trade .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .285


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Purchase Order Management

Lesson: Purchase Order Management

Lesson OverviewThis lesson covers the central processes and their documents involved in procurementof retail goods. A distinction is made between seasonal procurement and orderingof basics.




Business ExampleYou want to order goods from a vendor. You first obtain information on conditionsand terms of delivery. You then create a vendor order and send this to your vendor.The vendor sends you a shipping notification in response to your order.

Seasonal goods can be ordered at a very early stage at which in some circumstancesno complete article master record is available. When this type of seasonal order iscreated, the order value should be checked against the purchasing budget available(OTB check). Access the SAP Retail System to calculate the presentation dates forgoods in the distribution center and in the stores.

Create an outline agreement as a contract that defines fixed conditions for the deliveryof articles for vendors with whom you have long-term agreements. A contract releaseorder is a purchase order with reference to a contract, and is updated in this contract.



Request for Quotation and Quotation

Figure 87: Request for Quotation and Quotation

Retailing is characterized by long-term highly stable relationships with vendors.However, when the value of an article is particularly high, or the merchandise is highlyspecialized, it may make sense to use the request for quotation (RFQ) procedure todetermine the best possible vendor for an article.

You can create requests manually (and directly from purchase requisitions) for severalvendors.

The quotations that are received contain prices and conditions for the requestedarticles and are created in the relevant requests. A request for a quotation and itsassociated quotation therefore create a logical unit.

You can then compare the various quotations received by using a price comparisonlist to determine the best quotation. Data obtained in this manner can be saved in apurchasing info record for the vendor.



Purchase Order

Figure 88: Pull / Push Procedure (Example)

The procurement process for retail goods is divided into two different views; the pulland the push procedure.

During the pull procedure shown above, purchase orders are created from purchaserequisitions that were generated during requirements planning. Purchase orders andpurchase requisitions can also be created manually, if necessary. Before purchaserequisitions can be automatically converted into purchase orders, the indicator for theautomatic conversion of purchase requisitions into purchase orders must be set in thearticle master (logistical data for a site), the vendor master (purchasing data for apurchasing organization) and the site master. Depending on the way your system hasbeen configured, supply source determination, automatic load building or quantityoptimizing are also run when you convert purchase requisitions into purchase orders.

During the push procedure described above, you process purchasing transactions thatare defined for the specific requirements of seasonal procurement of retail goods,such as those from the fashion sector. Planning data, which is also available inSAP Retail, such as operational assortment planning and control (OSPS), and datathat can be transferred to SAP Retail from external systems is used here. This caninclude scheduling data from SAP Supply Chain Event Management and plannedbudgets from SAP NetWeaver BI. You plan the articles and quantities that are to beavailable at a specific time in your store or distribution center assortment, and transferthese items to the order list in the OSPS application. The system collects potential



purchase order items in the order list, which it uses to create an initial worklist forpurchase orders to be generated. You can create grouped purchase order documentsor purchase orders from the order list. The order list reports the modified processingstatus of the item to OAPC planning; the grouped purchase order document (GPOD)and the purchase order also report the status and document changes (quantity, date,site). The system bundles items in the grouped purchase order document using fixed(vendor) and variable criteria (site) for a provisional internal document in each case.You can generate purchase orders from the grouped purchase order documents ifsufficient budget is available. The OTB check analyzes whether sufficient budget isavailable for the entire document or for each item. You cannot create a purchase orderunless sufficient budget is available. If you change other documents and in doingso transfer their budget, you can create a positive OTB check result. If the OTBcheck determines sufficient budget, you can generate the purchase order documentand send this to the vendor. The purchase order reports that the planned article hasbeen ordered to OSPS planning.

Figure 89: Pull / Push Procedure: Differences

Pull and push procedures are two different views of goods procurement that exist andare run in parallel. They can be performed by different individuals in a company; thepull procedure is for example the responsibility of the stock planner, whilst the pushprocedure is one of the purchaser's tasks. During the pull procedure, sales figures atthe sites are analyzed and used as the basis for the requirements calculation. Theobjective here is to check stocks and automate the process as far as possible. The pullprocedure is usually used for basic articles.



The push procedure, on the other hand, is used to plan and procure articles thatonly occur once, and are not replenishable (seasonable). The process often starts byplanning sales that are to be achieved in the future. You can also plan your budgetingand check this against your procurement documents. There is often a very long timeperiod between budgeting, ordering and delivery of goods. An automatic applicationfor long-term scheduling is therefore available to you in addition to the functions forcreating and processing purchase orders.

Figure 90: Purchase order: Structure

In the Enjoy transaction ME21N, a purchase order is divided into three levels: Header,item overview and item details. All three display levels can be displayed on thescreen simultaneously, or accessed individually. Purchase order items can be enteredin the item details and displayed on the item detail screen. Unlike the “previous”purchase order (ME21), it is now possible to view all three display levels on thescreen simultaneously.

A purchase order can be a vendor order (see the process detailed above) or awarehouse order.

For organizational purposes, a purchase order is assigned to one purchasingorganization and one purchasing group only. In addition to this, a purchase order isassigned to one order type only (NB = standard purchase order, UB = stock transportorder) for control purposes.



Shipping Notification

Figure 91: Purchase order: Confirmation Control

Use the confirmation control key to define the sequence in which the individualconfirmations (= confirmation categories) are due to arrive.

Confirmation categories define:

• The date and time by which the confirmation must have arrived;

• The relevancy for requirements planning and goods receipt

The confirmation control key is defined in Customizing. It can be stored in the vendoror article master data. It is either copied to the order item from the vendor or articlemaster data, or it can be entered in the order item manually. It is the prerequisitefor carrying out Handling Unit Management if it contains the relevant confirmationcategory ANLI (= inbound delivery).

If you want to generate proof of delivery for the vendor, you must configure theconfirmation control key accordingly. For more information about this topic, seethe SAP Library documentation for Logistics Execution, Goods Receipt Processfor Inbound Deliveries.



Figure 92: Shipping Notification

Shipping notifications are used by vendors to announce the delivery of articles. Thevendor sends information about the delivery date, delivery time, delivery quantitiesand the articles that are to be delivered.

The shipping notification is based on one or more purchase orders that have beenplaced with the same vendor. An inbound delivery is created for the shippingnotification or in EDI. Inbound deliveries can be used as reference documents forthe (rough) goods receipt that follows.



PO Manager

Figure 93: PO Manager

The PO manager is a central higher-level workbench for seasonal procurement..Order lists, grouped purchase order documents and purchase orders are displayedin a worklist. You can also use separate transactions in the system to do so.

The order list is a grouping of potential purchase order items that are transferred(from operational assortment planning and control (OSPS) or an external application)or that are created manually. The system uses fixed and variable criteria to group theseitems in grouped purchase order documents or directly in purchase orders.

The grouped purchase order document forms a link between the order list andthe purchase order, and is therefore an internal preliminary level for the purchaseorder. You can also use the OTB check function. To do so, define the purchasingbudget using the planned key figures in the Customizing settings for SAP NetWeaverBI. Use the release workbench to export the planned budget to SAP Retail. Duringthe OTB check, the system determines the corresponding budget number and thenchecks whether sufficient budget is available. The system compares the target valuestransferred from planning with the actual values already used in purchasing documentsthat have already been generated. If sufficient budget is available, purchase orders canbe generated and the system updates the document amount in the actual value used



Order list items can be directly converted to purchase orders. A complete OTBcheck is performed here and grouped purchase order documents are created in thebackground. You can also perform the process in two steps. Order list items are firstgrouped as grouped purchase order documents. You then trigger the OTB check, inwhich purchase orders are generated from the grouped purchase order documents, ifthe result of the check is positive.

Scheduling

Figure 94: Scheduling

Scheduling in processes for seasonal procurement calculates dates that fall betweenPO generation and the receipt of merchandise at a distribution center or store. By dateswe mean key dates within the supply chain, such as the staging date for merchandiseor the delivery date, plus the concrete calendar date for each one. Beginning withthe purchasing list, calculated dates can be viewed and changed in all documents inseasonal procurement, and the system recalculates them automatically every time achange is made that influences them (such as when an earlier date moves or the meansof transport changes). If you implement SAP Event Management (SAP EM), you willalways see current actual dates in addition to calculated target dates. In other words,you will always see the current actual situation. If the deadline for a date is overrun,



the system will indicate that with a special marker. If you implement SAP EM,purchase orders with date overruns will move to reactive purchase order monitoringfor processing along with a corresponding activity proposal (such as send a reminder).In this way, the system enables you to monitor dates for the merchandise you orderedthroughout the supply chain and react quickly to unexpected developments. You canopen specific documents either directly or by using the purchase order manager, oryou can use purchase order monitoring to select the documents you want to process.

Figure 95: Scheduling: Transportation chain

Scheduling in the seasonal procurement processes calculates milestones in thepurchasing process from purchase order generation by an external vendor throughgoods arrival at the distribution center or stores. This means you can comprehensivelymonitor process steps and different events along the delivery chain at any stage.

The sequence of deadlines is defined by the transportation chain. Deadlines arerecorded with their name and the period of time without a specific date. The systemrecords the dates calculated by scheduling in a dateline. Dates appear in the datelinewith their name, period of time since the preceding deadline and a specific date. Thedateline is displayed in all seasonal procurement documents.

Scheduling uses different calendars to observe the working days, public holidaysand seasonal closing for the vendor, and public holidays in the production or transitcountry during the calculation.



Example Scenario: A vendor transports goods from the production location in China tothe port in Shanghai by truck. Goods are loaded on to a ship to Hamburg here. Goodsare transported to the distribution center by truck from the port of arrival in Hamburg.

Open-to-BuyOne of the central goals of seasonal procurement processes is to use the availablepurchasing budget as a control element. The cross-system application Open-to-Buy(OTB) supports you as follows: In SAP NetWeaver BI, you can use BPS (BusinessPlanning and Simulation) to map your retail planning and plan budgets. You candefine flexible budgets (represented in the system by a unique budget number) andmodify these to meet your requirements. Define the budget using values using theplanned key figures in the Customizing settings for SAP NetWeaver with reference tothe content used (InfoCubes).

Figure 96: OTB check

If OTB-relevant purchasing documents have been created or modified, the systemdetermines the corresponding budget number and establishes whether sufficientbudget is available in the OTB check. The system compares the planned valuestransferred from planning with the actual values already used in purchasing documentsthat have already been generated plus the new seasonal purchase orders generated. Ifsufficient budget is available, you can save the purchasing document and the systemupdates the actual value used accordingly.



Procurement Monitor

Figure 97: Procurement Monitoring

Monitoring applications for purchase orders, contracts and budgets are available toyou in the Procurement Monitoring application. These provide you with options forchecking procurement-relevant dates from planning the items to be ordered throughgoods issue. The application is divided into the purchase order, contract and OTBmonitor.

You can perform activities such as date shifts, canceling purchase order items,dunning, deciding on remaining quantities automatically or manually in purchaseorder monitoring. This is only possible if the purchase orders used come fromseasonal procurement and you are using SAP Event Management (SAP EM), which isused to monitor events.

You can use the contract monitor to monitor contracts that you have created usingtransaction ME31K or modified using transaction ME32K, and release orders that youhave created during PO processing for seasonal procurement. You can also checkwhich releases have already taken place, have expired or are overbooked.

You can use the OTB monitor to check the OTB budget. You can display the currentbudget values and check how much budget is still available to you here.



Contracts

Figure 98: Quantity and Value Contracts

A contract is a long-term agreement with a vendor on the delivery of articles atdefined conditions. These are valid for a defined period, and depending on thecontract type, a specific total order quantity (quantity contract) or a specific totalorder value (value contract). Contract items can relate to a single site or all sites ina purchase organization (centrally agreed contract).

The contract does not contain information on specific delivery dates or quantities forthe individual deliveries. Enter the delivery date and quantity in a contract releaseorder. A contract release order is a purchase order with reference to the contract

In addition to quantity and value contracts, the system makes a further distinctionbetween OTB-relevant and non-OTB-relevant contracts. The system performsan OTB reservation for OTB-relevant contracts, which is not the same as the OTBcheck. The criteria for creating a contract for the OTB reservation are not as strict asthose for an OTB check.

You can configure the system so that a contract release can take place even if thecontract budget assigned here is not sufficient. This means you can give the releasepriority.



The OTB reservation can be performed for quantity contracts at headeror at itemlevel. It always takes place at header level for value contracts.



Exercise 8: Purchase Order Management


• Create standard and seasonal purchase orders manually

• Enter confirmations for purchase orders

• Convert grouped purchase order documents to purchase orders

• Perform scheduling in seasonal purchase orders

• Perform the OTB check for OTB-relevant purchasing documents

• Monitor the procurement process using batch status using procurementmonitoring

Business ExampleDuring the pull procedure, purchase requisitions that were generated duringrequirements planning, are converted to standard purchase orders. You can also createpurchase requisitions and standard purchase orders manually. You can enter theshipping notifications sent by the vendors with reference to purchase order(s) in anadditional step, and use these notifications for subsequent steps.

The push procedure on the other hand starts with budget planning for fashion goodsprocurement. The system analyzes whether there is sufficient budget for this in theOTB check that follows. If this is the case, purchase orders can be created.

You can use procurement monitoring, which is divided into the purchase order,contract and OTB monitor, to monitor the entire fashion goods procurement process.You can check your current purchase order situation in the purchase order monitor,display the status of your contracts in the contract monitor and monitor the plannedOTB budget in the OTB monitor.

Task 1: Create a standard purchase orderYou want to create a standard purchase order manually.

1. Before creating the articles and quantities in the item overview, take advantageof the option for setting default values. Configure the following data:





Delivery Date Two weeks from today

Site R8##


2. Choose a standard purchase order with vendor R1TV12##. Maintain thefollowing organizational data at header level:




Company code R300

Enter the following data in the item overview:

Article PO Quantity Order unit

R1TA11## 25 CSE

R1TA12## 100 CSE

Now save your standard purchase order and take note of its number:

_________________________________

3. Remain in this transaction and display your purchase order.

Switch to the print preview for your purchase order. To which address are thegoods ordered to be delivered?




Task 2: Create shipping notificationOn this occasion, you want to enter a shipping notification for both of your purchaseorder items. To do so, you must make specific entries in the purchase order.

1. Change the purchase order you just created: Choose the Confirmations tabpage in the item details and enter the confirmation control key 0004 (inbounddelivery) for both purchase order items.

Hint: To see the key 0004, activate the key display by choosing:Customizing of Local Layout→ Options. Choose the Expert tab pageand select fields

Show Keys in All Dropdown Lists and

Sort Items by Key.

Which confirmation documents are expected for the individual items usingthese settings?

2. The vendor R1TV12## notifies you of the inbound delivery of goods (timeand quantity) with reference to your purchase order in a shipping notification.You stamp this document (delivery note) with the number 2404## and then fileit. Now enter an inbound delivery with reference to your purchase order inthe system.


Vendor R1TV12##

Purchase Order Your purchase order number fromtask 1

Delivery Date this coming Friday

External identification 2808##

Confirm your entries with Enter. The overview for the inbound delivery appears.Check the quantities proposed from the purchase order item against yourdelivery note and then save the shipping notification

3. Return to the purchase order display. Choose the Confirmations tab page for apurchase order item in the item details. What do you notice?



Solution 8: Purchase Order Management

Task 1: Create a standard purchase orderYou want to create a standard purchase order manually.

1. Before creating the articles and quantities in the item overview, take advantageof the option for setting default values. Configure the following data:


Delivery Date Two weeks from today

Site R8##



Choose Default Values and make your settings as specified in the task.

2. Choose a standard purchase order with vendor R1TV12##. Maintain thefollowing organizational data at header level:




Company code R300


Article PO Quantity Order unit

R1TA11## 25 CSE

R1TA12## 100 CSE

Now save your standard purchase order and take note of its number:

_________________________________

a) Make your settings as per the task.

3. Remain in this transaction and display your purchase order.




Switch to the print preview for your purchase order. To which address are thegoods ordered to be delivered?

a) Choose Other Purchase Order and enter the number of your new purchaseorder.

b) Select Print Preview. The form for the purchase order printout is displayed.The delivery address is:

Company

DC Dry Grocery East

3430 Spring Street

Philadelphia CA 40771

Task 2: Create shipping notificationOn this occasion, you want to enter a shipping notification for both of your purchaseorder items. To do so, you must make specific entries in the purchase order.

1. Change the purchase order you just created: Choose the Confirmations tabpage in the item details and enter the confirmation control key 0004 (inbounddelivery) for both purchase order items.

Hint: To see the key 0004, activate the key display by choosing:Customizing of Local Layout→ Options. Choose the Expert tab pageand select fields

Show Keys in All Dropdown Lists and

Sort Items by Key.

Which confirmation documents are expected for the individual items usingthese settings?

a) Choose Display/Change and make your settings as specified in the task. Inthe item details on the Confirmations tab page, the Confirmation Control=Inbound Delivery. This means that an inbound delivery (shippingnotification) is expected.

Make the setting for both items and then save your purchase order. Themessage Standard PO 45000..... was changed. appears.




2. The vendor R1TV12## notifies you of the inbound delivery of goods (timeand quantity) with reference to your purchase order in a shipping notification.You stamp this document (delivery note) with the number 2404## and then fileit. Now enter an inbound delivery with reference to your purchase order inthe system.


Vendor R1TV12##

Purchase Order Your purchase order number fromtask 1

Delivery Date this coming Friday

External identification 2808##

Confirm your entries with Enter. The overview for the inbound delivery appears.Check the quantities proposed from the purchase order item against yourdelivery note and then save the shipping notification

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Goods Receipt→ Inbound Delivery→ Create

Make your settings as per the task. Confirm the proposed quantities andthen save the inbound delivery.

3. Return to the purchase order display. Choose the Confirmations tab page for apurchase order item in the item details. What do you notice?

a) One entry has been created. The confirmation category is LA = Inbounddelivery. The inbound delivery number is displayed.



Lesson Summary






Lesson: Order Optimizing

Lesson OverviewIn order optimizing, the system groups open purchase requisitions and purchase ordersand rounds the quantities up or down if necessary. This allows you to check thegrouped documents against restrictions, such as a maximum gross weight or volume.This means you can exploit the available transportation capacities to the maximum.




Business ExampleYou use automatic requirements planning in your company to generate order proposalsfor your distribution center. You want the requirement quantities that were determinedin requirements planning to then be rounded according to specific rules. You also usemanual load building to group purchase orders for the same vendor or vendors fromthe same region, in order to minimize the incurred transportation costs.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Order Optimizing

Order Optimizing: Quantity Adjustment

Figure 99: Order Optimizing

You have already learnt about the two different perspectives in the procurementprocess. Non-seasonal merchandise, for which you are constantly performingrequirements planning, is procured by means of pull. This generates purchase ordersfrom purchase requisitions generated in requirements planning. Unlike seasonalprocurement (push), planning and OTB do not take place here. The followingfunctions are available when converting purchase requisitions to purchase orders:

Supply source determination is used to find a possible vendor. Both internal(distribution centers) and external supply sources (external vendors) are considered.

Quantity optimizing processes a specified quantity according to rules defined inCustomizing. The figures can be rounded up or down. The system can also takedifferent units of measure into account for an article. You can use a rounding profile(defined in Customizing) to round up or down, to round to multiples (definingstandard quantities in the purchasing info record), or to check whether fixed limits areobserved. Limit values for quantities of a document item are specified in master datafor purchasing or sales. Quantity optimizing ensures that the minimum quantity is notundershot and that the maximum quantity is not exceeded.

Load building is performed in order to minimize transportation costs by using themeans of transport (for example, cargo ship, freight car, or truck) to full capacity, toreduce warehouse stock by ordering as late as possible, or to obtain good purchaseprices, for example by ordering entire truckloads. For this purpose, the system



generates optimized purchase order quantities where possible, converts existingpurchase requisitions to purchase orders, groups purchase orders, and, if necessary,generates new purchase orders, for example when the range of coverage increases.

You use a release procedure if you want to set up approval procedures for purchaserequisitions or purchasing documents. If a purchase requisition or purchasingdocument fulfills certain conditions (for example, the total value of a purchase order ismore than USD 10,000) it must be approved (for example, by the cost center manager)before further processing can take place.

Investment BuyingInvestment buying is used to define requirements based on future purchase priceincreases and which are covered by external procurement. The purpose of investmentbuying is to enable the user to buy the required articles, in optimum quantities andas cost-efficiently as possible.

Figure 100: Investment Buying

Investment buying identifies future changes to purchasing conditions and proposesmerchandise procurement even if the article is not required at the time of purchase.The system compares warehouse and operating costs with the price savings. ROI(Return on Investment) is the deciding factor when a procurement suggestion isgenerated by the system.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Order Optimizing

Use the following formula to calculate the current ROI:

100 * 52

------------ * (S - D*I*(W-T) - C*W - H) = R O I

D * W

S = Price saving per base unit of measure, D = Original price per base unit of measure,I = Weekly interest rate, T = Payment target in weeks, W = Recommended coverageperiod, H = Warehousing costs, C = Warehousing costs per base unit of measure

Expenses (interest, storage costs, warehousing costs) are subtracted from the pricesaving. The result is compared to the figure for the year and the original price. Whenthe current ROI is calculated, the recommended coverage period is changed until thevalue is lower than the required minimum ROI. The next-highest value is then used tocalculate the additional requirements and propose purchase order quantities. Purchaserequisitions or purchase orders can be generated as follow-on documents.



Lesson Summary





TIRT10_2 Lesson: Collective Purchase Order

Lesson: Collective Purchase Order

Lesson OverviewCollective purchase orders are used to plan merchandise distribution. You can usea collective purchase order to summarize recipients' requirements that are recordedin the system, for example, as stock transport orders or sales orders, for purchaseorder with the vendor (pull). Distribution data is also recorded in the system for acollective purchase order and can be used to control and monitor the distribution ofmerchandise to the recipients.




Business ExampleRecipient documents (such as stock transport orders) are required in order to generatea collective purchase order. You group these to form a collective purchase order.When you do this, you can specify that the vendor is to perform specific services(such as prepacking) for an article.

If you generate a collective purchase order for an article for which SLS are specified,the SLS data is automatically included in the collective purchase order. If prepackingis to take place, the system creates subitems for each collective purchase order item,each of which specifies a recipient and the partial quantity assigned to them.



Figure 101: Collective Purchase Order

Collective purchase orders are procurement documents and are used to planmerchandise distribution. You can use a collective purchase order to summarizerecipients' requirements that are recorded in the system, for example, as stocktransport orders or sales orders, for purchase order with the vendor (pull method inmerchandise distribution).

Planning for merchandise distribution is done centrally, either using an allocation tableor a collective purchase order. Distribution data is updated during planning. This dataforms the link between procurement documents and issue documents.

You specify how the article is to be processed at the distribution center when youcreate the collective purchase order. The same processing methods are possibleas in the push method (for example, cross-docking, flow-through, and putaway).The collective purchase order results in the assignment of a procurement document(for example, the collective purchase order can be a vendor order) to several issuedocuments (sales orders and warehouse orders).



Figure 102: Supplementary Logistics Services

When optimizing the supply chain, flows of goods that involve distribution centers areincreasingly characterized by fast processes (such as cross-docking) at the distributioncenters. These fast processes are based on the fact that the distribution among therecipients is already defined when goods receipt is processed. This means pickingand putaway are not necessary at the distribution center for the merchandise. Theadvantages of this include lower handling costs, reduced stocks and thus less capitallockup, and a faster flow of goods at the distribution center.

If the vendor prepacks the merchandise, the distribution center can process packagescontaining different articles using cross-docking at goods receipt. In prepacking, thevendor creates single-recipient packages, which can contain different articles.

The collective purchase order results in the assignment of a procurement document(for example, the collective purchase order can be a standard purchase order with theexternal vendor) to several issue documents (sales orders and stock transport orders).When creating the collective purchase you specify how the article is to be processed atthe distribution center. You can only generate SLS subitems in a collective purchaseorder in purchase order generation.

Supplementary logistics services (SLS) are article-specific services supported bylogistics. You can use the functions for SLS to order prepacked merchandise as adistribution center. You can only generate SLS subitems in a collective purchase orderin purchase order generation.



There are two ways in which vendor orders can be generated: as follow-on documentsof the allocation table in the push procedure and as collective purchase order(s) in thepull procedure. From a technical perspective, collective purchase orders are vendororders (document type SPO) with main and subitems.

Figure 103: Single-Store and Non-Single-Store Standard Purchase Orders

a) You generate non-single-store purchase orders. In this case, the system generatesa standard purchase order. In this purchase order, subitems are created for each POitem. The number of subitems created for every main item corresponds to the numberof final recipients. If you want to distribute the article quantity across three stores asshown in the graphic, the system creates three subitems for a main item. However, for100 stores, 100 subitems would also be created. Since this could become complicated,there is a second option.

a) You generate single-store purchase orders. In this case, the system generates astandard purchase order for each end consumer. In this purchase order, a subitemis created for each purchase order item.

If you want to distribute an article to 100 stores, the system would generate 100standard purchase orders in which every purchase order item has exactly one subitem.The 100 standard purchase orders are grouped using a collective number.



Exercise 9: Collective Purchase Order


• Create a collective purchase order for cross-docking deliveries

• Make the necessary settings for generating a collective purchase order in articleand site master data

Business ExampleYou are a store employee, and certain articles are ordered at your distribution center.You group stock transport orders (from the distribution center to your stores) toform a collective purchase order for an external vendor so that this merchandise canbe procured.

Task: Create a Collective Purchase OrderGroup stock transport orders that have already been generated to form a collectivepurchase order.

1. In order to generate a collective purchase order, check that the additional SLS(RT211131 Supplementary Logistics Services) is entered in the AdditionalData in the article master data on R1TA04## and R1TA05##. Which methodis selected?

2. For the remaining exercises in this unit, create two new purchase orders (stocktransport orders) in SAP Retail using the following data:


Order Type Stock Transport Order

Supplying site R7##

Maintain the following data in the header data of your stock transport orders:




Company code R300







PO Quantity 4 and 8

Order unit CSE

Delivery Date Day after tomorrow

Site R1##

The following applies to the second stock transport order:



PO Quantity 5 and 10

Order unit CSE


Site R2##

Make a note of both purchase order numbers:

______________________________________________

______________________________________________

3. You now group the stock transport orders for your stores to form a collectivepurchase order for an external vendor in merchandise distribution.

Create a collective purchase order for distribution center R7## and purchasingorganization R300. You want to procure all of the articles that have to bedelivered to your store by the end of the week. The merchandise should remainno longer than a day in the distribution center.




4. Which articles are suggested for procurement?

5. How can you find out which stock transport orders should be used to calculatethe purchase order quantity?

6. The source of supply is required before collective purchase orders can be created.Have the system propose a vendor for the article items. The vendor may alreadybe displayed on the screen. Which vendor does the system suggest?

7. Start in the worklist, do not select any rows, generate the collective purchaseorder and make a note of its number:

__________________________________________




8. Now display the collective purchase order. How many subitems were generated?

9. Where (in the collective purchase order) are the end consumers (stores) from thestock transport orders displayed? What are they?

10. To which distribution center (where the merchandise distribution also takesplace) are the articles delivered first? At which storage location there is thegoods receipt to occur?



Solution 9: Collective Purchase Order

Task: Create a Collective Purchase OrderGroup stock transport orders that have already been generated to form a collectivepurchase order.

1. In order to generate a collective purchase order, check that the additional SLS(RT211131 Supplementary Logistics Services) is entered in the AdditionalData in the article master data on R1TA04## and R1TA05##. Which methodis selected?


Configure your settings as specified in the task. Choose Additional Datain the article master. On the Additionals tab page you can check thefollowing data:

0005 = SLS: Pre-packing

2. For the remaining exercises in this unit, create two new purchase orders (stocktransport orders) in SAP Retail using the following data:


Order Type Stock Transport Order

Supplying site R7##

Maintain the following data in the header data of your stock transport orders:




Company code R300




PO Quantity 4 and 8




Order unit CSE


Site R1##

The following applies to the second stock transport order:



PO Quantity 5 and 10

Order unit CSE


Site R2##

Make a note of both purchase order numbers:

______________________________________________

______________________________________________


Configure your settings as specified in the task. Save both stock transportorders.

3. You now group the stock transport orders for your stores to form a collectivepurchase order for an external vendor in merchandise distribution.




Create a collective purchase order for distribution center R7## and purchasingorganization R300. You want to procure all of the articles that have to bedelivered to your store by the end of the week. The merchandise should remainno longer than a day in the distribution center.

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Merchandise Distribution → CollectivePurchase Order→ Create



Distribution Center R7##


Procurement Period - Date??? From today until Friday of thisweek

Schedule Line Interval 1

Since the merchandise can stay in distribution center R7## for no more thanone day, choose a Schedule Line Interval of 1. Choose Program→ Execute.

4. Which articles are suggested for procurement?

Answer: Articles R1TA04## and R1TA05## are suggested in the worklist forcollective purchase order (ordered merchandise).

5. How can you find out which stock transport orders should be used to calculatethe purchase order quantity?

Answer: Select (for example) one row in the worklist and choose Goto→Display Details. Both stock transport orders are displayed. Return to theworklist.

6. The source of supply is required before collective purchase orders can be created.Have the system propose a vendor for the article items. The vendor may alreadybe displayed on the screen. Which vendor does the system suggest?

a) The result of supply source determination is displayed in the Vendorcolumn. If there is no entry there, select the row and choose Edit→ FindSource of Supply. Vendor R1TV05## is found and displayed.

7. Start in the worklist, do not select any rows, generate the collective purchaseorder and make a note of its number:




__________________________________________

a) Collective Purchase Order→ Generate→ Total Worklist

The number of the purchase order is displayed in the Document Numbercolumn (Doc.No.).

8. Now display the collective purchase order. How many subitems were generated?

Answer: Purchasing→ Purchase Order→ Purchase Order→ Display

Choose Other Purchase Order and enter the number of the collective purchaseorder you generated. Two subitems are created for each main item (10 and 20).

9. Where (in the collective purchase order) are the end consumers (stores) from thestock transport orders displayed? What are they?

Answer: In the item details of the relevant main item on the SLS tab page.

The end consumers (stores) are R1## and R2##.

10. To which distribution center (where the merchandise distribution also takesplace) are the articles delivered first? At which storage location there is thegoods receipt to occur?

Answer: The distribution center is R7##, and the storage location is a specialstorage location for Cross-Docking. It is 0006.



Lesson Summary






Lesson: Perishables Planning

Lesson OverviewThis lesson contains information on planning articles in SAP Retail that requireparticularly fast and variable procurement, such as perishables, entertainmentelectronics, or toys.




Business ExampleThe perishables planning list in SAP Retail supports you in flexible daily planning ofarticles that have a short shelf life and may involve several vendors. You can planprocurement for the distribution center and issue to stores at the same time. To do this,you can find out about stocks and existing purchase orders, if necessary, as well asmaintain prices and generate the corresponding follow-on documents (such as vendororders and store orders) once planning is complete.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Perishables Planning

Figure 104: Perishables Processing

Perishable produce is a special group of articles that often have a short shelf life andare offered by several vendors, each with a limited capacity for delivery. Consumerswill usually only buy perishable products that look fresh. It is therefore important thatthe time between harvest and sale is as short as possible. Ideally, it should be nolonger than 24 hours. However, you can also use the functions described here for otherarticles, such as sport articles, toys, and entertainment electronics.

The special functions and processes for planning, procuring, and distributing thesearticles enable lean, optimized logistics. They allow you to analyze the current marketsituation quickly, support your decision-making processes, and enable you to orderitems quickly and easily.



Figure 105: Perishables Planning

There are three versions of Perishables Planning:

• Purchase order: You can use this variant both centrally and locally at stores toprocure and distribute perishables. Because you can intervene manually, youhave a high level of control over the whole process. You can use this transactionto forecast quantities, enter purchase prices, calculate sales prices, and orderperishable produce. Follow-up functions when posting data are sales orders,allocation tables and collective purchase orders.

• Allocation table: This variant is intended for use at head office. It makes useof the allocation table to distribute the purchase quantity of an article amongthe individual stores ('push' method).

• Collective purchase order: this variant is used at head office to handlemerchandise using the pull concept. It uses existing store orders (or moreprecisely, the follow-on documents) to determine order quantities and generatescollective purchase orders from them.



Figure 106: Perishables Planning List

The assortment list for the site for which planning data is being created is the basis ofthe perishables planning list. The articles must be listed at this site. You can accessfurther functions for procurement and distribution from the perishables planning list.For example, you can change existing purchase orders.

The perishables planning list contains important data on each article and each vendorfrom whom you can procure the article. This data allows you to obtain a goodoverview of the current market situation and make the right decisions quickly beforedemand even arises.

The system can display the store sales for a comparison period, such as the previousday or week, as a basis for forecasting the quantities you need to order.

You can use one transaction to forecast quantities, enter purchase prices, calculatesales prices, and order perishable produce.

You can use the interactive issue list to define the quantities and delivery dates for theindividual recipients, and to change the data proposed by the system.

The functions for perishables processing cover the requirements of both push andpull processes.



Figure 107: Perishables Planning List: Overview

The system calculates the remaining quantity of each article, thus making it easier toidentify the quantities to be ordered. A simple calculation rule is used to calculatethe required quantities (see the slide). You can replace this rule by implementingyour own user exit.

The POS sales period is used as the comparison period for calculating the salesquantity.



Exercise 10: Perishables Planning


• Generate and display an assortment list

• Create a perishables planning list for a distribution center and generate thefollow-on documents

Business ExampleYou want to perform planning for a distribution center and for the stores it supplies forthe perishable articles.

Task 1: Creating an Assortment ListYou generate a full version of an assortment list. This is the prerequisite for theperishables planning list.

1. Generate an assortment list for your distribution center R8##

Use variant SAPIRT to create the list. Enter R8## in the Customer No. - Sitefield.

Caution: Execute selection for your distribution center R8## only.

2. Display the assortment list generated. Here too, use variant SAPIRT. Note downthe validity period of the last full version.

__________________________________

Expand nodes S Supermarket→ 000001→ Freshness and select merchandisecategories Cookies/Crackers and Loose. Find out which articles are assignedto this assortment list.

Task 2: Perishables PlanningCreate a perishables planning list for your distribution center.

1. Stock transport orders (from store R4## or R5## to distribution center R8##) andstandard purchase orders (from distribution center R8## to vendor R1TV06##)can exist in the system before perishables planning begins. You can createthese manually.




Caution: Make sure that the delivery date for each purchase order iswithin the validity period of the assortment list that was generated (task1: create assortment list, no. 2).

2. Create a perishables planning list for your distribution center R8##. Use variantSAPIRT for this.

Caution: Make sure that the delivery date of the stock transport order(s)you created previously falls within the issue period for the stores.

3. Perform planning both for the recipient side (store demand) and for theprocurement side (distribution center R8## demand). First access theInformation to find out about the stocks and existing purchase orders. Whatquantities are displayed in columns RemainQty, Store orders and Vendor orders?

4. Next, create quantities for the recipients (stores) and for the distribution center,and then generate the follow-on documents. To do this, go to the RequirementsPlanning tab page.



Solution 10: Perishables Planning

Task 1: Creating an Assortment ListYou generate a full version of an assortment list. This is the prerequisite for theperishables planning list.

1. Generate an assortment list for your distribution center R8##

Use variant SAPIRT to create the list. Enter R8## in the Customer No. - Sitefield.

Caution: Execute selection for your distribution center R8## only.

a) Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment List→ Generate→Initialization

Make your settings as per the task. Generate the assortment list using F8.

2. Display the assortment list generated. Here too, use variant SAPIRT. Note downthe validity period of the last full version.

__________________________________

Expand nodes S Supermarket→ 000001→ Freshness and select merchandisecategories Cookies/Crackers and Loose. Find out which articles are assignedto this assortment list.

a) Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment List→ Display

Make your settings as per the task. The validity period of the last fullversion starts today and ends 6 days from today.

Expand the nodes as per the task. The corresponding articles are displayed:

R1TA16##, Pineapple Group ##

R1TA06##, Mango Group ##

R1TA07##, Coconut Group ##

R1TA21##, Net Apple Group ##




Task 2: Perishables PlanningCreate a perishables planning list for your distribution center.

1. Stock transport orders (from store R4## or R5## to distribution center R8##) andstandard purchase orders (from distribution center R8## to vendor R1TV06##)can exist in the system before perishables planning begins. You can createthese manually.

Caution: Make sure that the delivery date for each purchase order iswithin the validity period of the assortment list that was generated (task1: create assortment list, no. 2).


Create a standard purchase order with the following data:


Order Type Standard PO

Vendor R1TV06##

Maintain the following data in the header data of your stock transportorders:




Company code R300



Site R8##

Article R1TA06##, R1TA07## andR1TA21##

PO Quantity any




Order unit CSE

Delivery Date within the validity period of theassortment list

Storage Location 0001

Save your standard purchase order.

b) Create a stock transport order with the following data:


Supplying site R8##

Article R1TA06##, R1TA07## andR1TA21##

PO Quantity any

Order unit CSE

Delivery Date within the validity period of theassortment list

Site R4## or R5##


2. Create a perishables planning list for your distribution center R8##. Use variantSAPIRT for this.

Caution: Make sure that the delivery date of the stock transport order(s)you created previously falls within the issue period for the stores.

a) Purchasing→ Requirements Planning→ Purchase Order→ PerishablesPlanning→ Create Perishables Planning List

Make your settings as specified in the task and choose Execute.




3. Perform planning both for the recipient side (store demand) and for theprocurement side (distribution center R8## demand). First access theInformation to find out about the stocks and existing purchase orders. Whatquantities are displayed in columns RemainQty, Store orders and Vendor orders?

a) Choose the Information tab page:

The remaining quantity is calculated from the current stock + purchaseorders at the vendor – purchase orders from the stores at the warehouse(see F1 help). The ordered quantities from the stock transport order(s) aredisplayed in the Store orders column.

4. Next, create quantities for the recipients (stores) and for the distribution center,and then generate the follow-on documents. To do this, go to the RequirementsPlanning tab page.

a) To create a third-party business, select any item with an article-vendorcombination and then choose Goto→ Recipient. You access the issuelist, where you can enter any purchase order quantities and confirm with[Enter]. The sum of the entered quantities is displayed as the Delivery qty.Transfer this to the PO Quantity field and go back. (The purchase orderquantity is copied to the planning overview.)

b) To trigger warehouse processing, select any item without anarticle-vendor combination and then choose Goto→ Recipient. You accessthe issue list, where you can enter any purchase order quantities andconfirm with [Enter]. The sum of the entered quantities is displayed asthe Delivery qty. Go back.

c) Stay on the Requirements Planning tab page and select each row in theperishables planning list for which you made entries. Choose Requirementsplanning for perishables→ Generate Perishables Planning Documents.The order indicator is set accordingly. Both the purchase order withthe vendor and any missing stock transport orders were created duringwarehouse processing.

d) Goto→ Logs→ Acknowledgement→ Display Confirmation Log

Here you will find the generated purchase order numbers.

You can save the perishables planning list. The number is displayed in theheader data. Exit the perishables planning list.



Lesson Summary






Lesson: Invoice Verification

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces the functions for logistics invoice verification in SAP Retail,which you can use to enter vendor invoices automatically or manually with referenceto previous documents, and have the system verify them automatically.





Business ExampleYou want to enter and verify invoices from your vendors as efficiently as possible.Logistics invoice verification allows you to enter vendor invoices automatically usingEDI, and to enter them manually with reference to preceding documents. The invoicescan be verified automatically in dialog or background processing. You have severaloptions for correcting invoices if errors are identified during verification. The systemforwards accepted invoices to Financial Accounting.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Invoice Verification

Figure 108: Invoice Verification Method

During logistics invoice verification, the system creates a target invoice based on thequantities and articles entered in the goods receipt. This invoice is checked against theactual invoice received from the vendor before the vendor is paid. This procedure isbased on actual goods receipt.

It is also possible to use the assignment test function as a preparatory backgroundstep before invoice verification. You can use this function to ensure that the systemonly begins invoice verification when open goods receipts exist for an invoice. Anunsuccessful assignment test is quicker than a full invoice verification in backgroundprocessing, because the system does not need to process so much data from thedatabase (for example, article data is not required) and executes fewer checks andevaluations.

Another option for logistics invoice verification is based on evaluated receiptsettlement (ERS). In this case, the system creates a target invoice based on thequantities and articles entered in the goods receipt, and the amount determined is paidto the vendor. Whether or not a vendor uses ERS for all order items or only for returnitems is defined in the master record for the vendor (purchasing data).

The prepayment function allows you to pay invoices before verification. This isparticularly useful if a cash discount agreement has been negotiated. In this case, theinvoice is entered irrespective of whether or not goods receipt has been posted. Thesystem then initiates payment to the vendor. This function requires certain settings inCustomizing and in the vendor master.



Figure 109: Logistics Invoice Verification: Process Flow

Logistics invoice verification in SAP Retail is not connected to Financial Accounting(FI) and thereby allows you to perform decentralized invoice verification. It involvesthe following steps:

• Enter an incoming invoice and assign purchase orders or goods receipts This canbe done in the following two ways:

• Online in the system

• With EDI (Electronic Data Interchange); this involves automatically uploadingthe invoice data, the numbers of the relevant reference documents using IDocs(IDoc type INVOIC01).

In invoice verification, the actual invoice amount is checked against the target invoiceamount. Overly high invoices can be automatically reduced to a specified limit basedon a tolerance group. In this case, the system automatically informs the vendor inquestion using message type REKL. Incorrect invoices must first be processed by theuser (for example, changing assignments, correcting conditions...). The invoices arethen sent to invoice verification once again.

The data is then transferred and posted to Financial Accounting (FI). Invoices thatare found to be correct are transferred to Financial Accounting as a posting recordand posted there. If financial accounting takes place in a different SAP or non-SAPsystem, the posting records are transferred using Remote Function Call (RFC).



Figure 110: Logistics Invoice Verification: Correction Options

If an expense invoice is created online in the system and assigned to the relevantpurchase orders and goods receipts, the user can choose between three different waysof performing verification (invoice verification types):

• Immediate verification online: The invoice that has been created is verifiedonline. Users have to wait (in the relevant mode) until checks are completebefore continuing with corrections to the invoice or before starting to generate anew invoice.

• Immediate verification in the background: The invoice that has been createdis verified in the background and the results are recorded in a list. Users canalready start creating the next invoice in the system and make assignments whilechecks are running in the background. At a specified time, the users check theresults list of the invoice verification that is taking place in the background andthen processes the contents of the list.

Depending on error, incorrect invoices can be corrected in various ways. If the vendorbills you for a delivery quantity or price other than that specified in the goods receipt,you can adjust the quantities or prices. However, this only takes place in the selectedinvoice; no changes are made to the article master data. If the tax rate on which theexpense invoice is based is too high, you can change the tax indicator. You can alsoexclude purchase orders, purchase order items, or articles. You can also changedeviations in conditions, but only in the invoice you are correcting.



If the error in an invoice is due to incorrect system data (for example, if vendorconditions or tax codes have been maintained incorrectly), a message (type EINK)is automatically sent to the buyer when the error is corrected. This is only possibleif the correct settings have been made in Customizing.



Exercise 11: Invoice Verification


• Enter a vendor invoice and have the system verify it in background processing

Business ExampleYou work in the invoice verification department and have received the vendor invoicefor a delivery that has already taken place. You want to enter the invoice, check itsaccuracy and then post it.

Task 1: Invoice EntryCreate an invoice with reference to a purchase order.

1. You have received the following invoice from your vendor:

Vendor: R1TV08##

Invoice date: Current date

Article Quantity Unit price Total

R1TA17## 25 CSE USD 1.00 USD 250.00

R1TA18## 35 CSE USD 2.50 USD 875.00

Invoice amount USD 1125.00

Enter the invoice in company code R300 for vendor R1TV08##. Controlverification so that the invoice is not verified immediately, but in backgroundprocessing. Save the document for background processing.

Task 2: Invoice VerificationStart the invoice verification in background.

1. Choose System→ Services→ Reporting and execute program RMBABG00.Enter your vendor R1TV08## as the vendor/invoicing party and then executethe program. What is the result of the verification for your document?

2. Return to logistics invoice verification and display all the invoices (including theposted ones) for your vendor R1TV08## in the invoice overview.

What document number and status does your invoice have?



Solution 11: Invoice Verification

Task 1: Invoice EntryCreate an invoice with reference to a purchase order.

1. You have received the following invoice from your vendor:

Vendor: R1TV08##

Invoice date: Current date

Article Quantity Unit price Total

R1TA17## 25 CSE USD 1.00 USD 250.00

R1TA18## 35 CSE USD 2.50 USD 875.00

Invoice amount USD 1125.00

Enter the invoice in company code R300 for vendor R1TV08##. Controlverification so that the invoice is not verified immediately, but in backgroundprocessing. Save the document for background processing.

a) Purchasing→ Logistics Invoice Verification→ Document Entry→ EnterInvoice for Invoice Verification in Background

Enter the following data:


Company code R300

Invoice date Today

Amount 1125

Currency USD

Your invoice refers to vendor R1TV08##. Select the vendor in thePurchase Order/Scheduling Agreement selection and enter the vendornumber. Change the assignments by deselecting the Returns indicator.Save your invoice document.




Task 2: Invoice VerificationStart the invoice verification in background.

1. Choose System→ Services→ Reporting and execute program RMBABG00.Enter your vendor R1TV08## as the vendor/invoicing party and then executethe program. What is the result of the verification for your document?

a) System→ Services→ Reporting

Make your settings as per the task. The result of the check for the postedinvoices is displayed:

Invoices Posted Correctly: 1.

2. Return to logistics invoice verification and display all the invoices (including theposted ones) for your vendor R1TV08## in the invoice overview.

What document number and status does your invoice have?

a) Purchasing→ Logistics Invoice Verification→ Further Processing→Invoice Overview

Also select the Posted invoice status. Choose [Execute]. To displayyour checked invoice, double-click on the document number or choose[Display] in the Item column.

The status of your invoice is: 5 Posted.



Lesson Summary






TIRT10_2 Lesson: Vendor Relationship

Lesson: Vendor Relationship

Lesson OverviewThe term "vendor relationships" refers to subsequent settlement with vendors orcustomers. This component allows you to perform one-time or periodic settlementfor conditions that are to be settled later. The system updates the relevant businessvolume automatically and settles the conditions at times you can specify.




Business ExampleYou conduct price negotiations with your business partners (usually at least once ayear). When doing so, you can define the prices of individual articles directly orarrange end-of-period rebates for one or more articles.

You settle end-of-period rebates with the rebate arrangement partner (for example,vendor or prior vendor) based on the business volume reached. You enter the rebatearrangements and all the subsequent conditions agreed with the condition granter inthe system so that they can be settled automatically on the agreed dates.

The system updates the business volume for each condition during the validity periodof the rebate arrangement. Settlement is then based on this updated data. The businessvolume can be updated based on purchase order, goods receipt, or invoice verificationdata. The conditions determined in pricing for the purchase order always determineprocessing. They can be evaluated at goods receipt or during invoice verificationand trigger the business volume update.



Subsequent Settlement

Figure 111: Subsequent Settlement: Cycle (5/5)

Retailers and condition granters meet at regular intervals (for example, at thebeginning of the year) to negotiate volume rebate arrangements for the next businessperiod (normally the next fiscal year). The arrangements are then entered in thesystem. The starting date for the volume-rebate arrangement can be backdated,meaning that sales from previous periods can be assigned to new arrangements. Thiscan be done by subsequently restructuring the statistics.

Purchase orders are then posted with the relevant merchandise vendors during thevalidity period for the relevant volume-rebate arrangement, the relevant goodsreceipts are posted and the vendor invoices are created and checked. Depending onthe Customizing settings made for the condition types used for the volume rebatearrangement, “provisions” for the conditions are created when the goods receipts isposted. In addition, sales data relating to the volume-rebate arrangement is updated.The type of arrangement stipulates the time at which data is updated.

If part of the expected volume-rebate is already posted before the arrangementbecomes invalid, the data can be updated using interim / partial settlement. In partialsettlement, the conditions that are created are marked as completed and are notincluded in future partial settlements. In interim settlement, this is not the case.



At the end of the validity period for the volume rebate arrangement, the vendorand the retailer can compare their business volume (which can be controlled in thearrangement) and final settlement of the volume rebate arrangement takes place.

Vendor Evaluation

Figure 112: Vendor Evaluation

The Vendor Evaluation component supports you in optimizing procurement of articlesand services. It makes it easier for you to select sources of supply and carry outongoing checks on your vendor relations. The component provides you with preciseinformation on the best prices and terms of payment and delivery, which helps yousecure your competitive strength. You can identify problems in procurement and usedetailed information to solve them in cooperation with the vendor.

The standard SAP system contains a point system of 1 to 100 points, which allowsyou to measure your vendors' performance with regard to five main evaluationcriteria. The main criteria include price, quality, delivery, and service. These areused to evaluate vendors from whom you purchase articles. If necessary you candefine different or additional main criteria. You can weight the individual criteria.The points awarded to a vendor for the individual criteria are included in the overallscore according to this weighting.



To analyze the evaluation in detail, you can subdivide a main criterion into severalsubcriteria. The system provides you with a number of subcriteria, which can be usedas an evaluation basis. You can also define additional criteria of your own.

You can use reporting functions to display the results of vendor evaluations. Forexample, you can create hit lists of the best vendors according to their overall score,and hit lists for a specific article or merchandise category.

Supply Source Determination

Figure 113: Supply Source Determination

Supply source determination is used to assign supply sources to requirements. Bothinternal (distribution centers) and external supply sources (external vendors) arepossible. Possible supply sources are defined by the system with the following priorityand then displayed on the screen as suggestions:

A:The system first checks if there is a quota arrangement for the article that has avalidity period that includes the delivery date stated in the purchase requisition. Ifyou want to procure an article from different sources of supply, you can providethe individual sources of supply with a quota, which allocates a proportion of therequirement to each source of supply. A quota arrangement is agreed for a specific



period of time. A quota arrangement does not divide up a requirement. The entirequantity demanded in a purchase requisition is assigned to one source of supplyaccording to the quota arrangement.

B: If no quota arrangement is available, the system uses the source list to determine asuitable supply source: The sources of supply that are allowed (and not allowed) foran article in a certain site and during a specified period are listed in the source list.Each source of supply is defined by a source list record.

C: The system then evaluates the Supply Source field in the article master. Thefollowing options can then be chosen:

• The system uses outline agreements, info records, and if necessary the regularvendor indicator to search for an external source of supply (external vendor) or,if maintained, by supply region

• The system uses stock transfer scheduling agreements or delivery sites(distribution center) to determine an internal supply source

• Both methods can be used one after another

In addition, you can deactivate supply source determination in your system and use auser exit to implement your own supply source determination method.

D: The first step in external supply source determination is to search for existingoutline agreements.

An outline agreement is a long-term agreement between a purchasing organizationand a vendor for the delivery or articles or the performance of services at specifiedconditions during a certain period. The following outline agreements are possible:value and quantity contracts, and delivery schedules.

You choose a value contract if the total value of all contract release orders is not toexceed a certain amount. The contract is fulfilled when an agreed-upon value hasbeen reached as a result of contract release orders.

You create a quantity contract if the total quantity to be ordered in the duration of theoutline agreement has been specified. The contract is fulfilled when a value agreed onhas been reached as a result of contract release orders.

You can also close groupwide contracts with your vendors. These apply to all theplants and company codes in a client.



Exercise 12: Vendor Relationships


• Assign supply sources to purchase requisitions

• Convert purchase requisitions to purchase orders

Business ExampleYour system contains purchase requisitions that require further processing. Thisinvolves selecting external vendors as supply sources and assigning them to thepurchase requisition items. You can then convert these to purchase orders.

Task: Supply Source Determination in PurchaseRequisitionsYou start the subsequent functions for the purchase requisition with the first step ofassigning the ordering method.

1. Select purchase requisitions for your site R8## and display all the purchaserequisition items. Make sure that the system also displays purchase requisitionitems that have been assigned. Which purchase requisition items does thesystem display?

2. Select these purchase requisition items and have the system assign the supplysources automatically. The system now performs supply source determinationand displays all the possible supply sources for each purchase order item. Youcan perform price simulation, access the vendor evaluation, or display thecorresponding purchasing info record in this supply source overview.

Select supply source R1TV06## with the order unit CSE. What happens toyour order item list? Now save your assignments. Save your assignments andexit this transaction.

3. Go to the master data for article R1TA06## and display the purchasing view ofthe article for vendor R1TV06##. What setting regarding the regular vendorhas been made?

4. Go to the master data for site R8## and display the purchasing view. Checkwhether the Regular vendor indicator has been set. If not, then set it.

5. You want to check the effects of both indicators and you therefore create anotherpurchase requisition. Enter the following data:





Supply Source Determination Select

Delivery Date 4 days from today

Site R8##


Article R1TA06##

Requested Quantity any

Unit of Measure EA

Select the purchase requisition item and go to the item details. What procurementoptions are displayed?

6. In a second step, you want to convert your purchase requisitions, which nowhave a unique supply source, to vendor orders. Select by your site R8## anddisplay the purchase requisitions found (for assignment).

Process the assignments and confirm the Create Purchase Order dialog box. Theopen purchase requisitions you selected are displayed on the left-hand side in thedocument overview. Select them and move them to the shopping basket on theright using Drag & Drop. You can now save the purchase order.

Which vendor is determined automatically?

____________________________________

Which document type was selected?

____________________________________



Solution 12: Vendor Relationships

Task: Supply Source Determination in PurchaseRequisitionsYou start the subsequent functions for the purchase requisition with the first step ofassigning the ordering method.

1. Select purchase requisitions for your site R8## and display all the purchaserequisition items. Make sure that the system also displays purchase requisitionitems that have been assigned. Which purchase requisition items does thesystem display?

a) Purchasing → Requirements Planning → Purchase Requisition →Follow-On Functions→ Assign supply source

Make your settings as specified in the task and execute the selection.The system displays a purchase requisition with two items with articlesR1TA06## and R1TA16##.

2. Select these purchase requisition items and have the system assign the supplysources automatically. The system now performs supply source determinationand displays all the possible supply sources for each purchase order item. Youcan perform price simulation, access the vendor evaluation, or display thecorresponding purchasing info record in this supply source overview.

Select supply source R1TV06## with the order unit CSE. What happens toyour order item list? Now save your assignments. Save your assignments andexit this transaction.

a) Select the items as specified in the task and choose Assign Automatically.The overview of supply sources is displayed. Select supply sourceR1TV06## (vendor Freshness) and go back. The vendors assigned andpurchasing info records are displayed as a green line for each item.

Now save your assignments.

3. Go to the master data for article R1TA06## and display the purchasing view ofthe article for vendor R1TV06##. What setting regarding the regular vendorhas been made?


Enter purchasing organization R300 and vendor R1TV06##. Select thePurchasing view. The Regular Vendor indicator is set.




4. Go to the master data for site R8## and display the purchasing view. Checkwhether the Regular vendor indicator has been set. If not, then set it.

a) Master Data → Site Data→ Site→ Change

Choose the Purchasing/Distribution tab page. Set the Regular Vendorindicator.

5. You want to check the effects of both indicators and you therefore create anotherpurchase requisition. Enter the following data:


Supply Source Determination Select

Delivery Date 4 days from today

Site R8##


Article R1TA06##

Requested Quantity any

Unit of Measure EA

Select the purchase requisition item and go to the item details. What procurementoptions are displayed?

a) Purchasing→ Requirements Planning→ Purchase Requisition→ Create

Make the settings as specified in the task and save the purchase requisition:

Display your new purchase requisition. Select the purchase requisition itemand choose Item Details. Vendor R1TV06## is displayed as a ProcurementOption.

6. In a second step, you want to convert your purchase requisitions, which nowhave a unique supply source, to vendor orders. Select by your site R8## anddisplay the purchase requisitions found (for assignment).

Process the assignments and confirm the Create Purchase Order dialog box. Theopen purchase requisitions you selected are displayed on the left-hand side in thedocument overview. Select them and move them to the shopping basket on theright using Drag & Drop. You can now save the purchase order.

Which vendor is determined automatically?

____________________________________




Which document type was selected?

____________________________________

a) Purchasing→ Requirements Planning→ Purchase Order→ Create→Automatically via purchase requisition

Proceed as specified in the task. Three purchase requisitions are found inthe overview of the assignments. When you convert these into a purchaseorder, the automatically determined vendor is R1TV06##. The documenttype for the purchase order is standard purchase order.



Lesson Summary





TIRT10_2 Lesson: Foreign Trade

Lesson: Foreign Trade

Lesson OverviewThe SAP component SAP Global Trade Services (SAP GTS) is a stand-aloneapplication and supports your global trade activities by providing the tools you needto cooperate with government and customs authorities using modern systems andelectronic communication methods.




Business ExampleYou are an international retail company and want to use SAP Global Trade Servicesto automate and support your retailing processes. Functions for export and importprocessing, embargo checks, and customs processing are particularly important.



Figure 114: SAP Global Trade Services

You can use SAP Global Trade Services (SAP GTS) to automate your internationaltrading processes, manage a large number of business partners and documents,and ensure that your company adheres to constantly changing international legalrequirements. This SAP solution is a stand-alone application and supports yourglobal trading activities by providing you with the tools you need to cooperate withthe modern systems and electronic communication methods used by governmentand customs authorities. SAP GTS is based on the technology available with SAPWeb Application Server 6.20 and 6.40, and can be used together with both SAP andnon-SAP source systems. The stand-alone application SAP GTS comprises the threeareas import and export checking, customs processing, and Risk Management.



Figure 115: Overview of Foreign Trade Activities

For example, sanctioned party list screening takes place in import and exportchecking. This involves comparing the address data in the business documentswith the available sanctioned party lists in the SAP GTS system. Export and importchecking is initiated when purchasing documents are transferred from SAP Retailor another retailing system. The function checks whether approval is necessary forexporting or importing the articles. The approval contains information on the allowedexports and imports, in particular on quantities and values. The import and exportchecks are based on a combination of certain parameters, such as the country ofdestination or special customers.

SAP GTS also performs an embargo check for this specific business transaction. Thecheck is based on a combination of the country (or country group) of departure andthe country of destination. If the system identifies an embargo situation, the documentis locked for further processing. You can use the import and export check to monitorall transactions across the entire process chain (for example, by selecting the lockeddocuments or displaying the license assignments). This gives you an overview of theentire process and gives you complete control of the individual transactions, whichguarantees absolute transparency.



The system supports your company in customs processing by automating andstandardizing import and export processes. For example, you cooperate with customsauthorities in shipping, import/export customs processing, and in classification. Youcan use SAP GTS for these processes, speeding up goods import and export, andreducing the total cost of cross-border merchandise distribution.

You can use Risk Management to reduce the financial risk involved in your foreigntrade activities. You can integrate SAP Risk Management in your standard exportprocesses. Preference processing supports exporters in meeting the legal requirementsfor customs tariff preference and marking their goods as relevant for preference.Customers can import goods without having to pay customs duty or at a reduced dutyrate if they are marked as relevant for preference. This gives the exporter a decisivecompetitive advantage. During restitution, the system ensures that all the prerequisitesfor applying for and approving restitutions are met. This also minimizes the riskof losing securities or export licenses.



Lesson Summary






Test Your Knowledge

1. A vendor order is divided intoChoose the correct answer(s).

□ A The header area□ B The item area

□ C Schedule lines□ D Item details

2. You must perform the following in a vendor order for retail goods


□ A Specify a delivery date□ B Enter an article number

□ C Define default values□ D Specify the storage location of the site to be supplied

□ E Enter the document date

3. Order list items, which come from operative assortment planning and controlcan be modified in the order list.

Determine whether this statement is true or false.

□ True

□ False

4. In which documents for the seasonal procurement process do you see a dateline?


□ A Grouped purchase order document

□ B Purchasing list□ C Order list

□ D Seasonal purchase order document

5. Which documents can you view and process using the purchase order manager?


□ A Grouped POr Documents

□ B Seasonal purchase orders□ C Order lists

□ D Purchasing lists



6. Which options are available to you in OTB procurement for obtaining budget fora grouped purchase order document (with the status OTB checked with errors)?


□ A Change other purchase order documents

□ B Request a special release□ C Change the budget type

□ D Increase the planned values

7. Which applications include procurement monitoring?


□ A The contract monitor

□ B The OTB monitor□ C The PO manager

□ D The reactive order monitor□ E The active order monitor

8. Which types of contract have you learnt about in SAP Retail?


□ A Distributed contracts□ B Centrally agreed contracts

□ C OTB-relevant value contracts with OTB reservation at header level□ D Quantity contracts

□ E OTB-relevant value contracts with OTB reservation at item level

9. On the item overview:


□ A You can record default values (such as the site and delivery date)□ B You must specify a delivery date

□ C You can use the fast change function□ D You must enter a vendor

□ E You can select an order type



10. A shipping notification


□ A Can be relevant to planning

□ B Can refer to purchase orders for various vendors□ C Appears in the confirmations for a purchase order

□ D Appears in the item overview□ E Appears in the purchase order history

11. The perishables planning list


□ A displays the current article stock at the distribution center□ B displays the current article stock at the stores

□ C displays the net price of articles per vendor□ D displays the sales figures for the article at the stores



Answers

1. A vendor order is divided into

Answer: A, B, D

A vendor order is divided into the header, item and item details.

2. You must perform the following in a vendor order for retail goods

Answer: B

When you create a vendor order, you must enter the external vendor and thearticle number.

3. Order list items, which come from operative assortment planning and controlcan be modified in the order list.

Answer: False

Planned order list items can only be modified in the purchasing list.

4. In which documents for the seasonal procurement process do you see a dateline?

Answer: A, B, C, D

Scheduling is performed in all seasonal procurement documents.

5. Which documents can you view and process using the purchase order manager?

Answer: A, B, C

Purchasing lists are planning elements that support operational assortmentplanning and control.

6. Which options are available to you in OTB procurement for obtaining budget fora grouped purchase order document (with the status OTB checked with errors)?

Answer: A, B

To obtain additional budget for a grouped purchase order document with thestatus OTB checked with errors, you can change other documents or requesta special release.



7. Which applications include procurement monitoring?

Answer: A, B, D, E

Monitoring applications for purchase orders, contracts and budgets are availableto you in Procurement Monitoring.

8. Which types of contract have you learnt about in SAP Retail?

Answer: A, B, C, D

In addition to quantity and value contracts, distributed contracts and centrallyagreed contracts (all sites in a purchasing organization), the system makes anadditional distinction between OTB-relevant and non-OTB-relevant contracts.

9. On the item overview:

Answer: A, C

You can record default values (such as the site and delivery date) on the itemoverview. The fast change function is also available on the item overview.

10. A shipping notification

Answer: A, B, C

A shipping notification can be relevant to planning and refer to purchase ordersfor various vendors. The shipping notification appears on the Confirmations forAssociated Purchase Order tab page.

11. The perishables planning list

Answer: A, C, D

The perishables planning list indicates the current stock, net prices, and salesfigures for the articles.


Unit 5Logistics

Unit OverviewThis unit describes the most important process flows at the warehouse, such as goodsreceipt posting and accessing a stock overview. You can make a distinction betweenvalue- and quantity-based inventory management. The section on TransportationManagement demonstrates how to monitor international goods movements and querytheir status at any time.


• Explain the process for various goods movements at a site

• Name the documents generated for goods movements

• Name the differences between inventory management on a value basis and ona quantity basis

• Explain the various stock levels in the stock overview

• Explain the difference between the two typical valuation procedures in SAPRetail

• Point out the features of split valuation

• Describe the most important functions of SAP Event Management

• Explain how SAP EM is integrated with other SAP and non-SAP components

• Describe the typical process flow for a business process in transportationplanning using an example

Unit ContentsLesson: Warehouse Processing ... . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .298

Exercise 13: Warehouse Processing .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .329Lesson: Inventory Management . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .341

Exercise 14: Inventory Management . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .349Lesson: Transportation Management . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .356


Unit 5: Logistics TIRT10_2

Lesson: Warehouse Processing

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces the most important goods movements at a warehouse: postinggoods receipt, posting changes and stock transfers, warehouse administration, andposting goods issue.




Business ExampleA vendor supplies you with trading goods. You post goods receipt, referencing yourvendor purchase order.

Goods put away are to be delivered to stores or customers. You use an outbounddelivery document to process shipping activities at your distribution center and then topost goods issue.

You can support and simplify processing of goods movements using Handling UnitManagement. This optimizes your logistics processes. The functions are not generallyperformed for individual articles, but instead for a number of articles that are groupedto form a package (handling unit).


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Warehouse Processing

Warehouse Processing

Figure 116: Process Flow for Goods Receipt

Goods receipt in a site (distribution center or store) can be done in one or two steps.

• One-step:

A (complete) goods receipt is executed directly.

• Two-step:

(Rough) goods receipt is performed first, followed by goods receipt.

In both procedures, the merchandise is assigned to a stock type for a storage locationat the site that receives the delivery. If the destination storage location (for example inthe case of a distribution center) is connected to SAP Warehouse Management (WM),articles can be assigned to specific storage bins (putaway). Putaway can be physicallyrestricted to individual storage areas (= a grouping of different storage bins within astorage type for the purposes of putaway).



Figure 117: Goods Receipt Function

You can create a goods receipt with reference to purchase orders, a shippingnotification (inbound delivery), or a rough GR. Goods receipt processing withreference documents has the following advantages:

• The goods receiving department can check if the delivery actually contains themerchandise that was ordered

• When the goods receipt is being created, data for the reference document issuggested by the system, thus making it easier to create the goods receipt andalso monitor the development of the goods receipt

• Goods receipt data is updated in purchase order development and vendorevaluation. The means that associates can monitor purchase order development,trigger the dunning procedure, and ensure that quantities and deadlines areadhered to

• The relevant purchaser is automatically informed about the goods receipt usingSAPmail

You can also run checks on goods receipt (for example, relative to delivery quantities,expiration dates, shipping instructions, or EAN).

One additional type of goods receipt in SAP Retail is the creation of returnabletransport packaging as special stock. Returnable transport packaging can be transportequipment (for example, a pallet) or empties (for example, bottles).



It is also possible to post goods receipt without a reference document for a documentthat has been created previously in the system. This allows you to subsequentlygenerate a purchase order thereby allowing you to use invoice verification at a laterdate.

If a goods receipt is created with a reference to an inbound delivery, proof of deliverycan be sent to the vendor in an IDoc.

Figure 118: Structures in Warehouse Management (WM)

If stocks are to be administered at storage bin level within a storage location ata distribution center (site), you can do this using SAP's Warehouse Management(WM) system.

To do so, you must assign a warehouse number to the relevant storage location. Thewarehouse number represents the entire warehouse structure.

Storage locations that have different technical or organizational requirements aredistinguished by different storage types in the warehouse number.

Examples: GR zone = storage type 902, high rack storage area, bulk storage, GI zone= storage type 910. To make goods receipt processing and picking easier, you candefine several doors and staging areas under a warehouse number.



You can choose to group neighboring areas within the same storage type. If yourgroupings are created based on goods receipts, these are referred to as storage areas.If they are based on picking, these are referred to as picking areas.

Storage bins are defined in areas, or in storage types if areas are not used. The storagebins are identified by three-character, numeric coordinates.

Figure 119: Movement Types

Postings of goods receipt, goods issue, stock transfers, or posting changes (forexample, article to article) are goods movements. Each posting changes the stock ofan article at a site/storage location.

The movement type determines the type of change in stock that is posted in the system(for example, booking in goods to available stocks). It performs an important controlfunction in inventory management. Among other things, the movement type controlshow quantities are updated, as well as updating of balance sheet and consumptionaccounts.

You specify a movement type (three-character key) with each posting to identify agoods movement.

Control By Movement Type



The movement type determines, for example, whether quantities and values areupdated. The system uses the assignment between a posting string and a movementtype to determine the G/L accounts that are updated when a goods movement takesplace. You also specify the types of preceding documents for each movement type, thetransactions in which the movement type is used, the movement type that can be usedto reverse the posting made, the fields displayed, and other settings.

Figure 120: Effects of Goods Receipt

This diagram provides an overview of the most important effects of goods receiptswith reference to a purchase order.



Figure 121: Posting Goods Movements with MIGO

A goods movement is a transaction that changes stock. The following types of goodsmovements are distinguished in the system:

Goods receipt (GR) is a goods movement in which the receipt of goods from anexternal vendor (or from production) is posted. A goods receipt leads to an increasein the warehouse stock.

Goods issue (GI) is a goods movement in which a merchandise shipment to thecustomer, an article withdrawal or issue, or consumption is posted. A goods issueleads to a decrease in the warehouse stock.

Stock transfer consists of removing articles from one storage location and puttingthem away in another storage location. Stock transfers can take place both within thesame site and from one site to another (also in different company codes). The sites canbe both distribution centers and stores.

A transfer posting is a general term for stock transfers and changes to an article'sstock identification or category. It is irrelevant whether the posting relates to aphysical movement or not.



A separate transaction is available for each of these posting transactions. You can alsouse transaction MIGO. This transaction is used for all posting transactions whosetransaction keys begin with MB*. You can use transaction MIGO to post a wide rangeof goods movements, and can then display the article documents created for themwithout having to exit the transaction.

The overview tree on the left hand side displays the last ten documents for purchaseorders, sales orders, article documents, and data on hold. This means you alwayshave an overview of the activities you last performed. You can use the default valuesto make default settings, for example for the posting transactions, site and storagelocation, and for the general settings.

You can still hide certain fields in the header or details, or define them as mandatoryfields, in the Customizing settings for Inventory Management. You can also hidepushbuttons that you do not require. You can hide columns you do not require inthe item overview.

Goods Issue Processes

Figure 122: Process Flow for Goods Issue

The outbound delivery document is the central document in shipping. It forms thebasis for further shipping activities such as picking, packing merchandise, and thefinal goods issue posting.



After creating outbound delivery documents (normally for stock transport orders orsales orders), you can group them together in wave picks (= work packages for thegoods issue processes that have to be processed during a specified time interval), ifnecessary. Picking is then run for the deliveries. They are then, if necessary, packagedand sent to goods issues.

Figure 123: Goods Issue Processes

Using lean WM (WM = Warehouse Management), you can pick using transfer orders,even if no storage bins are managed in the system. In lean WM, no goods receipts orgoods issues are processed as follow-up processes in WM. This means that storage bindata and stocks are not updated at storage bin level using quants. Instead, this processis carried out at storage location level.

Storage bins are not managed in lean WM but you can assign a fixed storage binto the article in the article master, which will then be printed on the transfer orderas information for the picker.

The processes in lean WM are fundamentally the same as those in normal WarehouseManagement. You work with outbound deliveries and create transfer orders for them.The other structures in WM (storage types, doors, staging areas, storage sections) canbe mapped in lean WM in exactly the same way as in WM.



Figure 124: Shipping point

The shipping point is the organizational unit in the SAP System that is responsible forprocessing goods issue processes (and deliveries). It is determined for a combinationof term of delivery (for example, express), loading group (for example, forklift or doorB) and submitting site.

Before you can give your customer a delivery date for a particular article, the systemneeds to know all the necessary leadtimes for the different part processes in the goodsissue and transport processes.

You can define times for preparation and loading merchandise for the shipping point.

The shipping point is normally determined automatically for each item in the salesdocument. The value proposed by the system can be changed manually at a later dateif you have defined alternative shipping points for this.



Figure 125: Structure of the Outbound Delivery Document

Outbound delivery documents consist of a header and any number of items.

The header contains data that is valid for the entire document. For example, thisincludes the recipient, the shipping point, and the route for each individual delivery.

The items mostly contain information about the articles that are going to be delivered.

The information in the outbound delivery document is displayed in different screens:

The overview screen contains some header and item data; this is grouped thematicallyin a tabstrip control. This enables the user to find important data on the same screen.

An additional screen is available for displaying detailed information at header leveland item level. This data is also grouped together under tab pages according to theprocess it refers to.

For example, at header level you can access data on processing, picking, loading,transportation, global trade services/customs, texts, partners, messages, parceltracking, and conditions.

The item detail screen also displays tab pages containing item-related information.



Figure 126: System Activities when Creating an Outbound Delivery



During (automatic or manual) outbound delivery creation, the functions performed bythe system include the following, depending on the Customizing settings:

• (Re)scheduling

Depending on the delivery type, backlogged preceding documents (in thisexample, warehouse orders) are (re)scheduled.

• (Actual) route determination

New routes are determined depending on the delivery type. If a (target) routeis specified in the preceding document (in this case, the warehouse order), thiscan be overwritten.

• Route schedule determination

If the shipping point has been configured in the system to allow route schedulesto be used but a route schedule was not determined in the preceding document,the system determines a route schedule that matches the (requested) deliverydate for the route previously determined.

• Door/picking zone determination

• (New) availability check

If necessary for the delivery item category, the system checks availability again.

• Picking location determination

If a storage location has not been specified for a delivery item in the precedingdocument (in this case, the warehouse order), the system automaticallydetermines a storage location from which the article in the delivery item can bepicked, if this function is activated in the delivery item category.



Outbound Delivery Monitor

Figure 127: Outbound Delivery Monitor

The outbound delivery monitor has a function for displaying outbound deliveriesthat are still to be processed or are already completed.

Numerous criteria exist for selecting the desired documents. You will receive a list ofthe selected deliveries and can start the subsequent functions for further processingfrom the list. This also includes processing messages that occur during the goodsissue processes (for example, delivery notes). In addition, information in the deliveryenvironment can also be called. You can create user-specific variants for selecting andfor displaying the documents (selection variants or display variants).

You can also use the outbound delivery monitor to run important subsequent functionsin collective processing in the background (for example, create of transport requestsfor picking, posting goods issue).

The outbound delivery monitor provides you with an analog functionality formonitoring and performing outbound delivery activities.



Figure 128: Picking Options

You can print the picking list(s) for the warehouse from the transfer order. Thisstep can be performed automatically. Instead of printing the pick list, you can, forexample, pass the transfer order data to an external warehouse management systemusing mobile data capture (MDC) units.

If you have not run automatic confirmation, you can also confirm picked quantitiesmanually when monitoring and checking the picking process You can also confirmdeviating quantities and show the reason for the variance by setting a varianceindicator.

If the entire quantity cannot be picked, you can

• Run picking for the open quantities using an additional transfer order

• Reduce the quantities for delivery by copying the picked quantity



Figure 129: Additional Transfer Order Functions

If you use the Warehouse Management (WM) system for picking, you also haveaccess to additional functions for WM transfer orders. This is also true of lean WM.

This also enables you to use one single processing procedure when picking from fixedstorage bins or badly organized warehouses.

You can generate more than one transfer order from a single delivery. This is usefulif, for example, you want to split quantities according to picking areas or split theworkload among different agents.

User numbers are used to identify users who process the transfer orders.



Figure 130: Confirmation of transfer orders

When you generate the transfer order, the system uses the delivery quantity as thepick quantity. This means that the picking status is set to C, meaning that picking iscomplete.

If you require the complete picking procedure to be registered in your system, you canuse confirmation requirement.

Transfer orders and picked quantities (Pick quantity field) are confirmed beforethe goods issue is posted.

If you can guarantee that changes to deliveries occur very rarely as a result of thepicking process, thus allowing confirmation to take place on time, this step canbe limited to deliveries that have to be changed by working without confirmationrequirements.

Quantity variances can also be confirmed. You can have the system record the reasonfor the quantity variance if you configure it to display the variance indicator.

As soon as confirmation has taken place, the WM activity status is set to C, irrespectiveof the quantity reported back. The pick quantity only influences the picking status.

The confirmation requirement is defined for each storage type in Customizing. It issufficient for removal from storage from the "from" storage type or putaway in the "to"storage type to be configured in such a way as to indicate that confirmation is required.



Figure 131: Goods Issue

The goods issue process is complete when the goods issue for a delivery is posted.

Goods issue can only be posted if all the compulsory activities in the goods issueprocesses have been performed. For example, if you work with picking relevance andconfirmation requirement, these steps must be completed.

Goods issue posting can be performed by changing an individual outbound delivery.Alternatively, you can use the collective processing function to first of all select all thedeliveries that have to be posted at goods issue and then actually post the necessarydeliveries. You can also use the delivery monitor or the wave pick monitor to do this.

In addition, you can post goods issue by confirming the transfer order.

Situations where errors arise are logged, for example, if data is incomplete or itemshave only been partially picked. In such cases, the goods issue is not posted.



Figure 132: Effects of Goods Issue

Goods issue:

• Reduces the warehouse stock

• Posts the value change to the stock accounts in article accounting

• Reduces the delivery requirements

• Includes status information in the delivery

• Is recorded in the document flow

• Generates the worklist for billing

• posts goods receipt in the store at the same time as one-level stock transfersare defined in Customizing

Once the goods issue is posted, the editability of the outbound delivery is limited.Quantities, in particular, cannot be changed. The delivery must be an exact match ofthe order as stated in the system at goods issue.

If you also want to be able to execute billing prior to goods issue using the CreateBilling Document transaction, you can make the relevant setting in copying controlfor the billing document in Customizing.



Figure 133: Outbound Delivery Documents

Delivery notes can be printed for an outbound delivery before goods issue. A deliverynote normally contains the delivery note number, the delivery date, the recipient andthe individual delivery items. Delivery notes can also be sent using EDI.

The layout of the delivery note can be created flexibly using suitable forms. Theretail price for each item can also be included in the delivery note, thereby makingprice marking easier in the store.



Figure 134: Definition of a Handling Unit

The term "handling unit" (HU) is the SAP term for a package (pallet, container,commercial truck) and describes a physical grouping of packaging materials (forexample, pallets, cardboard boxes, shrink film, containers, commercial trucks) andmerchandise (for transport, storage, and consumption).

Each handling unit has a unique identification number, so that it can easily beidentified in the system. All data can be read using this number.



Figure 135: Handling Unit Management

Using Handling Unit Management, you can map packing-controlled logistics in theSAP system. Here, you do not generally process individual articles, but instead anumber of articles that are grouped to form a package. This approach is mapped inthe system using handling units.

Mapping the logistics processes on the basis of handling units simplifies theprocessing of goods movements and therefore optimizes the processes in logistics.The aim is for the handling units to remain unchanged on their way through logistics.Once the handling units have been created, all subsequent processes can use thisinformation. In particular, they can be moved through the entire logistics and passedon to partners in the supply chain. If necessary, however, they can also be changed.

This supply chain includes the purchase order, notification, inbound delivery, storageor putaway, and the goods receipt posting of the ordered merchandise.

The main advantage of mapping the goods receipt process using an inbound deliveryis that you can carry out a number of processes before the actual goods receipt isposted. You already know all the information, as the vendor notifies you about theinbound delivery. The inbound delivery describes exactly which articles or whichpallets can be accepted at what time.



The following functions are available with the goods receipt process for the inbounddelivery:

• Transfer order for inbound delivery

• Batch information

• Inventory management of packaging materials

• Inbound delivery monitor

• Determination of goods receiving point

• Incompleteness log

• Change documents

• Document flow for inbound delivery

Figure 136: Handling Unit

Handling Unit Management enables you to control packaged stock at storage locationlevel. For each storage location, you can define whether the handling units for thestock in this location keep stock autonomy or not.

Good movements to storage locations managed using handling units are only possibleif you specify the handling unit that contains the stock to be posted.

When handling units are changed, unpacked stock is reposted to non HU-managedstorage locations and packed stock is reposted to HU-managed storage locations.

The handling unit contains the exact stock category of the packed stock.



In HU-managed storage locations, the content of the handling unit always IM(Inventory Management) storage location stock.

Figure 137: Packing

Packing involves assigning delivery items to packaging materials. The handling unitsthat are created during this process can then be packed in further packaging material.This creates new handling units. There is no limitation to the number of levels that canbe used (multilevel packing). The number of possible packaging levels is 999999.

In addition to the standard packing of delivery items in handling units, you have theoption of automatically packing a specific quantity into several different handlingunits.

Selected items for an outbound delivery can be packed in separate packaging, which isreferred to as a handling unit (= package).

The handling unit is assigned a number from a defined number range or it can beidentified using SSCC18 (Serialized Shipping Container Code).

Once a handling unit is filled (for example, a pallet), the system generates an outbounddelivery for the contents of the handling unit and posts goods issue. This procedurecan only be used in conjunction with Lean Warehouse Management.

Items that have already been packed can be unpacked again. This is also the case formulti-level-packed handling units. Handling units can also be unpacked, emptied ordeleted.



The packaging material to be used is defined in the handling unit header. Thecontents overview for the packaging material indicates which delivery items orhandling units it contains, as well as all relevant quantities.

You can use packing instructions when packing articles. You can use one packinginstruction for a number of different articles. In this case, you require a referencearticle, which represents for all the articles that are to be packed using the samepacking instructions. A packing instruction is created for this reference material. Inaddition, the use of reference articles for packing instructions must be activated inCustomizing.

The data defaulted from the article master record for the packaging material can bechanged and extended to include an external identification method (for example,the pallet number).

Merchandise Distribution

Figure 138: Merchandise Distribution

You can use the merchandise distribution functions to control the flow of merchandisefrom the vendor to the distribution center and on to the recipient (store or customer) ifthe recipients of the articles are known at the time of procurement. You can use eitheran allocation table (push method) or a collective purchase order (pull method) to



plan distribution. The merchandise is procured externally and always flows throughthe distribution center. It can either be put away in the distribution center or movedthrough the distribution center using cross-docking or flow-through.

In the push concept, planning for merchandise distribution takes place using anallocation table. The procurement documents (vendor orders) and issue documents(warehouse orders or sales orders) are then generated as follow-on documents forthe allocation table. The distribution data is updated in the system when follow-ondocuments are generated. This data is then used to control the merchandise flow in thedistribution center after goods receipt. If the allocation table is created with a link to apurchase order or a shipping notification, a procurement document already exists, sothat only issue documents are generated as follow-on documents.

When the pull method is used, issue documents (sales orders or warehouse orders)for the recipients exist already. Collective purchase orders are created as procurementdocuments in which the issue document quantities for each article and distributioncenter are added together. Distribution data is also updated in the system whencollective purchase orders are generated. The data is then used to control and monitorthe distribution of merchandise to the recipients.

Figure 139: Options for Processing Merchandise Distribution



The processing procedure for merchandise distribution defines how the merchandisein the distribution center is handled after goods receipt, and which follow-ondocuments are then generated.

Cross-docking: Merchandise is moved from goods receipts to goods issue withoutbeing placed in temporary storage. Deliveries are generated, and picking is notrequired.

Recipient-driven flow-through: Outbound deliveries are generated for recipientsafter goods receipt. Picking is then carried out for these deliveries.

Merchandise-driven flow-through: In the distribution center, merchandise is pickedbased on distribution orders. When a handling unit is filled (for example, a pallet),the system generates an outbound delivery for the contents of the handling unit. Thisprocedure can only be used in conjunction with Lean Warehouse Management.

Putaway: Merchandise is posted to a putaway storage location. Deliveries are thengenerated and used when merchandise is removed from storage at a later date.

You can use optimized procedures so as to process different purchase quantities (forexample, pallets and cartons) and at the same time perform procurement in largehandling units.



RFID

Figure 140: RFID Technology

RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) is used to read and save data remotely. Thismethod is increasingly regarded as an alternative to the bar code and can be used tolabel and identify merchandise, objects, and persons. An RFID system comprises thefollowing two main components:

RFID tags are small memory chips that contain the RFID markers. The RFIDchip is connected to an antenna and is combined with a suitable medium toform an RFI sticker. Depending on the technology used, data transfer takesplace by electromagnetic transmission ("backscattering") or by connecting to anelectromagnetic field ("induction"). This makes it possible to read and write dataremotely. These RFID tags can be affixed to containers, packaging units, andindividual products for identification purposes.

The data in the tag is received by a reader. The reader is connected to correspondingantennas and generates the energy required for communication, while communicatingwith the RFID tags. There are two basic variants of tags and readers. These twovariants differ in their functions, intended use, and cost of production. For this reason,the best solution depends on your individual requirements.



Figure 141: Purpose of RFID

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) is a method that can be used to label andidentify merchandise (for example, trading goods), objects, and persons. As is the casewith many new technological developments, the short-term market potential of RFIDis initially identified in commerce. Optimizing stockholding, reducing out-of-stocksituations, and fast entry of goods receipts and issues are only a few examples of itsuses, almost all of which are designed to increase efficiency and save costs.

The current discussion exhibits two basic extremes. On the one hand, RFID systemsare considered to have the potential to replace the bar code as a product labelinginstrument. On the other hand, technological developments are still at an early stageinvolving numerous challenges to find solutions to the cheaper mass production oftags, worldwide implementation of standards, and technical security and acceptance.



Figure 142: RFID Application

The SAP RFID solution unites the virtual world of transactions, business rules,and processes with the physical world of products and humans. It automatesprocess execution using well-conceived mechanisms that distribute data to differentapplications.

The SAP RFID solution comprises modular components that complement each otherand can be integrated for operations:

SAP NetWeaver Auto-ID Infrastructure

This SAP NetWeaver component can be used to integrate all automatedcommunication and data entry devices, such as bar code readers, Bluetooth devices,and RFID readers and printers. It not only filters, buffers, checks, and aggregatesdata received from various hardware sources, but also places this data in a businesscontext. To do this, an SAP system accesses the applications that support the relevantbusiness process, for example Inventory Management and Warehouse Management.

The Auto-ID Infrastructure is lean and fast. You can install it on site in a plant,distribution center or shop, thanks to its built-in SQL database. This means it is closeto the action and can respond quickly to real-time processes performed by localdevices (such as readers and printers). Non-SAP applications, such as warehousingsystems, can also be connected to the Auto-ID Infrastructure.

RFID Adaptors



Existing SAP systems (ERP as of Release 4.6C) can process data imported byRFID by means of RFID adapters. The adapters enable productive SAP systems toswitch quickly to RFID-supported processes without the need for work-intensiveadjustments. SAP supplies these adapters at no extra cost as part of the SAP RFIDsolution. In this way, SAP guarantees that existing processes in SAP applicationsare not adversely affected by RFID modifications. (Note: These adapters are notrequired for SAP ERP, the most recent release of the ERP product suite, since theyare already integrated in the solution.)

SAP Event Management

This solution monitors and transfers Auto-ID data across different infrastructures andsystems that are used by logistics partners, thus ensuring transparency of processesacross systems and companies. Activities and alert notifications can be triggeredautomatically upon the occurrence of expected and unexpected events.

SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure

The SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure (SAP XI) reduces administration tasksby processing data exchange between SAP systems, the Auto-ID Infrastructure,and the Event Management software. Its business process management functionsunite data from various systems, for example, matching shipping notifications withRFID data. SAP XI is not only part of the SAP NetWeaver platform but is also thecentral integration technology used to map Auto-ID data to other systems, formats,and integration methods.



Exercise 13: Warehouse Processing


• Post a goods receipt at your distribution center using transaction MIGO

• Post a goods issue at your distribution center for an outbound delivery

• Pack articles from an outbound delivery and create a handling unit

Business ExampleYou have received a standard purchase order from your external vendor. You post thegoods receipt for this preceding document.

Task 1: Goods Receipt ProcessYou want to use transaction MIGO for your goods receipt posting. Since themerchandise has to be checked afterwards, you decide to post it to stock in qualityinspection.

1. Enter the transaction key MIGO in the command field in the system toolbar.Choose Settings and access the Default Values. Make the following settings:



In Site R7##

Propose the OK Function in Future Select

Choose movement type 101 and stock type 2 Quality Inspection for the actionsA01 Goods Receipt and R01 Purchase Order. Then adopt your settings andreturn to the initial screen.

Now use the F4 help to search for your vendor order. Use the search helpPurchasing Documents per Vendor. Search for documents for vendor R1TV12##and for document date Monday of this week and copy them.

Caution: Make sure that there is no site entered in the Site field in theinitial screen of the goods receipt posting.




2. Which changes do you notice in the document overview (on the left)?

3. Now post the goods receipt for your purchase order. What changes in thedocument overview?

4. Now access actions A04 Display and R02 Article Document and display yournew article document. Check that the stock type Quality Inspection was selectedfor both items. Then exit the transaction.

Task 2: Goods Issue ProcessCertain merchandise is to be delivered directly from the warehouse for the distributioncenter to the stores. Stock transport orders have already been created for this purpose.You now use these to generate deliveries and process the necessary goods issueactivities.

1. Which documents have to be generated from a stock transport order to enablegoods issues activities to be performed?

2. You want to generate an outbound delivery and refer to a concrete stock transportorder. Trigger the process for your shipping point RT## and for your supplyingsite R7##. Change the rule for the selection criteria regarding delivery creationdate to 3.

Select your two items in the overview of transactions for delivery and create theoutbound deliveries. How many deliveries have been generated? Why is this?

Please note down the numbers of the deliveries:




3. Display one of the generated outbound deliveries in the document display andfind the following data, which is important for goods issue planning:

When does picking have to begin (Picking Date)?

At what time should the merchandise leave the warehouse (Planned GoodsIssue Date)?

Then exit the transaction.

Task 3: PackingYou can perform all the other goods issues activities using the delivery monitor.

Merchandise Logistics→ Logistics Execution→ Outbound Process→ GoodsIssue for Outbound Delivery→ Outbound Delivery→ Lists and Logs→ OutboundDelivery Monitor

1. In the delivery monitor, display all the outbound deliveries scheduled ForPicking at your R## warehouse. Select by your shipping point RT##. Whatoverall status of picking and overall status of WM activities do your outbounddeliveries show?

Overall status ofpicking

Overall status of WMactivities

Outbound delivery forR1##


2. Picking of articles takes place using transport requests. Create transfer ordersfor both outbound deliveries: Subsequent Functions→ Create Transfer Order.Select both items first. You want to use the delivery quantity in the delivery asthe picking quantity.

3. Go to List Outbound Deliveries. Select by your shipping point RT##. Select oneof your outbound deliveries and switch to change mode.




Choose Pack to create handling units. You are now in handling unit processing.Now select the articles you want to pack (R1TA11## and R1TA12##) and choosePack. Have the system search for permitted packaging materials.

Select euro pallet RT211211 as the packaging material and pack all your articlesin it. Now display the contents of the handling unit you have just created onthe TotalContent tab.




4. What is the number of your handling unit?

5. Select the row with the HU number and go to the General detail view. Determinethe packaging material type and packaging material category.

6. Before you save your outbound delivery, return to the overview for it. What haschanged on the Item Overview tab page?

7. Go to the status overview for this outbound delivery. How has the packingstatus changed?

Now save your outbound delivery.

8. Finally, post the goods issue for your deliveries from the delivery monitor.Select by your shipping point RT##. Select the suggested outbound deliveriesand post the goods issue using Subsequent Functions. Accept the proposedactual goods movement date.

9. You want to add a delivery note to your outbound deliveries. Create thisoutbound delivery message using the subsequent functions (for example, in postgoods issue for outbound deliveries) with message type LD00. Confirm thatyou want to run First processing. Select your outbound deliveries and displayeach print preview.



Solution 13: Warehouse Processing

Task 1: Goods Receipt ProcessYou want to use transaction MIGO for your goods receipt posting. Since themerchandise has to be checked afterwards, you decide to post it to stock in qualityinspection.

1. Enter the transaction key MIGO in the command field in the system toolbar.Choose Settings and access the Default Values. Make the following settings:



In Site R7##

Propose the OK Function in Future Select

Choose movement type 101 and stock type 2 Quality Inspection for the actionsA01 Goods Receipt and R01 Purchase Order. Then adopt your settings andreturn to the initial screen.

Now use the F4 help to search for your vendor order. Use the search helpPurchasing Documents per Vendor. Search for documents for vendor R1TV12##and for document date Monday of this week and copy them.

Caution: Make sure that there is no site entered in the Site field in theinitial screen of the goods receipt posting.

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Logistics Execution→ Inbound Process→Goods Receipt for Purchase Order, Order, Other Transactions→ EnterGoods Receipt for Purchase Order

Make your entries according to the exercise. The systems finds a vendororder with two purchase order items. These are displayed in the headerdata. Your settings have also been copied.

2. Which changes do you notice in the document overview (on the left)?

Answer: The vendor order that was found is displayed under My Documents.




3. Now post the goods receipt for your purchase order. What changes in thedocument overview?

a) Choose Post. The article document number appears under ArticleDocuments under My Documents.

4. Now access actions A04 Display and R02 Article Document and display yournew article document. Check that the stock type Quality Inspection was selectedfor both items. Then exit the transaction.

a) Make your entries according to the exercise. Choose your new articledocument in the document overview (on the left) by double-clicking on it.The data from the article document is displayed.

On the Doc. info tab page you will find the FI Documents pushbutton.From here you can access the accounting document.

Task 2: Goods Issue ProcessCertain merchandise is to be delivered directly from the warehouse for the distributioncenter to the stores. Stock transport orders have already been created for this purpose.You now use these to generate deliveries and process the necessary goods issueactivities.

1. Which documents have to be generated from a stock transport order to enablegoods issues activities to be performed?

Answer: An outbound delivery is the central document in shipping. It forms thebasis of shipping activities such as picking, packing merchandise and postingthe goods issue.

2. You want to generate an outbound delivery and refer to a concrete stock transportorder. Trigger the process for your shipping point RT## and for your supplyingsite R7##. Change the rule for the selection criteria regarding delivery creationdate to 3.

Select your two items in the overview of transactions for delivery and create theoutbound deliveries. How many deliveries have been generated? Why is this?

Please note down the numbers of the deliveries:

Answer: Merchandise Logistics→ Logistics Execution→ Outbound Process→ Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery→ Outbound Delivery→ Create→Collective Processing of Documents Due for Delivery→ Purchase Orders

Two outbound deliveries are created, one for each goods recipient R1##, R2##.You can view the outbound delivery numbers using the Show/Hide Deliverypushbutton.




3. Display one of the generated outbound deliveries in the document display andfind the following data, which is important for goods issue planning:

When does picking have to begin (Picking Date)?

At what time should the merchandise leave the warehouse (Planned GoodsIssue Date)?

Then exit the transaction.

Answer: Go to the header data for one of the outbound deliveries and select theProcessing tab page.

The picking date/time is the day after tomorrow at 3:00 p.m.

The planned goods issue date/time is the day after tomorrow at 10:00 p.m.

Task 3: PackingYou can perform all the other goods issues activities using the delivery monitor.

Merchandise Logistics → Logistics Execution→ Outbound Process→ GoodsIssue for Outbound Delivery→ Outbound Delivery→ Lists and Logs→ OutboundDelivery Monitor

1. In the delivery monitor, display all the outbound deliveries scheduled ForPicking at your R## warehouse. Select by your shipping point RT##. Whatoverall status of picking and overall status of WM activities do your outbounddeliveries show?




Overall status ofpicking




a) Make your settings as per the task. You can access an outbound delivery bydouble-clicking on it in the overview of the Day's Workload for Picking.Choose the Picking tab page.

Overall pickingstatus



A A


A A

Go back to Day's Workload for Picking.

2. Picking of articles takes place using transport requests. Create transfer ordersfor both outbound deliveries: Subsequent Functions→ Create Transfer Order.Select both items first. You want to use the delivery quantity in the delivery asthe picking quantity.

a) Make your settings as per the task. In the Copy Picking Quantity field,select 1. The system issues the following message:

WM-TO: 2 deliveries successful, 0 with errors, 0 not relevant

Go back to the outbound delivery monitor.

3. Go to List Outbound Deliveries. Select by your shipping point RT##. Select oneof your outbound deliveries and switch to change mode.

Choose Pack to create handling units. You are now in handling unit processing.Now select the articles you want to pack (R1TA11## and R1TA12##) and choosePack. Have the system search for permitted packaging materials.




Select euro pallet RT211211 as the packaging material and pack all your articlesin it. Now display the contents of the handling unit you have just created onthe TotalContent tab.

a) Make your settings as per the task. The contents of the newly createdhandling unit is displayed on the Ttl content tab page. The euro palletRT211211 appears at hierarchy level 0. The two articles R1TA11## andR1TA12## appear at hierarchy level 1.

4. What is the number of your handling unit?

Answer: The HU number is generated automatically and displayed in the Lineidentification column.

5. Select the row with the HU number and go to the General detail view. Determinethe packaging material type and packaging material category.

Answer: The packaging material type for the handling unit is 0006 ReusablePallets, and the packaging material category is C Packaging material.

6. Before you save your outbound delivery, return to the overview for it. What haschanged on the Item Overview tab page?

Answer: A third row is displayed. This has item number 900001, and europallet RT211211 is displayed as the article. The delivery quantity is 1 EA.

7. Go to the status overview for this outbound delivery. How has the packingstatus changed?

Now save your outbound delivery.

Answer: The packing status (PS) appears as C = Completely Processed.

8. Finally, post the goods issue for your deliveries from the delivery monitor.Select by your shipping point RT##. Select the suggested outbound deliveriesand post the goods issue using Subsequent Functions. Accept the proposedactual goods movement date.

a) Start in the outbound delivery monitor with the For Goods Issuepushbutton. Make your settings as per the task. The system issues thefollowing message:

2 successful and 0 incorrect goods movements

Do not exit this display yet.




9. You want to add a delivery note to your outbound deliveries. Create thisoutbound delivery message using the subsequent functions (for example, in postgoods issue for outbound deliveries) with message type LD00. Confirm thatyou want to run First processing. Select your outbound deliveries and displayeach print preview.

a) In Post Goods Issue for outbound deliveries, choose Subsequent Functions→ Output from Deliveries. Make your settings as per the task. The systemissues the following message:

Form LE_SHP_DELNOTE was generated.



Lesson Summary





TIRT10_2 Lesson: Inventory Management

Lesson: Inventory Management

Lesson OverviewYou will learn about the various inventory management options. The various stocktypes are explained using the example of a stock overview.






Business ExampleYour company is discussing the advantages and disadvantages of inventorymanagement on a value basis and on a quantity basis. You display stocks as differentstock types in the stock overview.



Figure 143: inventory management types

inventory management types

If inventory management for an article is carried out on a quantity and value basis,the stock quantity, stock value, and G/L accounts in Financial Accounting and CostAccounting are usually updated.

If inventory management is on a quantity basis only, no accounting data can bemaintained in the article master record. When a goods movement is posted, only thestock quantities are updated. The system does not update the article stock value or theaccounts in Financial Accounting and Cost Accounting.

If inventory management is on a value basis only, quantity information may beavailable for information purposes. The sales value must be managed for thesearticles. A valuation at purchase price and retail price is carried out for each goodsmovement. These value-only articles can be used to realize non-article-based(value-only) inventory management at stores.

You use the article type in Customizing to specify how an article is managed on avalue basis and quantity basis. Examples of typical article types provided in thestandard version include raw materials, retail goods, apparel, and empties.



Figure 144: Inventory Management in Logistics

The logistics process is split into article flow and value flow. The MaterialsManagement component (MM) performs article planning using requirementsplanning, which receives different requirements, for example from sales orders. Theserequirements are passed on to Procurement and continued processing takes place thereusing the Purchasing functions.

Inventory Management (IM) is used for transactions that lead to stock changessuch as goods receipts, goods issues, transfer postings, and stock transfers. TheWarehouse Management system (WM) is integrated in the article flow and mapscomplex warehouse structures and warehouse movements. The processing of logisticsprocesses in Logistics Execution (LE) continues in Shipping and is completedin Billing. Billing is integrated in internal and external Accounting (FinancialAccounting and Controlling).

The value flow is updated in invoice verification and the information from the goodsreceipt, purchase order, and goods issue is consolidated.



Figure 145: Stock Types

Inventory Management uses three stock types, which indicate the way in which anarticle can be used:

Unrestricted-use stock is not limited in any way. Articles in quality inspectionstock must be moved to unrestricted-use stock before withdrawal. Blocked stock isprocessed in the same way as quality inspection stock.

For each goods receipt, you decide which stock to post the quantity to. The stock isimportant for determining availability of stock in requirements planning and alsofor picking in inventory management.



Figure 146: Special stock

You post scrapping if an article can no longer be used, for example because it has beenstored for too long a period and has thus deteriorated in quality, become out of date,or has been destroyed, for example if a cardboard box of crystal glasses falls from afork-lift truck during transport. You enter this destruction as scrapping. You can scrapall three stock types. Scrapping reduces the corresponding stock, posts the value of thearticle scrapped from the inventory account to a scrap account, and debits a cost center.

Vendor consignment is externally owned special stock that is stored by your companybut belongs to the vendor or customer. Since this special stock is located at yourcompany, it is managed at storage location level. All three stock types can fall intothis category. Consignment stock and vendor stock is inventoriable and available forrequirements planning.

Returnable transport packaging (RTP) is a medium used to contain goods (forexample, pallet, container) that is used several times to transport retail merchandisefrom a vendor to a customer.

Returnable transport packaging supplied by the vendor that remains at the storagelocation is managed as externally owned special stock and is assigned to the vendorin question. It is the property of the vendor and is therefore not included in valuatedstock.

To manage different vendors' RTP stock separately, special stock data is required inaddition to the master data. This data is defined at storage location level for eachvendor. The special stock data is created automatically the first time RTP stock is



accessed. It cannot be maintained directly by the user but is automatically updatedwith each goods movement (or inventory). RTP stock can only be unrestricted-use.There is no quality inspection stock or blocked stock.

Another possible stock type is goods receipt blocked stock. You can choose thisstock type when posting goods receipt at the warehouse, for example if the goods areonly to be accepted conditionally. The goods are then non-valuated but are displayedin the purchase order history for the item. This stock is not assigned to a specificstorage location.

Figure 147: Stock Overview

The article stock is displayed in the individual organizational levels in the stockoverview. The quantities posted for a specific stock type are added up for eachorganizational unit.

In addition to the client, company code, site and storage location organizational units,it is also possible to have a stock overview of batches/valuation type and specialstocks (for example, consignment article).

The stock overview is a static representation of the article stocks. This means thatonly the current stock levels are displayed. Goods receipts and issues planned for thefuture are not displayed in this list. Using the menu bar, you can, however, call upfurther information functions.



You can view a stock overview in different display versions that vary according to thelisting and sequencing of the individual stock types. You can determine which stocksappear in the individual columns and in what sequence the columns are displayedusing the system administration in inventory management Customizing.

Figure 148: Split Valuation

In SAP Retail, the valuation area level is defined for each site. If split valuation isactive, partial stocks of an article can be valuated separately at this site. Valuationcategories and types are defined for each site; that is, for each valuation area level. Avaluation type characterizes one of the possible types of stock for a certain valuationcategory. Default valuation types can be defined for a valuation category. This affectsthe valuation type that is to be entered in a purchase order. If you want to carry outsplit valuation for an article, you enter a valuation category in the accounting data ofthe article. This defines which valuation types can be specified.



Figure 149: Split Valuation

Split valuation allows you to manage partial stock for an article with different prices.For example, it can be used in SAP Retail to distinguish promotion stock from normalstock.

Each valuation type has its own valuation record, which contains the valuation priceand other control data. Furthermore, partial stock for each valuation type is managedfor each storage location. If split valuation is active, you must specify which partialstock is affected by each goods movement (including those in non-SAP systems).



Exercise 14: Inventory Management


• Obtain an overview of the stock situation at your warehouse

• Display the various stock types in the stock overview

• Display the inventory management on a value-only basis for your stores

• Post spoiled or damaged articles from stock using a scrap posting

Business ExampleThe stock situation at your site has changed due to goods movements. You now wantto obtain an overview of the current situation.

Your company has decided to carry out inventory management at value-only levelfor certain merchandise categories. You want to display the inventory managementon a value-only basis for these merchandise categories.

To keep stocks at your store as up-to-date as possible, stocks of damaged or spoiledmerchandise are booked out as scrap.

Task 1: Stock OverviewYou want find out about the current situation in the stock overview.

1. Access the stock overview and display the stocks for the following data.


Article R1TA11##

Sales Organization Blank

Distribution channel Blank

Site R7##

Also select special stocks Select

Also select stock commitments Select

Now access the List display tab page and extend the display levels to includestorage location and special stock. In what stock types is there currently stockfor article R1TA11## in distribution center R7##?




2. Display the segregated list for your unrestricted-use stock of article R1TA11##at your distribution center R7##. How do you do this?

3. When is merchandise in stock in transit?

Task 2: Posting ScrapYou discover that your shop is storing spoiled merchandise and you want to “scrap” it.However, first you want to find out about the current stock situation.



Article R1TA15##



Site R5##



Now access the List display tab page and extend the display levels to includestorage location and special stock. How much unrestricted-use stock is therecurrently for article R1TA15## in store R5##?

2. To post scrap choose Goods Issue as the goods movement. Specify the followingdata on the initial screen:


Movement Type 551

Site R5##


10 EA of article R1TA15## are spoiled and you want to book them out. Postyour goods issue to cost center 1101.

Make your posting and then display the stock overview again. What changes doyou notice?

3. Now display the article document list. Here you can display posting transactionsfor specific selection criteria. Enter the following data:





Article R1TA15##

Site R5##


Movement Type Blank

Exit the list.



Solution 14: Inventory Management

Task 1: Stock OverviewYou want find out about the current situation in the stock overview.



Article R1TA11##



Site R7##



Now access the List display tab page and extend the display levels to includestorage location and special stock. In what stock types is there currently stockfor article R1TA11## in distribution center R7##?

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Inventory Management→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview

Make your settings as per the task. The stock for article R1TA11## indistribution center R7## is in stock types Unrestricted-use stock andQuality Inspection.

2. Display the segregated list for your unrestricted-use stock of article R1TA11##at your distribution center R7##. How do you do this?

a) Select the corresponding site row and choose Segregated List.

3. When is merchandise in stock in transit?

a) If the distribution center and store belong to the same company codeand you want to transfer merchandise between the two, this is a stocktransport between two sites. The goods issue posting creates what isreferred to as "stock in transit". The dataset can be used to monitor thestock that is currently in transit. Stock in transit is valuated but its useis not customer-specific. It is recorded on the level of the receiving site(without storage location).

Exit the segregated list.




Task 2: Posting ScrapYou discover that your shop is storing spoiled merchandise and you want to “scrap” it.However, first you want to find out about the current stock situation.



Article R1TA15##



Site R5##



Now access the List display tab page and extend the display levels to includestorage location and special stock. How much unrestricted-use stock is therecurrently for article R1TA15## in store R5##?

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Inventory Management→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview

Make your settings as per the task. The unrestricted-use stock for articleR1TA15## in store R5## is 38 EA.

Exit the stock overview.

2. To post scrap choose Goods Issue as the goods movement. Specify the followingdata on the initial screen:


Movement Type 551

Site R5##


10 EA of article R1TA15## are spoiled and you want to book them out. Postyour goods issue to cost center 1101.




Make your posting and then display the stock overview again. What changes doyou notice?

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Inventory Management→ Goods Movement→ Goods Issue

Make your settings as per the task. Post the goods issue. The system issuesthe following message:

Document 49000... Posted

b) Merchandise Logistics→ Inventory Management→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview

Make your settings as per the task. The unrestricted-use stock for articleR1TA15## in store R5## is now 28 EA.

Exit the stock overview.

3. Now display the article document list. Here you can display posting transactionsfor specific selection criteria. Enter the following data:


Article R1TA15##

Site R5##


Movement Type Blank

Exit the list.

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Inventory Management→ Environment→ ListDisplay→ Article Document for Article

Make your settings as per the task. Various goods movements are displayedfor article R1TA15## in store R5##.



Lesson Summary








Lesson: Transportation Management

Lesson OverviewSAP Event Management (SAP EM) is an application in the SAP SCM component ofthe SAP Supply Chain Management solution that has links to other components ofthe SAP business suite.





Business ExampleSAP Event Management allows you to monitor, measure, and evaluate businessprocesses, and to use control processes and notification for event control andinformation exchange and querying between the partners involved.

Figure 150: SAP Event Management


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Transportation Management

SAP Event Management (SAP EM) is an application in the SAP SCM component ofthe SAP Supply Chain Management solution that has links to other components ofthe SAP business suite, such as SAP ERP, SAP CRM, and SAP NetWeaver BI.

For example, you can use SAP Event Management (SAP EM) to monitor goodsmovements and query the status of the movement processes at all times. It allows youto coordinate planning and activities with your partners by means of cross-systeminformation exchange. You can define responses to critical situations. For example,SAP EM can send alarm messages as e-mails, or trigger processes in other applicationsystems.

In principle, SAP EM can be integrated with all SAP and non-SAP components.

SAP EM can link event messages to application data from the logistics network, andcan refresh and evaluate these messages. It automatically monitors the occurrenceof events and events that are not reported (such as goods issue, purchase orderforwarding, production end, and confirmations of receipt that are not reported).SAP EM can also transfer data automatically to a data warehouse system. The datawarehouse system uses key figures to generate performance data for execution andnotification quality. Supply Chain Event Management-relevant objects are checked inSAP EM as soon as they are saved in the application system. In critical situations,decision-makers can be sent notifications automatically so that they are informedwhere action is necessary (for example, when planning of the subsequent process stepschanges automatically due to a delay).



Lesson Summary







Test Your Knowledge

1. An outbound delivery


□ A can be generated from a stock transport order□ B can be generated from a purchase requisition

□ C can be created manually□ D forms the basis for a goods issue posting

2. The Outbound Delivery Monitor


□ A is used to monitor and execute the goods issue processes

□ B displays stock transport orders with their outbound deliveries□ C requires a shipping point

□ D indicates the current WM status

3. A packaging material


□ A is a special category of article

□ B is a special article type□ C is assigned to a concrete merchandise category

□ D has its own article master record

4. A goods issue posting


□ A can take place via the Outbound Delivery Monitor

□ B can be executed in collective processing□ C can be executed for each outbound delivery document

□ D always generates an entry in the purchase order history

5. 8. At goods issue, the stock type controls


□ A whether or not the merchandise is valuated□ B the storage location to which the merchandise is posted

□ C whether or not the merchandise is unrestricted-use stock□ D whether or not the merchandise is being returned



6. Goods receipt posting in SAP


□ A is controlled by a special movement type

□ B requires a storage location□ C can only take place at a distribution center

□ D is automatically posted to unrestricted-use stock



Answers

1. An outbound delivery

Answer: A, C, D

An outbound delivery can be generated from a stock transport order, can becreated manually, and forms the basis for a goods issue posting.

2. The Outbound Delivery Monitor

Answer: A, C

The Outbound Delivery Monitor is used to monitor and execute the goods issueprocesses. It requires a shipping point.

3. A packaging material

Answer: B

A packaging material is a special article type.

4. A goods issue posting

Answer: A, B, C

A goods issue posting only generates an entry in the purchase order history ifit references a stock transport order.

5. 8. At goods issue, the stock type controls

Answer: C

The stock type indicates how an article can be used.

6. Goods receipt posting in SAP

Answer: A, B

At goods receipt posting, a movement type controls what kind of goodsmovement is taking place and which subsequent processes are required.


Unit 6Multi-Channel Retailing

Unit OverviewIn which ways can store POS systems be connected to the SAP Retail system? Thisunit provides you with an overview of the most important forms of store connection.

The solution SAP Workforce Management Application can be used for central ordecentralized shift planning for the employees at your stores.

SAP Customer Relationship Management represents a sophisticated solution forhandling customer relationships. It supports all customer-oriented business areas fromMarketing through Sales and Service, as well as customer interaction channels such asthe Interaction Center and the Internet. The e-commerce applications cover Web-basedsales, effective marketing, and analyses of the system and customer behavior.


• List the store connection options

• Describe the SAP Workforce Management (WFM) solution and its components

• Name the advantages of shift planning

• Describe the SAP Internet functions

• Explain the interaction between the various SAP systems

Unit ContentsLesson: Store Connection . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .366Lesson: SAP Workforce Management . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .383Lesson: Customer Relationship. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .387


Unit 6: Multi-Channel Retailing TIRT10_2

Lesson: Store Connection

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides information about the most important POS system connectionsand their functions.

In order to sell merchandise in a store, you need either a POS system or an electronicPOS. With these two options, you can enter all important sales activities. If you alsowant to use logistics functions, you can implement SAP Retail Store.



Business ExampleYou want to introduce a new POS solution in your company, and are gatheringinformation about the connections and their functions. You are interested in a purePOS solution that is only for entering sales data, and you are interested in storeretailing solutions that you can use to execute logistics processes such as creatingpurchase orders, entering sales orders and triggering a store physical inventory.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Store Connection

Store Connection Options

Figure 151: Payment Processing at POS

As you can see in the figure above, a POS system helps post each sales activity in astore. It enters the article quantity, its EAN, and its sales price. In addition, it includesand forwards the payment method, the amount due, and customer returns.

Many POS solutions also enter the POS number, the cashier (as a user key, forexample), the date, and the time of the sale. All data entered is stored in a special log(TLog).



Figure 152: General Store Connection

The standard method of transferring data from any POS system to its retailing systeminvolves middleware and a wide area network (WAN). This ensures that the rightstore or stores are selected, that data is transferred in both directions, and that data isconverted into the appropriate formats.



Figure 153: Store Connection Options with SAP

You can implement cross-system business processes using Process Infrastructure(PI) in SAP NetWeaver, or SAP NetWeaver PI for short. You can combine systemsfrom different manufacturers (SAP and non-SAP) in different versions, implementedin different programming languages (Java, ABAP, etc.). Process Infrastructure isbased on an open architecture, mainly uses open standards (especially from the worldof XML and Java), and offers services that are indispensable in heterogeneous andcomplex system environments:



Figure 154: POS Outbound Processing

POS outbound processing supplies the POS servers in POS systems with current data(article data, EANs, prices, etc.). Data is normally transferred by means of a converterthat is responsible for two tasks: 1. Monitoring communication and 2. Convertingdata from the IDoc format to the format of the POS server interface.

You can use PI or partner software as the converter.

The POS server is supplied with data for the first time by an initialization (initial datatransfer). After this initial transfer, only changes (such as new articles or changedprices) are transferred.

POS outbound processing prepares the data required for each store at regular intervalsand sends it to the POS server. Data currently valid can be sent to the POS server, aswell as prices that will be valid in future, new articles, and so on. You can specifythe period for transferring changes and the future period for data to be valid in thefuture in the SAP Retail settings.



Figure 155: POS Inbound Processing

POS data can be transferred from the POS server to SAP Retail.

Sales entered at the POS in the store are transferred from the POS server to the POSinterface of the central SAP Retail component using a converter or SAP PI. POSinbound processing takes place in SAP Retail. The stock accounts at the stores areupdated and billing documents are created. The billing document is used to transferthe data to Financial Accounting. Payment data (credit cards, customer cards, cashsales, etc.) are also transferred to Accounting. The sales data from SAP Retail isevaluated in SAP NetWeaver BI. This is done by extracting the data from SAP Retail.



Figure 156: Store Connection Options (2/4)

In this case, the store uses a store retailing system in addition to a POS system.The system is used to enter purchase orders, post goods receipts, and make transferpostings. Date exchange between SAP Retail and the store retailing system takesplace using the SAP Retail POS Interface. The POS is usually supplied with datafrom the store retailing system.




The SAP Retail Store is a component of SAP Retail that has been developed speciallyfor use at stores.

Store employees can access user-friendly transactions using a web-based interface.The SAP Retail Store gives an overview of all the data that is important for the storeand supports the processes at the store. SAP Retail Store is fully integrated with thecentral SAP Retail system and, as a component of SAP Retail, does not have to besupplied with data from the POS interface. SAP Retail Store puts the store onlinewith central SAP Retail.

In addition to the SAP Retail Store, the stores also have a POS server and points ofsale (POS), at which they record sales. The POS server does not need to have anyadditional retail functions, for example for entering goods receipt. These postings aremade using SAP Retail Store.




SAP POS Data Management can be used to load the POS data into SAP BI, analyze it,and stage it for use in other applications.

The POS data is checked and corrected centrally (sales audit) before it is passed on tofurther central components (such as SAP Retail). A key advantage of SAP POS DM isthat the POS data is transferred with different degrees of granularity and at differenttimes. This means that POS data can be transferred as per receipts to SAP BI forevaluations and can be aggregated for transfer to SAP Retail.



Figure 159: SAP POS

SAP POS is a POS solution with a client-server architecture. It includes alltransactions required in a POS environment, such as entering prices and discounts,executing promotions, posting returns, etc. In addition, SAP POS offers a back-officeapplication for store management.

SAP POS is supported by a Microsoft operating system and its database. The maincomponents of SAP POS are: POS Xpress, POS Manager and POS Configurator. POSXpress and POS Manager are always in the stores; the configurator is the only one inthe head office. Implementation can have a variety of forms:

For small stores, a single server installation means that the entire application isinstalled on exactly one server. With a multiple-server installation, a store has aprimary server and a backup server.

SAP POS supports mobile register devices. You can use additional central applicationsto enhance this POS solution. This includes Stored Value Application (SVA), ExpressReturns (multi-store), and Fraud Watch (database with rules for detecting fraudpatterns), for example.



Figure 160: SAP Enterprise POS

SAP Enterprise POS is a multi-level application that is implemented in the headoffice. It involves a Java-based development that is supported by operating systemssuch as Linux and Microsoft. You can implement SAP Enterprise POS in differentways:

As a rule, the application server is in the head office. One option involves havingno additional servers in the stores. This means that the POS systems communicatedirectly with the central application server. In practice, however, you should determinewhether this ideal architecture requires an Enterprise POS solution or if certain generalconditions are given, a modification.

Using the central configuration component, you can configure POS transactions suchas general sales transactions, means of payment, analyses, etc. Due to the centralapplication of SAP Enterprise POS, you only have to perform maintenance and importupgrades on the central application server.



Figure 161: Architecture of the End-to-End Solution (From the POS Solution tothe Retailing System)

Process flow for transferring data from SAP POS to SAP Retail

In the first step, sales data from a POS system (such as SAP POS) is transferred toSAP PI (Process Infrastructure) or a flat file. Via mapping in PI, that sales data is thentransferred to SAP POS DM. There, the data is checked for errors and formatted, thenit can be forwarded to SAP BI (step 3).

A standard IDoc (WPUFIB, WPUTAB, WPUUMS) can be used to transfer the datato SAP Retail. From SAP Retail, you can extract invoice documents, purchasingdocuments and article documents to SAP BI (step 5). Step 6 shows outbounds fromSAP Retail to the POS systems by means of standard IDocs (WPUPLU, WBBDLD03,WPDWGR01).



Figure 162: SAP POS Components

SAP POS consists of SAP POS Base and SAP POS Services. SAP POS Base is thebasis product of SAP POS, and it consists of three components: POS Xpress (client),the POS server that POS Store Manager runs on, and POS Configurator.

SAP POS Xpress allows for the most important POS interactions: Scanning EANsand/or prices, entering discounts and markdowns, accepting and processing returns,etc.

POS Store Manager is a back-office application for store managers. It is used toprocess transactions in the POS environment, such as local reporting options and cashmanagement (cash removals from a POS). POS systems and POS Store Manager bothaccess the same server.

POS Configurator contains the business rules for the POS solution and defines howPOS systems should operate. It is connected to the store server by special middleware(SAP Transnet). It only exchanges configuration rules with the store server. The storeserver is the one that connects to the head office; it exchanges data in both directions(outbound and inbound).



Figure 163: SAP POS Data Management

SAP POS Data Management combines important information and applications toprovide users with an overview of the data from throughout the entire company. Thisallows you to make the best possible use of information resources, and the bestpossible return on investment in the area of IT.

SAP POS Data Management is a complete portal infrastructure with robust knowledgemanagement and collaboration functions. The predefined Business Content in theBusiness Information Warehouse component makes for quick implementation andreduces the cost of integrating your existing systems.

SAP POS Data Management allows you to integrate SAP solutions, non-SAPapplications, legacy systems, databases, unstructured documents, internal and externalInternet content, and collaboration tools quickly and effectively. The open standards,Web services, and close integration with other SAP NetWeaver BI components ensurethat heterogeneous systems from all the main IT providers are supported.

SAP POS Data Management provides your employees, partners, and customers withquick, secure, role-based access to the information and applications they require.Your employees are therefore able to solve problems more quickly and effectively,and at less cost.

The standalone solution SAP POS Data Management (without an ERP system,Enterprise Resource Planning) enables retailers to perform the entire POS dataupload, irrespective of whether they are using an ERP Retail system or a non-SAPRetail system.



The new architecture and technology ensure improved performance and bring clear,measurable advantages. This applies, in particular, for use with the SAP Retail system.

Flexible POS inbound data processing and distribution optimizes the entire POS dataflow, minimizing the hardware and storage capacity required.

POS Data Management allows retailers to use and manage POS data that was notpreviously included in their processes. For example, a wholesaler can upload POSdata from customers, a franchiser the POS data of a franchisee, or a consumerproducts manufacturer the POS data of customers to be included in his or her supplychain processes.

The solution is intended as a Basis System that simplifies integration with futurereporting and analysis scenarios. It is designed to stage a retailer's sales data for thestatistics database, based on SAP NetWeaver BI (Business Intelligence). It is alsopossible to make enhancements by including other reports in combined reportingviews in SAP NetWeaver BI. These can contain information that is required by Salesor Procurement, for example, stock data or cost/revenue data.

Figure 164: SAP POS DM – Basis and Architecture

POS Data Management is a point solution that can be used independently of an ERPsystem. SAP NetWeaver BI is the central platform for this solution and provides basictools and functions for data retention and analysis.



The main POS Data Management tasks are:

• High-performance upload of POS data into BI using an inbound interface

• Data analysis

• Staging of analysis results for other applications, using defined interfaces

The main task of the POS Inbound Processing Engine (PIPE) is to ensure and controlthe transfer of all POS inbound data from the Online Transaction Processing system(OLTP).



Lesson Summary




TIRT10_2 Lesson: SAP Workforce Management

Lesson: SAP Workforce Management

Lesson OverviewSAP Workforce Management (WFM) is a solution that allows decentralizedresource planning at stores. Planning can still be controlled centrally when usingthis application. The solution is based on Internet technology and comprises thefollowing components: Online Planning and Control, Forecasting, Employee Data,Shift Planning, and Evaluation and Analysis.




Business ExampleIn the future, your retailing company wants to carry out decentralized shift planningfor its employees that can also be controlled centrally. The aim is to optimize shiftplanning and simplify shift planners' work by means of effective analyses.

Figure 165: SAP Workforce Management – Process



SAP Workforce Management (WFM) is a solution that allows decentralizedresource planning at stores. Planning can still be controlled centrally when using thisapplication. The solution is based on Internet technology and includes the followingcomponents:

Central Planning and Control

You can map company requirements using flexible parameter settings. You can alsodefine templates, which make life easier for on-site shift planners.

Precise Forecasts & Workload Calculation

Forecasts are created for freely definable indicators (such as sales volume or customertraffic) based on history data for use in calculating the workload (requirements).These are used to determine the workload for the planning period using custom timestandards.

Employee Data

A large volume of employee data is taken into account in shift planning. This dataincludes availability and shift models, as well as qualifications and performance.

Optimized Shift Planning

A shift plan is created automatically for the employees at a store based on all this data.It is then easy for the user to continue processing this proposal, and to adjust it inresponse to unexpected events.

Evaluation and Analysis

A number of reports support management in analyzing results. These can be usedfor plan/actual comparisons, as well as to create statistics to analyze the efficiencyof automatic planning.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: SAP Workforce Management

Figure 166: SAP Workforce Management – Optimization

The aim of automated shift planning in retail is to make sure the right employee is inthe right place at the right time. Planning is based to a large extent on employee data,such as wage rates, availability, preferences, qualifications, work rules, and breakrules. Requirements are based on forecasts from history data and volume forecasts.Volume-independent variable and fixed activities at stores are also taken into account.Employee requirements to cover the workload are calculated in 15-minute intervalsbased on this data. Shift planning also takes account of legal requirements (such asworking time regulations), budgets, and other restrictions.



Lesson Summary





TIRT10_2 Lesson: Customer Relationship

Lesson: Customer Relationship

Lesson OverviewSAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) is an end-to-end applicationfor managing customer relationships. It supports all customer-oriented business areasfrom Marketing through Sales and Service, as well as customer interaction channelssuch as the Interaction Center and the Internet. SAP CRM is a component in theSAP Business Suite.

E-Commerce enables you to leverage the Internet as a profitable sales and interactionchannel, for both business partners and consumers. You can offer your customerspersonalized Internet processes and user-friendly self service applications. Thee-commerce applications cover Web-based sales and service, effective marketing, andanalyses of the system and customer behavior.




Business ExampleYour retail company is implementing an Internet solution for your customers andretailers.

You therefore need to familiarize yourself with the various interaction options inInternet Sales.



Figure 167: CRM Internet – Overview Diagram

SAP Internet Sales is CRM-based and is supplied with each CRM system. It accessesprocesses and functions in CRM. You can define the forms of interaction as you wishand there are no limits to the visual design. Performance-intensive functions such ascatalog browsing, pricing, and search processes are not run in the CRM back-endsystem (non-business-relevant processing takes place on the Web). One of the crucialadvantages of SAP CRM Internet Sales is that search and navigation processes, aswell as processes for opening multimedia files, are performed in the SAP CRMsystem instead of in the back office. This avoids bottlenecks and prevents overloadsin the back office.



Figure 168: Customer Contact Using the Internet

There are two ways of making contact with your Internet customers, depending onwhich scenario you use in Internet Sales:

B2C scenario (Business-to-Customer): Internet business with consumers

• Focus on anonymous market

• Focus on Internet users browsing in the product catalog and visiting your WebShop

• The company does not know the customer and they can register themselves as abusiness partner with the role of consumer for the company

• The business partner has already been entered as a customer or consumer

B2B scenario (Business-to-Business): Internet business between business partners

• Focus on commercial customer market

• The company knows the customer

• You create special offers and product catalog views for your B2B customers



Figure 169: Features of Internet Sales

Product Catalog:

Option of presenting your product offering on the Internet using multimediatechnology, which customers can use as a search tool

One-to-one marketing:

Option of making personalized product offers, setting up profiles to define targetgroups, and analyzing customers' purchasing behavior to address them moreeffectively using CRM Marketing

Price offers:

Pricing option, B2C scenario list price, B2B scenario customer-specific prices plusmarketing campaign with "special prices"

Shopping basket:

The customer can fill their shopping basket and then save it, simply by clicking onthe products they want

Registering a new customer:

Option for registering a new customer in B2C, registering contact persons in B2B,address changes using self service applications

Secure payment processing



Payment processing by invoice, cash on delivery, and credit card

Figure 170: Integration of SAP CRM Internet Sales

SAP Internet Sales supports companies that want to use the Internet as a strategicsales channel. Internet Sales can be used for 1:1 marketing, sales analyses, productpromotions, far-reaching personalization options, product configuration, user-friendlydata entry, price protection, effective design, interaction options, and so on.

Companies that implement Internet Sales usually also use the other processessupported by SAP Internet Sales.

The following are fully integrated with the processes in Customer RelationshipManagement:

• Other distribution channels

• Marketing functions

• Interaction Center

• Execution logic in the SAP System



Lesson Summary





Unit 7SAP Retail Store (SRS)

Unit OverviewThis unit introduces the SAP Retail Store. The SAP Retail Store is a componentof SAP Retail that has been developed specially for use at stores. Store employeescan access user-friendly transactions using a web-based interface. SAP Retail Storeis fully integrated with the central SAP Retail system and, as a component of SAPRetail, does not have to be supplied with data from the POS interface. SAP RetailStore (SRS) puts the store online with central SAP Retail.


• Configure SAP Retail to communicate with SAP Retail Store

• Describe the Internet Transaction Server (ITS)

• Describe the ITS-components delivered with SAP Retail

• Generate an assortment list and call the assortment list transaction in SAPRetail Store

• Configure the Customizing settings for the assortment list for SAP Retail Store

• Describe the store order function in the SAP Retail system

• Explain the store order transaction in SAP Retail Store

• Configure the Customizing settings for store orders for SAP Retail Store

• Describe purchase orders and their main use in SAP Retail Store

• Maintain Customizing settings for purchase orders for SAP Retail Store

• Describe Goods Receipt

• Customize Goods Receipt for SAP Retail Store

• Process Goods Receipts in the store

• Customize the Incoming Invoice area of SAP Retail Store

• Enter an incoming invoice using SAP Retail Store

• Customize stock transfer processes for SAP Retail Store


Unit 7: SAP Retail Store (SRS) TIRT10_2

• Customize other goods movements for SAP Retail Store

• Process stock transfers in SAP Retail Store

• Process other goods movements in SAP Retail Store

• Customize physical inventory processes for SAP Retail Store

• Use SAP Retail Store to perform a physical inventory count

• Understand how SAP Retail Store supports the stock revaluation process forvalue-only articles

• Customize sales orders for SAP Retail Store

• Create Customer master records

• Change sales prices in SAP Retail Store

• Process sales orders in SAP Retail Store

• Customize Cash Balancing for SAP Retail Store

• Enter Cash Results on SRS Cash Balancing

• Completely customize the expense invoice

• Enter invoices using SAP Retail Store

Unit ContentsLesson: SAP Retail Store – Introduction . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .398Lesson: Store Assortment List . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .408

Exercise 15: Customizing the Assortment List Profile and Initializing theStore. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .417

Lesson: Store Order . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .424Exercise 16: Store Order Customizing .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .439

Lesson: Purchase Orders. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .453Exercise 17: Purchase Order Customizing and Processing .. . . . . . . .. . . . .459

Lesson: Goods Receipt . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .465Exercise 18: Customize and Perform Goods Receipt . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .471

Lesson: Incoming Invoice. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .479Exercise 19: Customizing and Using the Incoming Invoice. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .487

Lesson: Goods Movements . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .494Exercise 20: Customizing Goods Movements. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .499

Lesson: Physical Inventory . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .512Exercise 21: Customizing for Physical Inventory: Head Office PlansInventory . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .527

Lesson: Stock Entry . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .535Lesson: Sales Processes .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .538

Exercise 22: Reference Customer . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .559Exercise 23: Sales Order Customizing .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .563Exercise 24: Online Sales Order . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .569


TIRT10_2 Unit 7: SAP Retail Store (SRS)

Lesson: Cash Balancing ... . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .579Lesson: Expense Invoice .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .588



Lesson: SAP Retail Store – Introduction

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the overall business scenario and the architecture of theSAP Retail Store.





Business ExampleThis unit introduces SAP Retail Store.The SAP Retail Store is a component of SAPRetail that has been developed specially for use at stores. Store employees can accessuser-friendly transactions using a web-based interface. SAP Retail Store is fullyintegrated with the central SAP Retail system and, as a component of SAP Retail, doesnot have to be supplied with data from the POS interface. SAP Retail Store (SRS)puts the store online with central SAP Retail.

SAP Retail Store (SRS)The figure below illustrates SAP Retail Store (SRS) from a bird's eye view to provideyou with a rough overview before we examine the details of SRS more closely.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: SAP Retail Store – Introduction

Figure 171: Business Example

Smart Speciality Wines has stores throughout the southwestern United States thatare supplied by two distribution centers.

The stores have fairly simple POS systems which limits how much data they exchangewith headquarters. The company has determined that SAP Retail and SAP RetailStore in their stores will provide the level of reporting and control necessary for themto expand into other regions.



Figure 172: Case Study and System Landscape for SAP Retail Store

Other members of your implementation team have configured the core businessprocesses in SAP Retail. You have installed SAP Web Application Server so that youcan use the internal Internet Transaction Server (ITS). However, you have to makeadditional Customizing settings and run tests before you can use SAP Retail Store.



Figure 173: Comprehensive Retail Store Functions

• Master data – Display assortments, store data, shelf layout, and display andmaintain articles, customers, vendors, and sales prices

• Sales – Create customers and sales orders. Request new labels for printing.Optionally, balance sales values with other financial transactions.

• Inventory Management – Enter goods receipts, stock transfers, and stock countsfor physical inventory documents.

• Purchasing – Enter store orders, purchase orders, and incoming invoices. Youcan also directly post to specific expense accounts.

• Information – Display/maintain promotions and allocation tables. Display stockoverview report, open goods receipts, and other standard reports.

Internet Transaction Server (ITS)The Internet Transaction Server (ITS) maps the SAP Retail screens to the HTMLpages that are displayed on the store's browser. This tool allows us to separate thebusiness logic in the SAP Retail system from the visual appearance for the end user.

Although the Web Application Server (WAS) and the Internet Transaction Server(ITS) are configured by colleagues in technical support, it is a good idea to have aconcept of how the interface is structured and how it facilitates the movement of data.



Figure 174: Architecture of Integrated ITS in SAP Web Application Server 6.40

From a technical view, the Internet Transaction Server (ITS) is integrated in the kernelof the SAP WAS 6.40 as an Internet Communication Framework (ICF) service, andwill be called over the Internet Communication manager (ICM). The ICM takesover the tasks of the Webserver/WGate, whereas the AGate or the actual runtime isimplemented as a HTTP request handler in the Internet Communication Framework(ICF) which executes the rendering of the HTML pages.

When a HTTP request is received by the ICM service, it determines whether theservice is implemented in the ABAP or JAVA stack of the WAS. If an ABAPapplication is requested, the ICM passes it on to the task handler which hands therequest to the ITS rendering engine.

The ITS rendering engine draws the templates and MIMEs from the database of SAPRetail. There is no need for external locally stored files any longer.



Figure 175: Standalone ITS vs. SAP WAS with Integrated ITS

The integrated ITS is implemented as an ICM service (Internet CommunicationManager) and supports both SAP GUI for HTML and Web Transactions (IACs/EWTs).SAP Retail Store is an IAC (Internet Application Component).

The integrated ITS can only access its own system. However, through the use of aliasURLs, it can access multiple clients on the same system.

Because the integrated ITS does not support ITS Flow Logic, WebRFC andWebReporting, the stand alone ITS continues to be supported.



Figure 176: How SAP Offers Service on the Web

The process begins with a user request on the browser, which calls the InternetCommunication Framework, which passes the request to the integrated ITS. The ITSloads the service file and passes it to ABAP processing. SAP Retail responds withthe appropriate output and the integrated ITS loads the required template, creates theHTML page, and forwards it to the ICM, which sends it to the browser.



Figure 177: Data Access with Integrated ITS

The SAP Retail Store templates are shipped with the system in package WOST. Thetemplates are “published” in the internal system.



Figure 178: Data Access with a Stand Alone ITS

The stand alone version of the ITS uses the same templates which must be publishedat Design time. Publishing in this case means copying the templates and related filesfrom the database to the file system of the AGate and WGate servers.

At runtime, the files from WGate and AGate servers are accessed directly.



Lesson Summary







Lesson: Store Assortment List

Lesson OverviewThe assortment list is an electronic list that contains all article data of a store,including their source of supply, promotions, layout specifications, and sales prices.For an article to appear in the assortment list of a store, it must be listed for the store.It can then be ordered and sold.




Business ExampleHead office creates the assortment list for the stores. It specifies how often anassortment list is created and transferred for the relevant stores and which data (fulland change version) the list contains.

The assortment list forms the basis for the Store Order and Assortment Listtransactions in SAP Retail Store.

Assortment List

Figure 179: Assortment List Contents


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Store Assortment List

The Assortment list contains selected data of the integrated article maintenance thatare relevant for the store or customer.

A source determination is made for the articles so that the store knows from where toorder each article. More than one source can be transmitted.

Optionally, transaction data (promotions, allocation tables, orders) are read as well.This data can support the store's merchandise planning functions.

Information about the layout of the store provides directions for article placement andplanning by visual inspection and also, where necessary, for generating shelf-edgelabels.

Figure 180: Assortment List Types: Customizing

The above example shows three assortment list typesf, allowing for different cycles tobe implemented for the three types of articles – food, hardware, and textiles.

Assortment list types allow you to process multiple versions from a single assortmentlist profile and also to distribute the workload.



Figure 181: POS Outbound: AL Version Management

Version management is recorded in the Assortment List Type entries in the system.This slide provides a detailed look at how version management works.

The cycle time definition provides the data for the system to calculate the validityperiod and the next generation dates for the assortment list.

In addition, you can define how many change versions to send before the systemsends a full version.

Figure 182: Assortment List Profile: Customizing (1/4)



Like all other profiles in the SAP Retail system, the assortment list profile allowsyou to enter data very efficiently.

It contains the parameters:

• Application mode: how will the assortment list be used.

1 – Save versions, do not send as message

2 – Send as message, do not save versions

3 – Send as message and save versions

4 – Do not save any version or send any message.

5 – “Light:” Do not save any version, send IDoc

• Mode 1 is recommended for Retail Store. However, if a downloaded messageto the stores is required, mode 3 can also be used. A saved version is onerequirement for SRS.

• Condition type group

– Group created to handle conditions used to prepare pricing for download.

• Reduction

– If you have created a reduced assortment list message, enter its name here;otherwise, the system uses the entire WBBDLD message.

Note: If you are using the HPR assortment list, you must enter themessage name in this field, either WBBDLD or your reducedmessage name.




Sorting Procedure controls how the Assortment List will be structured and displayedin SRS. The options are by:

1 – Department, layout area

2 – Layout area

3 – Vendor, vendor subrange, article number

4 – Vendor, merchandise category, article number

5 – Department, merchandise category, article number

6 – Merchandise category, article number

9 – Other (user exit)

If you order directly from vendors, it is important that you chose sorting procedure 3or 4, so that the vendor information is available to you.

Assortment List data line structure. This field identifies a dictionary structure that isused to create and interpret the assortment list data line. While the system is suppliedwith several Assortment List structures, for SRS it is recommended that you use:

WBBP_STORE

Number of lines is to designate the number of lines that fit on a single page of theassortment list. This allows one to create a table of contents for the assortment list.



Format for printing the assortment list. This is used in conjunction with the dataline structure.

OutputDevice is the name of your printer, if you want a printed assortment list.


Print Immed. – Select this field if you want the system to print the assortment listimmediately after creating it.

Flag changes – If you select this indicator, the system examines master data changeseven when creating a full version and marks the items. Selecting this field affectssystem performance when running a full version.

Sales usage – Selecting this field allows an article to remain in the assortment list afterthe end of the ordering period.

Recipient Determin. – Indicates that the system is to use the ALE distribution whereto send the list when creating IDocs. This has performance implications and shouldnot be used for SAP Retail Store.

No Direct Access in Pricing – Leave this field empty to benefit from a betterperformance which comes with direct access. Select, if full functionality is required.

Supply source cannot be read direct – Not used at this time




Vendor Info – Select this field to include Vendor information in the assortment list.When this field is not selected, there may be missing parameters in store orders.

Ext. Change Info – If you are including change information from an external source,select this field.

Ext. Layout modules – If you are using an external space management system foryour store layout, select this field.

Lyt module versions – If you are using external layout, this field becomes available.If you use several layout versions, select this for for the system to determine thecorrect version to be used.

Deletions for Listing – Primarily use for POS in the store. Not relevant to SAPRetail Store.



Figure 186: Assortment List Report Processes

Alternative Condition analysis report, if used, should be run before executing theChange message report.

Note: This report is not required if direct entry for the worklist is active.

The Initialization report should be run prior to going live. If you are using theAssortment List message to populate your store systems, each store must be initializedbefore change messages can be use.

If it is not necessary to send all data to the store system, you can execute the DummyInitialization report to configure the system for change pointer analysis.

The change message report for assortment list can be set to run synchronous with theassortment list cycle time, if all stores are, for example, on a 5 day cycle. If, however,stores are on different cycles you might set the report to run nightly. Then the reportchecks the cycle you set in version management and prepares the change messageonly for those stores that have cycles requiring one.

Direct request or manual reports are used for testing, replacing missing store data, orto change a particular price when you do not wish to run the entire change analysis.

Reorganization reports must be run on a regular basis to clear the change pointers.



Figure 187: Assortment Lists: Change message

Preparing to run the Assortment List message automatically on a regular basis,requires that you create variants of the report. You define your variants at POSOutbound, Assortment List Change message.

You may choose to ignore an assortment list type cycle and include all articlesassigned to the defined assortment user selection.

You must also choose to merge all other change versions with the last full versionafter the system generates this change version. This is required for SRS. Without amerged version, only a change version exists which SAP Retail Store ignores becauseit requires the full list of articles.

You also determine at this time, if the system will process the messages using multipleapplication servers, if you want to limit the number of processes running in parallel,and the name of a server group to perform the parallel processing.



Exercise 15: Customizing the AssortmentList Profile and Initializing the Store


• Customize the Assortment List profile

• Create an assortment list for your store

Business ExampleBefore you can purchase articles in SAP Retail Store, you have to create an assortmentlist for your store so that you can use it in SAP Retail Store.

Hint: The enque mechanism in the SAP Retail system is switched off forcustomizing courses.. You therefore have to check that your settings havebeen properly saved. Once you have saved your settings, check them usingthe Display function.

Task 1: Settings for the Assortment List TypesPrepare to create your assortment list profile.

1. First check the assortment list types that are used. The system specifies a leadtime of at least two days to ensure that the generated assortment lists can be sentto the stores. For the purposes of this exercise, make sure that the assortment listtypes that you use (A and W) do not have a lead time (= zero).

Task 2: Create Assortment List ProfileUse the copy function to create your assortment list profile. Enter ZL## as the nameof the new profile and “Assortment list profile ##” as the description. Only useassortment list types A and W for your site.

Hint: Remember to use an application mode that saves the version.

1. What path must you take to access the Assortment List profile?

2. How do you copy the existing profile RPAL?




3. Ensure that the parameters in your A and W assortment list types are correctlyconfigured for use in SAP Retail Store. The following settings are required:


AL Applic. Mode 1

Cond. Type Group TRNG

Reduction WBBDLD

Sorting Procedure 4

AL Structure WBBP_STORE

Vendor Info. Selected

Task 3: Assign an Assortment List ProfileOnce you have created your ZL## assortment list profile, assign it to site RP##.

1. Which settings do you require to assign your assortment list profile to the site?

2. (If this course is in German): You want your assortment list to be displayed inGerman. Choose the Address tab page and select German from the “Language”dropdown box.

3. You want to configure your system so that employees of store RP## can viewsales prices in the assortment list (when called from SAP Retail Store). WhichCustomizing settings do you require?

Task 4: Generate an Assortment ListYour site belongs to distribution chain RP10/R2. Generate your assortment list foryour RP## site and the assortment list types A and W.

1. Initialize your assortment list. Then check whether your assortment list has beengenerated. What are the sort criteria used to group articles in your assortment list?




Task 5: Call the Assortment List from SAP Retail StoreLog onto your client over the Internet. Enter the following URL:

http://<system>tdc00.wdf.sap.corp:55380/sap/bc/gui/sap/its/srs-<client number>

Enter your user name and password, select your store (RP##), and log on.

1. How do you access your assortment list? Which merchandise categories aredisplayed in your assortment list?



Solution 15: Customizing the AssortmentList Profile and Initializing the Store

Task 1: Settings for the Assortment List TypesPrepare to create your assortment list profile.

1. First check the assortment list types that are used. The system specifies a leadtime of at least two days to ensure that the generated assortment lists can be sentto the stores. For the purposes of this exercise, make sure that the assortment listtypes that you use (A and W) do not have a lead time (= zero).

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ Assortment→ Assortment List→ AssortmentList Types

Check, and if necessary change the lead times as specified in the task.

Task 2: Create Assortment List ProfileUse the copy function to create your assortment list profile. Enter ZL## as the nameof the new profile and “Assortment list profile ##” as the description. Only useassortment list types A and W for your site.

Hint: Remember to use an application mode that saves the version.

1. What path must you take to access the Assortment List profile?

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ Assortment→ Assortment List→ MaintainProfile for Assortment Lists

2. How do you copy the existing profile RPAL?

a) First select the profile RPAL (Speciality Ast Lst). Choose Copy As...and replace the number of the reference profile with ZL##. Enter thedescription as specified in the task. Choose Enter and then Copy All.Confirm the system message that appears.

Select your ZL## profile and choose Maintain Assortment List ProfileParameters from the dialog structure on the left. Only the parameters Aand W should be displayed. Delete any other entries.

3. Ensure that the parameters in your A and W assortment list types are correctlyconfigured for use in SAP Retail Store. The following settings are required:





AL Applic. Mode 1

Cond. Type Group TRNG

Reduction WBBDLD

Sorting Procedure 4

AL Structure WBBP_STORE

Vendor Info. Selected

a) Select the assortment list types A and W and choose Details. Make yoursettings as specified in the task..

Task 3: Assign an Assortment List ProfileOnce you have created your ZL## assortment list profile, assign it to site RP##.

1. Which settings do you require to assign your assortment list profile to the site?

a) Master Data→ Site Data→ Site→ Change

Enter the name of your site (RP##), choose the POS tab page, and enteryour ZL## profile in the Assort. List Profile field.

2. (If this course is in German): You want your assortment list to be displayed inGerman. Choose the Address tab page and select German from the “Language”dropdown box.

a) Configure your settings as specified in the task.

3. You want to configure your system so that employees of store RP## can viewsales prices in the assortment list (when called from SAP Retail Store). WhichCustomizing settings do you require?

Answer: A condition type group which contains the conditions for identifyingsales prices and taxes must be attached to your assortment list profile. To checkthat the conditions are correct, use the following path:

IMG: Sales and Distribution→ POS Interface→ Outbound→ Maintain POSCondition Type Group

Check POS condition type group TRNG. The condition types summarized inthis group contain the required data. The conditions types are: VKP0 = salesprice, VKA0 = promotion sales price, and UTXJ = tax jurisdiction code.




Task 4: Generate an Assortment ListYour site belongs to distribution chain RP10/R2. Generate your assortment list foryour RP## site and the assortment list types A and W.

1. Initialize your assortment list. Then check whether your assortment list has beengenerated. What are the sort criteria used to group articles in your assortment list?

a) Master Data → Assortment/Listing→ Assortment List→ Generate→Initialization

Initialize your assortment list for the following parameters:


Sales Organization RP10

Distribution Channel R2

Customer No. – Site RP##

Assortment List Type A and W

Then choose Execute.

A screen is displayed when the initialization is complete. The screenindicates how many data groups have been generated and the numberof articles each contains.

b) Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment List→ Display

For distribution chain RP10/R2 and your RP## customer number, displaythe assortment list generated for assortment list types A and W.

c) The articles are displayed by vendor and merchandise category.

Task 5: Call the Assortment List from SAP Retail StoreLog onto your client over the Internet. Enter the following URL:

http://<system>tdc00.wdf.sap.corp:55380/sap/bc/gui/sap/its/srs-<client number>

Enter your user name and password, select your store (RP##), and log on.

1. How do you access your assortment list? Which merchandise categories aredisplayed in your assortment list?

Answer: Master Data→ Assortment List

There are two assortment lists: A and W. They are called Accessories-TRNG andWine-TRNG. Choose Display Groups. In each case, the three vendors of bothmerchandise categories Accessories-TRNG and Wine-TRNG are displayed.



Lesson Summary






Lesson: Store Order

Lesson OverviewThis lesson describes the Store Order function in the SAP Retail system. Data (suchas article data or quantities with units of measure and their supply sources) from othersystems is used to create follow-on documents (for example, an outbound delivery orpurchase order) using the POS inbound.

SAP Retail Store also contains the Store Order transaction, which transfers data to theStore Order function in the SAP Retail system, and here too, follow-on documents arecreated. The term Store Order is therefore used twice.

This lesson explains both the basic settings for the Store Order function in the SAPRetail system and the Store Order transaction for SAP Retail Store.





Business ExampleEmployees in a store use the Store Order transaction in SAP Retail Store to ordergoods. They specify the articles and the quantities to be ordered. This data is thentransferred to SAP Retail where the Store Order function is called. Depending on yoursettings, different follow-on documents are created in SAP Retail.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Store Order

Store Orders

Figure 188: Store Order Overview

The Store Order transaction in SAP Retail Store is used by stores to register ademand in the SAP Retail System. The central SAP Retail system triggers the actualprocurement using the system’s purchasing and shipping functionality.

Upon receipt of store order data, SAP Retail checks for missing details that arerequired for further processing, but were not provided by the store (for example,source of supply determination, rounding profile, and so on). It adds these details,using information stored in the system. The individual order items are also optimized.The specified order quantity is adjusted to meet the minimum order quantity or inaccordance with a defined rounding profile for logistical units of measure. If theaugmented data is sufficient, they are used to create a document that triggers theprocurement of the articles. Depending on the Customizing settings for SAP Retail,the document can be:

• A purchase requisition (PReq)

• A purchase order (PO)

• An outbound delivery



The Store Order transaction contains two pushbuttons for posting: Change DefaultQuantities and Post Order List. When order quantities are updated with ChangeDefault Quantities, purchase requisitions are generated or existing ones are changed.When order quantities are updated with Post Order List, Customizing for the storeorder function is called and the corresponding follow-on documents are created. Ifonly purchase requisitions and not purchase orders are to be created using SAP RetailStore, it is advisable to work with Change Default Quantities and not use the storeorder function.

Figure 189: Store Order: Basic Settings – Customizing (1/2)

Dialog Control

You set up how you want store order information to display for your end users inthis customizing function.

Max. Number of Displayable Rows – If the number set here is larger than ascreen-full, paging is available.

Warning When Leaving the Dialog – A notice displays that unsaved data will be lostupon pressing the “Back” button. Options are to have No warning; a warning everytime upon leaving the screen; and, a warning only if there is data in the order list.

Display Docs After Posting – When set, the follow-on documents that were created,are displayed. If not set, only those items that could not be posted are displayed.



Expand Mdse Catgries Automatically – If set, the navigation tree is displayedexpanded to the merchandise category level. This takes longer to display. If notset, the navigation tree is expanded only to the Assortment List Type, from whichmerchandise categories can be selected.

Display Vendor Number – If set, the vendor number is displayed beside their nameon the SAP Retail Store Order.

Display EAN/UPC – Options are:

• Do not display any EAN/UPC

• Display all

• Only display those from the Assortment List

• Display All EAN/UPC and their Units of Measure

Maximum Number of Vendors in Dropdown Box – Set this field to limit the list ofvendors

Display Articles that Cannot be Ordered – Select to display only those articles thatcan be ordered

Article Can Also be Planned Individually – Set this field to activate a push button onthe Store Order screen that allows the user to perform detailed RP without reducingperformance in the overview.



Figure 190: Store Order: Basic Settings – Customizing (2/2)

Data Formatting

Determine Current Stocks and Receipts – When set, the system checks the inventorytables and displays the current levels on the on-line order form. This is performanceintensive and should only be used when there is a limited merchandise list.

Display stock – You can choose to display in the base unit of measure or the orderunit of measure.

Determine and Display Default Quantities – If set, displays the suggested quantitiesgenerated by a replenishment run. Quantities can be increased or decreased in thestore.

Select Source of Quantity Proposals – You can select to have the quantity proposalsdefault from the purchase requisitions assigned to the store; or from replenishmentrequirements, which is better for performance.

Quantity Proposals Enable Mass Processing – If set, an additional pushbutton isdisplayed in the store order purchasing list that can be used to load all the defaultquantities that are assigned to the store.

Caution: Use caution with this indicator, if a store must process a very largenumber of default quantities (a few thousand), the users should processmaterials in groups for performance purposes.



Do Not Buffer Determined RP Data – On/Off. If set, the data is not buffered.

Asynchronous Posting – If set, follow-on documents and posting are completed aftersaving the store order. If not, documents and posting is completed coincident tosaving the store order.

Prefill Input Fields with Rounded Quantities – If set, the values in the quantity fieldsare rounded in Store order.

Note: Do not use this rounding if “load-building” rounding is performedat a later stage.

Extras

PDC Connection Type – Defines how PDC units communicate with the SAP Retailsystem. The options supported are:

No PDC Connection

PDC Connection by Web Browser

PDC Connection by RFC Interfaces

PDC Connection using Web Browser//Java applet

Maximum No. of Allowed Schedule Lines – Indicates the maximum number ofdelivery times for each PO item.

Reorganization Period for Follow-On Documents allows you to identify a period indays to hold store orders and their references to follow-on documents before they aredeleted.



Store-Order Function Control

Figure 191: Store Order: Assigning a Follow-on Document Type

As the slide shows, SAP Retail searches the store order IDoc from the most specific tothe least specific to determine which type of document to create.

The checks are performed in the following order:

• Check if a document type was transferred via a user exit

• Check if a document type was sent in the store order IDoc

• Check if a document type was maintained in the POS inbound profile

– Defined at the store/ MC level, dependent on the source of supply (“DefaultDoc. Category External Store Order” field)

– Defined at the store/ MC, not dependent on the source of supply (fieldDocument type default)

– Defined at the store level, dependent on the source of supply (Defaultdoc. category external store order)

– Defined at the store, not dependent on the source of supply (field Documenttype default)

• Document type = 3 (PO) if everything else fails



Figure 192: Store Order: Customizing (1/5)

Store order processing must be customized in POS inbound profile Store Ordercontrols. These can be defined at store level, or at store/merchandise category (MC)level.

The processing of store order data in SAP Retail can be customized as follows:

• Default follow-on document to use, if no other directions are given:

1 - Create purchase requisition

2 - Create purchase order (or PReq if an error occurs)

3 – Create purchase order

4 – Generate delivery

7 – Create sales order

8 – Create purchase order copy; do not send messages to external vendors

A - Create warehouse order for supplying distribution center if stock isavailable; otherwise, create direct delivery order for regular vendor

B – Create a warehouse order for the distribution center if the orderquantity does not exceed the maximum issue quantity of the distributioncenter; otherwise, create a third-party order for the regular vendor

C – Create a warehouse order for the distribution center if stock isavailable; otherwise, for another distribution center; otherwise, create athird-party order for regular vendor




Substitute document types for (standard) NB and UB

• If the standard document types for purchase orders (that is, NB and UB) havebeen renamed in (MM) Customizing of the SAP Retail system, their new namesmust be specified here.

Note: It is NOT recommended to rename NB and UB!

Grouping of order items (flag only used at store level)

• If activated, store order items containing the same article, receiving store, etc. arecombined to a single item in the follow-on document created from the store order.




Scope of message log (flag only used at store level)

Depending on the selection made in this field, not only errors, but also warnings andnotes are logged when store order IDocs are processed.

Scope of store order confirmation (flag only used at store level)

This flag is only relevant for confirmation of store order. Depending on the valueentered here, the sender of the store order receives a confirmation of:

• ALL data

• OR changes only

• OR all store order items, including variances

Neither of these fields is relevant for Retail Store.

Using workflows – You can select to use the older version of workflow, the newworkflow exception processing, or no workflow processing.

Workflow template – If you select to use the new workflow option, enter the templatein this field.




Further processing controls

• The settings in this field group determine:

• How missing units of measure are handled

• Whether, or to what extent, the automatic source of supply determination shouldalso check for outline agreements (performance critical!),

• The selection pair for “Default doc. cat. ... replen.” are relevant for store orderstriggered by replenishment to determine the document category of the follow-ondocument to be generated.

• “Default document category ... store orders” are relevant for non-replenishmentbased store order processing. Depending on the source of supply (either providedexplicitly, or determined automatically), the external or the internal store orderdocument type is used to generate the follow-on document.

• These controls take precedence over the Default doc category above, and howthey are configured is extremely important depending upon the Store Orderscenario that you are implementing.

The checkboxes that appear in the Control screen group cannot be used for theStore Order transaction in SAP Retail Store. They apply only to the POS inboundprofile for store orders.



Create a Store Order Online

Figure 196: Creating a Store Order: Simple Scenario (1)

The simple scenario shown on this and the following page is only suitable for a storewith a small assortment, that make frequent small on line orders.

Creating such a simple store order, is a matter of selecting the assortment list, selectingthe merchandise category and identifying the quantity of each item that you wantto order.

Through the store order control profile and the logistics screen for the article, thesystem determines whether to produce a stock transport order to the DC or a purchaseorder to a vendor.

Two step ordering is a way of varying the simple scenario:

• A clerk or a vendor can be assigned to an authorization object that allows themto enter quantity proposals. These proposals can then be used to create purchaserequisitions but a second step is required in this case. This must be carried out byan employee who is authorized to create the corresponding follow-on documentsand accept the proposed quantity or change it before further processing.



Figure 197: Creating a Store Order: Simple Scenario (2)

Another variation of the simple scenario for smaller stores with small AssortmentLists, is:

• If you plan your inventory visually and use a Hand Held Terminal to recordyour plan, you can upload the file, process it, and save the information as aStore Order.



Figure 198: Creating a Store Order:Replenishment

Larger stores with extensive Assortment Lists that make large Store Orders benefitfrom a nightly replenishment run. In the replenishment run, SAP Retail generatespurchase requisitions that display in the store as quantity proposals.

Purchase requisitions do not reach the external purchase order or stock transport orderstage until the local merchandise manager changes or accepts the proposal and thereport is run.



Exercise 16: Store Order Customizing


• Make the Customizing settings for the Store Order transaction

• Order articles for your store in SAP Retail Store

Business ExampleYou want to use the Store Order transaction in SAP Retail Store. You thereforefamiliarize yourself with the necessary Customizing settings. Using a store as anexample, you call the Store Order transaction and check the settings.

Task 1: Basic Settings for the Store OrderYou want to configure your system so that your RP## store can use the Store Orderfunction in SAP Retail Store and order articles.

1. Which path do you choose to maintain the Customizing settings for the storeorder?

2. Create a new Customizing schema ZS## with the description Group ZS##.Configure the customizing schema so that the current stock and the openpurchase order quantity are displayed after having completed the store orderfunction. Enter the following:


Maximum Number of DisplayableRows

10

Warning When Leaving the Dialog 2 – Warning Only When There Is Datain the Purchase Order List

Display Docs after Posting X

Expand Mdse Catgries Automatically No selection

Determine Current Stocks andReceipts

X

Determine and Display DefaultQuantities

X

Do Not Buffer Determined RP Data No selection





Asynchronous Posting No selection

PDC Connection Type No PDC Connection

Maximum No. of Allowed ScheduleLines

No selection

Save your entries.

3. If you change the displayed rows to 10, will you always have 10 rows showingon the screen?

Task 2: Assign Customizing SchemaYou now want to assign your new customizing schema to your RP## store.

1. Choose Assignment of Customizing Schemas to Sites and assign your ZS##Customizing schema to your RP## store.

Task 3: POS Inbound Profile for Store OrdersYou also have to configure and assign the POS inbound profile for store orders sothat the connection between the SAP Retail system and SAP Retail Store functionscorrectly.

1. Create a POS inbound profile ZI## with the description “Store order ##”.

2. Now configure the control of your POS inbound profile ZI##. Use the TRNGprofile as a copy template and copy it to your new ZI## profile.

3. Assign the profile to your RP## store.

4. You also decide that only the store order documents that were created in thelast two weeks are to be displayed in SAP Retail Store (store order follow-ondocuments). Enter 15 days as the past period.

Hint: Before you can make this setting, you must have already createdyour POS inbound profile.




Task 4: Execute a Store Order in SAP Retail StoreYou are planning to hold a white wine tasting session in your RP## store in a fewweeks. At the same time, there is to be a promotion of some of these white wines. Youdecide to stock up on bottles of white wine using an additional purchase order.

1. You are an employee in store RP## and you want to order 5 cases each of article317001 (Andretti Chardonnay) and 317073 (Chapoutier Granits St. Jose). Howdo you proceed?




2. Which possible settings regarding the vendor are available when you createthe order?

3. How can you determine whether an article is shipped from a distribution centeror from a vendor?

4. In Customizing for the store order, you have specified that the current stocksand receipts of an article are to be displayed. Check these settings when youcreate your order. How do proceed?

Task 5: Store Order Control (Optional)If your RP## store orders goods via the store order function, they can be deliveredto the store either from the distribution center or from the vendor. This is controlledusing the Source of Supply Key.

In Customizing for the store order, you specify whether an outbound delivery is to becreated directly or whether a stock transport order is to be created first when goodsare moved from the distribution center to the store.

1. Branch to the article master of article 317073 and choose Logistics: Store foryour RP## store.

Which source of supply key is entered for this article and what significancedoes this setting have?





Which source of supply key is entered for this article and what significance doesthis setting have? Change the source of supply key from blank to 4.

3. Now configure the control of your POS inbound profile ZI## again. You want astock transport order to be created first when goods are procured internally usingthe Store Order function. Change your profile accordingly. How do you proceed?

4. Now branch to SAP Retail Store for your RP## store and call the Store Orderfunction from the menu again. Order article 317001 (Andretti Chardonnay)and 317073 (Chapoutier Granits St. Jose) again. Post your order list. What doyou notice?

Task 6: Store Order with Replenishment (Optional)Replenishment planning has been set up for your RP## store. The replenishmentrun is triggered at head office each night. During the run, purchase requisitions arecreated. These are displayed as default quantities in the Store Order function in SAPRetail Store and can be used by store employees as a guideline.

1. Branch to the article master of article 317003 (Andretti Sauvignon Blanc) andchoose Logistics: Store for your RP## store.

Which replenishment type is entered for this article and what significancedoes this setting have? Which additional settings are useful for successfulreplenishment planning?

2. You now want to start replenishment planning for this article. In the SAP Retailsystem, branch to Sales and start replenishment planning for your RP## storeand article 317003.

Which replenishment requirement quantity is calculated? Double-click thisquantity and display the detailed information. What is your current stock ofarticle 317003 in your RP## store?

3. Double-click the purchase requisition and determine the following information:


Delivery Date

Mdse Catgry

Fixed Vendor

Quantity/Unit




4. Back in SAP Retail Store, in the Purchasing area, branch to the Store Orderfunction, expand the Wine assortment, and display all of the articles. What doyou notice?

Do not place an order and leave SAP Retail Store.



Solution 16: Store Order Customizing

Task 1: Basic Settings for the Store OrderYou want to configure your system so that your RP## store can use the Store Orderfunction in SAP Retail Store and order articles.

1. Which path do you choose to maintain the Customizing settings for the storeorder?

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Store Order→ BasicSettings for the Store Order→ Define Customizing Schemas with BasicSettings

2. Create a new Customizing schema ZS## with the description Group ZS##.Configure the customizing schema so that the current stock and the openpurchase order quantity are displayed after having completed the store orderfunction. Enter the following:


Maximum Number of DisplayableRows

10

Warning When Leaving the Dialog 2 – Warning Only When There Is Datain the Purchase Order List

Display Docs after Posting X

Expand Mdse Catgries Automatically No selection

Determine Current Stocks andReceipts

X

Determine and Display DefaultQuantities

X

Do Not Buffer Determined RP Data No selection

Asynchronous Posting No selection

PDC Connection Type No PDC Connection

Maximum No. of Allowed ScheduleLines

No selection

Save your entries.

a) Make the settings as specified in the task.




3. If you change the displayed rows to 10, will you always have 10 rows showingon the screen?

Answer: Only the rows that fit on the screen are displayed. If there are 10rows but only 7 fit on the screen, you will have to use the scroll bar to see allof the available rows.

Task 2: Assign Customizing SchemaYou now want to assign your new customizing schema to your RP## store.

1. Choose Assignment of Customizing Schemas to Sites and assign your ZS##Customizing schema to your RP## store.


Task 3: POS Inbound Profile for Store OrdersYou also have to configure and assign the POS inbound profile for store orders sothat the connection between the SAP Retail system and SAP Retail Store functionscorrectly.

1. Create a POS inbound profile ZI## with the description “Store order ##”.

a) IMG: Sales and Distribution→ POS Interface→ Inbound→ MaintainProfile for POS Inbound

Choose New Entries and add your ZI## profile.

2. Now configure the control of your POS inbound profile ZI##. Use the TRNGprofile as a copy template and copy it to your new ZI## profile.

a) IMG: Sales and Distribution→ POS Interface→ Inbound→ Store OrderControl

Select the TRNG profile, choose Copy As..., and replace the TRNG keywith ZI##.

3. Assign the profile to your RP## store.

a) Master Data→ Site Data→ Site→ Change

Enter your RP## store number, choose the POS tab page, and enter thename of your POS inbound profile in the relevant field. Save your data.




4. You also decide that only the store order documents that were created in thelast two weeks are to be displayed in SAP Retail Store (store order follow-ondocuments). Enter 15 days as the past period.

Hint: Before you can make this setting, you must have already createdyour POS inbound profile.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store → Store Order →Reorganization Period for Follow-On Documents

Make the settings as specified in the task.

Task 4: Execute a Store Order in SAP Retail StoreYou are planning to hold a white wine tasting session in your RP## store in a fewweeks. At the same time, there is to be a promotion of some of these white wines. Youdecide to stock up on bottles of white wine using an additional purchase order.

1. You are an employee in store RP## and you want to order 5 cases each of article317001 (Andretti Chardonnay) and 317073 (Chapoutier Granits St. Jose). Howdo you proceed?

a) From the overview, choose Purchasing→ Store Order and expand theassortment Wine-TRNG (Wine). Make the settings as specified in the task.

Hint: You can sort the data in the Article column in ascending ordescending order.

2. Which possible settings regarding the vendor are available when you createthe order?

Answer: In the Store Order function, you can request that the vendor isdetermined automatically by the system or you can specify the vendor yourself.In the latter case, only those articles that you can order from the vendor aredisplayed.

If you set the Display Vendor Number in store order Customizing, the vendornumber is also displayed in the Store Order function.




3. How can you determine whether an article is shipped from a distribution centeror from a vendor?

Answer: Once you have posted the order list, you can see which documentshave been created. The order list contains purchase orders only (vendor ordersand stock transport orders). If outbound deliveries have been created, you candisplay them under Store Order Follow-On Documents.

Note the numbers of your purchase order. An outbound delivery is created forarticle 317073 (Chapoutier Granits St. Jose) and the supplying distributioncenter is RP90. A standard purchase order is created for article 317001 (AndrettiChardonnay) and the external vendor is International Wine Distributor.

4. In Customizing for the store order, you have specified that the current stocksand receipts of an article are to be displayed. Check these settings when youcreate your order. How do proceed?

Answer: Choose New Order List and branch to the Wine-TRNG assortment. Thestock data for the article is displayed in the Stock column. You can compare thiswith the stock overview (Information→ Stock Overview) in SAP Retail Storeor with the stock overview in SAP Retail (Merchandise Logistics→ InventoryManagement→ Environment→ Stock).

Task 5: Store Order Control (Optional)If your RP## store orders goods via the store order function, they can be deliveredto the store either from the distribution center or from the vendor. This is controlledusing the Source of Supply Key.

In Customizing for the store order, you specify whether an outbound delivery is to becreated directly or whether a stock transport order is to be created first when goodsare moved from the distribution center to the store.


Which source of supply key is entered for this article and what significancedoes this setting have?

a) Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Change

Make the settings as specified in the task. The source of supply key is 4(Stock Transfer Before Standard). This means that the article is procuredinternally and so the goods are delivered to the store from the distributioncenter. The setting specifies that an outbound delivery is created whenthe Store Order function is used.





Which source of supply key is entered for this article and what significance doesthis setting have? Change the source of supply key from blank to 4.


Make the settings as specified in the task. The source of supply key isblank (Standard). This means that the article is procured externally and sothe goods are delivered to the store from the vendor. Configure the settingsas specified in the task and save your entries.

Hint: The system issues an information message:

Change in source of supply; logistics data will be adapted topurch. data.

3. Now configure the control of your POS inbound profile ZI## again. You want astock transport order to be created first when goods are procured internally usingthe Store Order function. Change your profile accordingly. How do you proceed?

a) IMG: Sales and Distribution→ POS Interface→ Inbound→ Store OrderControl.

Select your ZI## profile, choose Details, and replace 4 (Delivery) in theDefault Doc. Category Internal Store Order with 3 (Purchase Order).Save your settings.

4. Now branch to SAP Retail Store for your RP## store and call the Store Orderfunction from the menu again. Order article 317001 (Andretti Chardonnay)and 317073 (Chapoutier Granits St. Jose) again. Post your order list. What doyou notice?

a) From the Purchasing area of the overview, choose Store Order and expandthe Wine-TRNG assortment. Configure the settings as specified in the taskand post your order list. This time, you receive the same order number forboth articles. If you double-click this number, the purchasing documentitems are displayed. The system has generated a UB (stock transport order)for both articles. The supplying site (distribution center) is RP90.




Task 6: Store Order with Replenishment (Optional)Replenishment planning has been set up for your RP## store. The replenishmentrun is triggered at head office each night. During the run, purchase requisitions arecreated. These are displayed as default quantities in the Store Order function in SAPRetail Store and can be used by store employees as a guideline.

1. Branch to the article master of article 317003 (Andretti Sauvignon Blanc) andchoose Logistics: Store for your RP## store.

Which replenishment type is entered for this article and what significancedoes this setting have? Which additional settings are useful for successfulreplenishment planning?


Article 317003 has the replenishment type RP (Replenishment Planning).This means that the article is part of replenishment planning for the RP##store. Furthermore, the lot size is set to EX (Lot-for-Lot Order Quantity).The target stock is 84 pieces. The source of supply key is 1 (standard) andthe planned delivery time is 1 day.

2. You now want to start replenishment planning for this article. In the SAP Retailsystem, branch to Sales and start replenishment planning for your RP## storeand article 317003.

Which replenishment requirement quantity is calculated? Double-click thisquantity and display the detailed information. What is your current stock ofarticle 317003 in your RP## store?

a) Sales→ Replenishment→ Replenishments Planning→ Execute

Execute replenishment planning as specified in the task. The replenishmentrequirement quantity is 36 EA. The current stock of article 317003 in yourstore is 48 EA. You can also branch to the stock overview directly from thedetailed information. In a second step, generate the follow-on documentsand branch to the replenishment monitor. A purchase requisition has beencreated for your RP## store.

3. Double-click the purchase requisition and determine the following information:





Delivery Date

Mdse Catgry

Fixed Vendor

Quantity/Unit

a)


Delivery Date Tomorrow

Mdse Catgry RS11240

Fixed Vendor RPV1200

Quantity/Unit 36 EA

4. Back in SAP Retail Store, in the Purchasing area, branch to the Store Orderfunction, expand the Wine assortment, and display all of the articles. What doyou notice?

Do not place an order and leave SAP Retail Store.

a) Log onto SAP Retail Store as specified in the task and choose

Purchasing→ Store Order, Wine-TRNG→ Wine. The system displays thearticles in the merchandise category Wine. Article 317003 has a defaultquantity of 3 CSE because replenishment has been planned for this article,the result of which is 36 EA or 3 CSE. Do not place an order and leaveSAP Retail Store.



Lesson Summary






TIRT10_2 Lesson: Purchase Orders

Lesson: Purchase Orders

Lesson OverviewAnother purchasing process is the Purchase Order. This lesson examines howpurchase orders are configured for automatic processing in SAP Retail Store, and thedifference between purchase orders and store orders.




Business ExampleFrom time to time, goods must be returned to vendors directly from the store. Also,there are times when a store needs additional stock more quickly than normal meanscan deliver it. In all of these cases, the SRS Purchase Order can be used.

Purchase Orders

Figure 199: Purchase Orders: Overview



The Purchase Order is used by stores to request merchandise from other stores (stocktransfers) and to return merchandise to external suppliers with an additional dialog tocreate the goods issue.

Smaller independent stores could also use this function to order small numbers ofspecific items from specific suppliers.

Figure 200: Purchase Order: Basic Settings (1/2)

The basic settings for creating orders control the order entry process and saving thepurchase orders in SRS.

The first field group on the screen controls the purchasing document. Here, youspecify the item category of the stock transfer, the default purchasing group, andthe text ID for the items.



Figure 201: Purchase Order: Basic Settings (2/2)

The next group identifies the functional scope:

Article No. ID – The type of article number that is to be used by default on the screen:your own, the vendor's, or the EAN/UPC code.

No. of Items in Entry – The number of rows that are to be displayed so that as manyrows as possible appear on the screen without the need for a scroll bar. If you needmore rows when creating a purchase order, you can switch between blocks usingscroll keys.

Trans. Type GI StkTr – Movement type for goods issue.

Do Not Display Prices – Select this field if you do not want to display the purchaseprice in the store.

Document Search – Limits to ensure responsive performance.

Number of Rows in Order Search – Maximum number of rows to be displayedwhen the system returns search results. This keeps the display to a manageable sizefor the user in the store.

Doc. Search Days Back – The number of days before the current date that are to beincluded in the search in the “From” field.



Figure 202: Purchase Order: Assign Purchasing Document Types

Assign the purchasing document types that are used by default when you enter apurchase order and a stock transport order.

Figure 203: Purchase Order: Assign Reasons for Ordering



You can only apply reasons that have already been created in standard purchase ordercustomizing. The path to view this is: Materials Management→ Purchasing→Purchase Order→ Define Reasons for Ordering

As you bring those reasons in to the SRS Purchasing area, you also can limit theiravailability. As shown, there are three options for usage:

• Only for Standard Item

• Only for Return Item

• For Standard Item and Return Item

Thus, you can reduce the options available for the end user, while having all thatare necessary.



Exercise 17: Purchase Order Customizingand Processing


• Configure the Customizing schema for the purchase order

• Process a stock transport order and a standard purchase order in SAP Retail Store

Business ExampleThe Purchase Order function in the purchasing area of SAP Retail Store is used ifgoods are transferred from one store to another, if they are ordered directly from thevendor, or returned to the vendor.

Task 1: Define the Customizing Schema for PurchaseOrdersYou want to maintain the Customizing settings that are required to transfer goods.

1. Create a Customizing schema for your RP## store, name it Z##1, and assignit to your store.

2. Can you configure your Customizing schema so that the EAN numbers aredisplayed instead of the SAP article numbers?

3. Configure your Z##1 Customizing schema so that the default purchasing groupis your SAP Retail group ## and the text ID for the long text in the item detailsis A03 Article PO Text. Check that key 351 has been specified for movementtype GI (stock transfer).

4. Do you have to make any other Customizing settings before you can use thepurchase order in SAP Retail Store?




Task 2: Create a Purchase Order in SRSYou are the assistant store manager and you notice that there are not enough wineglasses for the wine-tasting session this evening. You therefore create a stock transportorder to order glasses from store 3601 at the other end of the city.

1. Branch to the Purchasing area and choose Purchase Order. You want to orderarticle 317065 from store (site) 3601. Choose Create and order 16 glasses.

Hint: This exercise is a prerequisite for the following exerciseCustomize and Perform Goods Receipt.

Task 3: Create a Standard Purchase Order in SRSSince you want to increase the basic stock level of glasses in your RP## store, youorder additional white and red-wine glasses from your external vendor.

1. You want to order articles 317063 and 317064 from the external vendor TheCrystal Distributor (RPV1100).

Note your document number for posting a goods receipt (later task):

_______________________________________



Solution 17: Purchase Order Customizingand Processing

Task 1: Define the Customizing Schema for PurchaseOrdersYou want to maintain the Customizing settings that are required to transfer goods.

1. Create a Customizing schema for your RP## store, name it Z##1, and assignit to your store.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Purchase Order→Basic Settings for Purchase Order Entry→ Define Customizing Schemaswith Basic Settings

Copy the standard schema 0001 and assign key Z##1 for your own schema.Enter “Group ##” as the description.

b) Save your schema and back out. Choose Assignment of CustomizingSchemas to Sites. Choose New Entries. Enter your site and Customizingschema and save your entries.

2. Can you configure your Customizing schema so that the EAN numbers aredisplayed instead of the SAP article numbers?

Answer: Yes, in the Article No. ID field you can specify how to enter the articlewhen you create a purchase order in SRS. You can select the SAP article number,the EAN, or the article number of the vendor.

3. Configure your Z##1 Customizing schema so that the default purchasing groupis your SAP Retail group ## and the text ID for the long text in the item detailsis A03 Article PO Text. Check that key 351 has been specified for movementtype GI (stock transfer).

a) Select your Z##1 schema and open the details screen. Make your settingsas specified in the task.

4. Do you have to make any other Customizing settings before you can use thepurchase order in SAP Retail Store?

a) Yes. A Customizing schema has to be created for the document types andanother one can be created for the order reasons..




Task 2: Create a Purchase Order in SRSYou are the assistant store manager and you notice that there are not enough wineglasses for the wine-tasting session this evening. You therefore create a stock transportorder to order glasses from store 3601 at the other end of the city.

1. Branch to the Purchasing area and choose Purchase Order. You want to orderarticle 317065 from store (site) 3601. Choose Create and order 16 glasses.

Hint: This exercise is a prerequisite for the following exerciseCustomize and Perform Goods Receipt.

a) Purchasing→ Purchase Order

Enter the following settings:


Type Site

Number 3601

Choose Create. On the Purchase Order screen, enter today's date as theDelivery Date. Enter the article number 317065 and quantity 16. ChooseRefresh and then Save Document. Note the number of your stock transportorder.

_______________________________________

Task 3: Create a Standard Purchase Order in SRSSince you want to increase the basic stock level of glasses in your RP## store, youorder additional white and red-wine glasses from your external vendor.

1. You want to order articles 317063 and 317064 from the external vendor TheCrystal Distributor (RPV1100).

Note your document number for posting a goods receipt (later task):




_______________________________________

a) Purchasing→ Purchase Order



Type External Vendor

Name The Crystal Distributor

Number RPV1100

Returns Documents Without Returns

Choose Create. Check that the document type Standard PO is selected.Enter the current date as the Delivery Date and enter the article numbersas specified in the task with any quantity. Make sure that No Returns isselected. Select Save Document.



Lesson Summary





TIRT10_2 Lesson: Goods Receipt

Lesson: Goods Receipt

Lesson OverviewWhen deliveries are made to the store, they are received into the inventory using SAPRetail Store. Before this can happen, several standard settings must be defined so thatuntrained storepersons can post the goods receipts.





Business ExampleRegardless of whether goods are ordered by head office or the store itself, they mustbe received in the store to properly reflect the store's inventory.

Goods Receipts

Figure 204: Goods Receipt: Overview



After goods have been ordered, they must be received into the stores. Goods can bedelivered direct from the vendor or by way of the Distribution Center.

Figure 205: Goods Receipt: Basic Settings (1/3)



Processing of goods receipts must be configured in a goods movement schema. Thisis then assigned to the stores, which enter the goods receipts online. The schemaprovides defaults for the online template and links to MM goods movement for theincoming data.

• General default:

– Document ID: The type of document that you generally receive goodsagainst is identified in this field to default on the SRS entry screen. Thissaves clicks at the time of entry and can be overridden for exceptions.

– Article number ID: Here, you specify which type of article number isusually used to identify the articles in your purchase orders or deliverydocuments, and which is thus also to be defaulted on the SRS entry screen..

• Movement type: Movement type codes are specified in this field group. Theseare standard MM movement types that establish the connection between theinbound BAPIs and the SAP Retail movement types. The goods receiptsmovement types requested are:

– Goods receipt for the reference document

– Goods receipt reversal for the reference document

– Return delivery for reference doc

– Goods receipt for stock transfer orders

– Return deliveries w/o reference document

– For storing transferred stock

– For removing transferred stock

– For Additional Items in a Goods Receipt

– For Additional Items in Goods Receipt Cross Company




Control: Goods receipt

• GM code – The goods movement code establishes the assignment to thetransaction code that is used to enter goods receipts.

• Maximum Number – Enter the maximum number of rows that are to bedisplayed on the goods receipt screen. This ensures clarity and can benefitsystem performance.

• Account Type for Items with Acct Assignment – Some receipts require anaccount assignment. You identify the type of account in this field.

• Default Goods Receipt Qty - When a goods receipt for a reference document isposted in SRS, the quantities expected for the document items are defaulted ifthis field is selected.

• Display Shipping Units in Delivery – Choose whether to show the shippingunits of a delivery.

• Use Search Help Fields on Initial Screen - Choose this field to show the relevantsearch fields on the initial screen.

• Entry of Incoming Invoices in Goods Receipts is Permitted – Set this field ifinvoices are to be entered immediately after the goods are received. If it is set,an additional button displays on the initial screen after the goods receipt hasbeen posted allowing the clerk to enter the invoice.



PDC Procedure Control

• SAP Retail Store MDE Scenario – Specifies whether there is a connection toPDC input and determines the type of connection:

0 – No PDC Connection

1 – PDC Connection by Web Browser

2 – Connect via RFC Interfaces

3 – PDC Connection Using Web Browser/Java Applet


Search Help Controls

Past Period for... – Enter the number of days in the past from which to begin thesearch. The date that corresponds to that number of days before the current datedefaults on the SRS screen and can be changed by the user.

Maximum Number of Hits for.... – The number of rows to display in SRS to ensurethat the information on the screens remains clear for your employees. Also, ifresponse time is increasing, you might want to lower the number of lines to display toimprove performance.



Figure 208: Assign Reference Document Types

The reference documents that you identify in this screen are the only business processdocuments displayed in the drop down list on the Entry page of SRS Goods Receiptand all other goods movement types.



Exercise 18: Customize and Perform GoodsReceipt


• Customize the parameters for SRS goods receipts

• Receive goods into your store using SAP Retail Store

Business ExampleIn this exercise, you fill two different roles: As a project team member, you firstmaintain the customizing settings for goods receipts; you then switch to the role ofstoreperson and process the goods receipt online.

Task 1: Customizing Settings for the Goods Receipt(SRS)As a store employee, you have ordered goods from another store to cover the increaseddemand for wine glasses due to the wine tasting session. Once you have posted thegoods issue (in SAP Retail), you want to enter the goods receipt in your RP## storeusing SAP Retail Store.

1. Call SAP Retail Store and choose Goods Receipt from the Inventory Managementarea. Which reference document ID does the system propose? Which date isproposed in the Doc. Date Frm field?

2. Branch to Customizing for goods receipts for stores. Copy the SAP schema 0001and enter the key ZU## with the description Store GR Group ##. You agree thatPurchase Order is proposed as the reference document ID and that the proposedDoc. Date Frm. date is always 5 days in the past. You also want the system topropose the goods receipt quantity, to allow additional items, and to displaysearch help fields on the initial screen.

Assign your ZU## Customizing schema to your RP## site.




3. Are any additional Customizing settings necessary to make sure that the requiredbusiness processes (goods receipt, reversal, return delivery, and so on) can becarried out for the documents in your store?

Which menu path do you choose?

Task 2: Post Goods IssueBefore you can post the goods receipt as a store employee, the goods must be issuedfrom store 3601.

1. In SAP Retail, post the goods issue from store 3601 with movement type 351.Sixteen glasses of article 317065 are issued (these goods can also be issued inSAP Retail Store but only by an employee of store 3601).

Task 3: Post Goods Receipt in Stores (SRS)Now enter the goods receipt in your RP## store using SAP Retail Store.

1. You are a store employee and want to post the goods receipt. In SAP RetailStore, choose Inventory Management – Goods Receipt. Do you need to knowyour purchase order number?

2.

Caution: Do not save your goods receipt yet.

The vendor ships an additional unordered item and we decide to keep it. Enterthis article as an additional item. Enter article number 317066 (Vindel Decanter)with any quantity. Save your goods receipt and note the document numberthat is generated.




3. The system generates a stock transport order in the background. Now return toinventory management in SAP Retail and display the article document. What doyou notice?

Task 4: Post Goods Receipt for an External PurchaseOrder to the Store (Optional)Now enter the goods receipt for an external purchase order in your RP## store usingSAP Retail Store.

1. You are a store employee and want to post the goods receipt for an externalpurchase order. How do you proceed?

2. You are now on the screen for entering the goods receipt. The system displaysboth order items for articles 317063 and 317064. What happens if you select theCompleted indicator when you post the goods receipt?

3. Underdeliver at least one of the two order items and set the Completed indicatorfor the underdelivered item. Then post your goods receipt. The system issues amessage:

Document posted with the number '5000000xxx'.

Now try to enter a goods receipt for your order document again (the documentnumber is already shown in the Reference Doc. field) by choosing Edit Items.What do you notice?



Solution 18: Customize and Perform GoodsReceipt

Task 1: Customizing Settings for the Goods Receipt(SRS)As a store employee, you have ordered goods from another store to cover the increaseddemand for wine glasses due to the wine tasting session. Once you have posted thegoods issue (in SAP Retail), you want to enter the goods receipt in your RP## storeusing SAP Retail Store.

1. Call SAP Retail Store and choose Goods Receipt from the Inventory Managementarea. Which reference document ID does the system propose? Which date isproposed in the Doc. Date Frm field?

Answer: As the reference document ID, the system proposes For PurchaseOrder. As the Doc. Date Frm, the system proposes today's date.

2. Branch to Customizing for goods receipts for stores. Copy the SAP schema 0001and enter the key ZU## with the description Store GR Group ##. You agree thatPurchase Order is proposed as the reference document ID and that the proposedDoc. Date Frm. date is always 5 days in the past. You also want the system topropose the goods receipt quantity, to allow additional items, and to displaysearch help fields on the initial screen.




Assign your ZU## Customizing schema to your RP## site.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Goods Movement→Basic Settings for Goods Receipt

Choose Define Customizing Schemas with Basic Settings and copy theschema as specified in the task.

Select the following indicators:

Field Name or Data Type Indicator

Default Goods Receipt Qty X

Additional Items Permitted X

Use Search Help Fields on InitialScreen

X

Also check that the Past Period for Order Search in Days is set to 5. Saveyour data.

b) Choose Assignment of Customizing Schemas to Sites.

Choose New Entries. Enter your store RP## and assign your ZU## schemato your RP## site.

3. Are any additional Customizing settings necessary to make sure that the requiredbusiness processes (goods receipt, reversal, return delivery, and so on) can becarried out for the documents in your store?

Which menu path do you choose?

Answer: Yes. You want these business processes to be permitted for thereference document category Purchase Order. You therefore assign thepermitted business processes to the reference document category.

IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Goods Movement→ Groupingof Permitted Reference Documents for Each Business Process→ MaintainGrouping Schema and Assign Reference Document Categories

Note the reference document categories that are permitted for the goodsreceipt. These are: Without Reference Document; Delivery, Including ShippingNotification and Delivery Note; Purchase Order; Shipping Unit; ArticleDocument; and Purchase Requisitions/Requirements.




Task 2: Post Goods IssueBefore you can post the goods receipt as a store employee, the goods must be issuedfrom store 3601.

1. In SAP Retail, post the goods issue from store 3601 with movement type 351.Sixteen glasses of article 317065 are issued (these goods can also be issued inSAP Retail Store but only by an employee of store 3601).

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Inventory Management→ Goods Movement→ Transfer Posting

Make your settings as specified in the task. Choose storage location 0001and confirm with Enter. In the following dialog box (Reference: PurchaseOrder), enter the order number of the stock transport order (see exercise17 Purchase Order Customizing and Processing, task 3). Then post thestock transfer.

Task 3: Post Goods Receipt in Stores (SRS)Now enter the goods receipt in your RP## store using SAP Retail Store.

1. You are a store employee and want to post the goods receipt. In SAP RetailStore, choose Inventory Management – Goods Receipt. Do you need to knowyour purchase order number?

Answer: You do not have to know the purchase order number. You can eithersearch for purchase orders with article 317065 or search generally for openpurchase orders (Edit Items). For example, choose the Article field and enter317065. Then choose Edit Items to display the outstanding purchase ordersand select your purchase order.

2.

Caution: Do not save your goods receipt yet.

The vendor ships an additional unordered item and we decide to keep it. Enterthis article as an additional item. Enter article number 317066 (Vindel Decanter)with any quantity. Save your goods receipt and note the document numberthat is generated.

a) Choose Additional Items and enter the data as specified in the task.




3. The system generates a stock transport order in the background. Now return toinventory management in SAP Retail and display the article document. What doyou notice?

a) Inventory Management→ Article Document→ Display

Enter your article document number and branch to the overview.

Task 4: Post Goods Receipt for an External PurchaseOrder to the Store (Optional)Now enter the goods receipt for an external purchase order in your RP## store usingSAP Retail Store.

1. You are a store employee and want to post the goods receipt for an externalpurchase order. How do you proceed?

a) In SAP Retail Store, choose Inventory Management – Goods Receipt.In the Reference Doc. field, enter your purchase order number from theprevious task.

Hint: If you cannot remember your order number, you can searchfor external purchase orders for articles 317063 and 317064. To doso, choose Edit Items.

2. You are now on the screen for entering the goods receipt. The system displaysboth order items for articles 317063 and 317064. What happens if you select theCompleted indicator when you post the goods receipt?

Answer: The Completed indicator is the same as the delivery completedindicator and can be set at item level. If you select it, the order item nolonger contains open order quantities. It is therefore complete (even if it isunderdelivered).

3. Underdeliver at least one of the two order items and set the Completed indicatorfor the underdelivered item. Then post your goods receipt. The system issues amessage:

Document posted with the number '5000000xxx'.

Now try to enter a goods receipt for your order document again (the documentnumber is already shown in the Reference Doc. field) by choosing Edit Items.What do you notice?

a) The two order items for articles 317063 and 317064 are displayed but thegoods receipt quantities are 0 and cannot be changed.



Lesson Summary






TIRT10_2 Lesson: Incoming Invoice

Lesson: Incoming Invoice

Lesson OverviewWhen a vendor delivers goods to a store, the driver often delivers the invoice at thesame time. In these cases, you can use the Incoming Invoice function in SAP RetailStore. Customizing settings are required to establish the tolerance logic for reducingthe processing time for incorrect invoices. Since the incoming invoice is not thesame as the standard invoice verification, errors are corrected by head office usingthe standard invoice verification.




Business ExampleWhen invoices are delivered to the store, they must be entered so that head office canclear the GR/IR account.

Figure 209: Incoming Invoice: Overview



During the goods receipt process, you may have to receive and enter the invoice atthe store and not at head office.

Figure 210: Incoming Invoice: Basic Settings (1/3)

Incoming Invoice processing must be customized in a schema and, if necessary, beassigned to the stores.

The first group on the Customizing schema page provides the scope of functionality –what the stores are allowed to do and, therefore, which screens are available to them.

Article Identif. – Set the default to your own article number or the EAN/UPC code.

Cancel Allowed – Select this indicator if cancellations are to be allowed in the store.

Always Calculate Tax, No Entry – If you set this indicator, the tax field is not readyfor input and the tax is calculated automatically.

Do Not Display Print Screen – If you select this indicator, the print screen is notdisplayed after the invoice is entered. You cannot select this indicator if the paymentscreen is available in the store, since the payment screen is called from the print screen.

Manual Hold – The actions that are available if personnel in the store are allowedto hold an invoice.



Available actions:

• No Hold

• Set Payment Block

• Park Invoice

Payment Block Manual: You can set which documents/activity the action in the priorfield impacts, if manual holds are allowed. The available options are:

• Blocked for Payment

• Free for Payment

• Invoice Verification

• Payment Clearing

• Payment Request

• Post Processes Inc. Payment

• Skip Account


This section of the incoming invoice is used to set the tolerances.



Check Positive Tolerance – If set, SRS uses the tolerances listed in the following fieldto ensure that invoices are not posted if the tolerance is exceeded. These checks are inaddition to the usual tolerance checks for Logistics invoice verification, for example,vendor-specific and item-level tolerance limits.

Positive Tolerance Value – Enter the maximum value for the positive tolerance check.

Check Negative Tolerance – If set, SRS uses the tolerances listed in the following fieldto ensure that invoices are not posted if the tolerance is exceeded. These checks are inaddition to the usual tolerance checks for Logistics invoice verification, for example,vendor-specific and item-level tolerance limits.

Negative Tolerance Value – Enter the maximum value for the negative tolerance check.

Currency for Tolerance Limits - Enter the currency that the absolute tolerance mustnot exceed.

Hold Due to Tolerance – Specify the action to take if the invoice is held because oftolerance being exceeded.

Available options:

• Error message, Posting not possible

• Set Payment Block

• Park Invoice

Payment Block to Hold Due to Tolerance: You can set which documents/activity theaction in the prior field impacts, if a payment block hold due to tolerance is required.The available options are:

• Blocked for Payment

• Free for Payment

• Invoice Verification

• Payment Clearing

• Payment Request

• Post Processes Inc. Payment

• Skip Account

Screen Settings – The following fields enable you to configure how the information isdisplayed on the screen.

Number of Cost Lines with Reference Doc. – Enter the typical number of costs orcredit memo items that are to be displayed on the screen for each invoice with areference document. This is a default number that can be changed if the number ofitems exceeds this value.



No. of Cost Lines without Reference Doc. – Enter the typical number of costs orcredit memo items that are to be displayed on the screen for each invoice without areference document. This is a default number that can be changed if the number ofitems exceeds this value.


Screen Settings (continued)

You also set the status of the following three items: posting date, item quantity, anditem selection. The status can be:

• Field Hidden – In this case, the posting date is filled automatically with today'sdate. For the item quantity and item selection, the purchase order amount willdefault.

• Field Shown – In this case, the posting date is filled automatically with today'sdate. For the item quantity and item selection, the purchase order amount willdefault.

• Field Ready for Input

Document Search fields define the default dates from which the system searches. Thedates can be overwritten on the entry screen.

You also limit the number of hits that the system displays. Enter a figure that meetsthe requirements of your company but that does not affect system performance.



Figure 213: Incoming Invoice: Grouping of Permitted Reference DocumentCategories

On this screen, specify the reference document categories that are to be provided inthe dropdown list and define one of them as the default.

Figure 214: Incoming Invoice: Grouping of Permitted General Ledger Accounts



In this schema, enter the general ledger accounts to which specific types of productsand services are posted. You can also enter simple text descriptions so that staff inthe store recognize the accounts.

Figure 215: Incoming Invoice: Grouping of Permitted Reasons for Reversal

In this schema, you can enter the reasons that identify a reversal and the text to bedisplayed.



Figure 216: Incoming Invoice: Grouping of Permitted General Ledger Accountsfor Payments

In this schema, you enter the general ledger accounts to which specific paymenttypes are posted. You can also enter simple text descriptions so that staff in the storerecognize the accounts.



Exercise 19: Customizing and Using theIncoming Invoice


• Customize the incoming invoice in SAP Retail Store

• Process an incoming invoice in SAP Retail Store

Business ExampleAs a store employee, you have ordered goods directly from the vendor and thesehave already been delivered to your store. You now want to use SAP Retail Store toenter the incoming invoice in the system.

Task 1: Basic Settings for Incoming InvoiceYou first enter the Customizing settings for incoming invoices.

1. Which path do you choose to access Customizing for incoming invoices?

2. Select Define Customizing Schemas with Basic Settings. Copy the defaultschema 0001 and enter the key ZW## with the description Incoming Invoice ##.You agree that Own Article Number is set as the article identification and thatthe cancellation function is allowed.

Assign your ZW## Customizing schema to your RP## site.




Task 2: Enter an Incoming Invoice in SRSYou now want to use SAP Retail Store to enter the incoming invoice in the system.

1. In SAP Retail Store, choose Purchasing – Incoming Invoice. As the referencedocument ID, choose Purchase Order and as the transaction, choose Invoice.

Do you need to know your purchase order number?

2. Enter the external invoice number 2404## and today's date as the document date.In the “Gross Amount” field, enter the balance displayed and check that bothorder items are selected. If you now choose “Refresh,” the balance changes to 0and you can post the invoice.

3. Stay in the print form for the incoming invoice and note the document number.Now return to the SAP Retail system and display the invoice document. Towhich accounts has the data been posted?

Task 3: Enter an Incoming Invoice Without Referencein SRSServices (such as cleaning) are carried out in your store and you want to pay theseusing Incoming Invoice.

1. In SAP Retail Store, choose Purchasing – Incoming Invoice again. As thereference document ID, choose W/o Reference and as the transaction, chooseInvoice. Enter the vendor number RPV1100 and choose Enter.



External Invoice Number 2910##

Document Date Today

Gross Amount 50

Under the balance amount, enter the following in two rows:

First row:





G/L Account Cleaning

Amount 30

Transaction Invoice

Tax Code No tax

Second row:


G/L Account Heating, Air Conditioning

Amount 20

Transaction Invoice

Tax Code No tax

Save your document and navigate directly to Cash Payment. Choose the paymenttype Check and enter any number as the check number. Confirm the payment.

2. The system issues the message Payment posted with document number15000000xx/2008. Within SRS, switch to Display Incoming Invoice. As theselection criterion, enter your external invoice number 2910## and display thedocument number for this transaction. Note the invoice number.

_________________________________________

Now return to the SAP Retail system and display the invoice document. Towhich accounts has the data been posted this time?



Solution 19: Customizing and Using theIncoming Invoice

Task 1: Basic Settings for Incoming InvoiceYou first enter the Customizing settings for incoming invoices.

1. Which path do you choose to access Customizing for incoming invoices?

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Incoming Invoice→Basic Settings for Incoming Invoice

2. Select Define Customizing Schemas with Basic Settings. Copy the defaultschema 0001 and enter the key ZW## with the description Incoming Invoice ##.You agree that Own Article Number is set as the article identification and thatthe cancellation function is allowed.

Assign your ZW## Customizing schema to your RP## site.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Incoming Invoice→Basic Settings for Incoming Invoice

Choose Define Customizing Schemas with Basic Settings and copy theschema as specified in the task.

Check that the “Cancel Allowed” indicator is set and that the “ArticleIdentif.” field contains Own Article Number. Save your data.

b) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Incoming Invoice→Basic Settings for Incoming Invoice

Select Assignment of Customizing Schemas to Sites. Choose New Entries.Enter the name of your RP## store and assign your ZW## schema to yourRP## site.

Task 2: Enter an Incoming Invoice in SRSYou now want to use SAP Retail Store to enter the incoming invoice in the system.

1. In SAP Retail Store, choose Purchasing – Incoming Invoice. As the referencedocument ID, choose Purchase Order and as the transaction, choose Invoice.

Do you need to know your purchase order number?

Answer: You can either enter your purchase order number directly (“PurchaseOrder” field) or you can search for open vendor orders with the numberRPV1100. Choose Enter to confirm your entries.




2. Enter the external invoice number 2404## and today's date as the document date.In the “Gross Amount” field, enter the balance displayed and check that bothorder items are selected. If you now choose “Refresh,” the balance changes to 0and you can post the invoice.

a) Make the settings as specified in the task and save the document.

3. Stay in the print form for the incoming invoice and note the document number.Now return to the SAP Retail system and display the invoice document. Towhich accounts has the data been posted?

a) Purchasing→ Logistics Invoice Verification→ Further Processing→Display Invoice Document

Enter your document number and the current fiscal year. Choose DisplayDocument and access the Follow-On Documents. Choose the accountingdocument. Data has been posted to account 211200.

Task 3: Enter an Incoming Invoice Without Referencein SRSServices (such as cleaning) are carried out in your store and you want to pay theseusing Incoming Invoice.

1. In SAP Retail Store, choose Purchasing – Incoming Invoice again. As thereference document ID, choose W/o Reference and as the transaction, chooseInvoice. Enter the vendor number RPV1100 and choose Enter.



External Invoice Number 2910##

Document Date Today

Gross Amount 50

Under the balance amount, enter the following in two rows:

First row:





G/L Account Cleaning

Amount 30

Transaction Invoice

Tax Code No tax

Second row:


G/L Account Heating, Air Conditioning

Amount 20

Transaction Invoice

Tax Code No tax

Save your document and navigate directly to Cash Payment. Choose the paymenttype Check and enter any number as the check number. Confirm the payment.

a) Make your settings as specified in the task. In the Number field, enter thevendor number RPV1100.

2. The system issues the message Payment posted with document number15000000xx/2008. Within SRS, switch to Display Incoming Invoice. As theselection criterion, enter your external invoice number 2910## and display thedocument number for this transaction. Note the invoice number.

_________________________________________

Now return to the SAP Retail system and display the invoice document. Towhich accounts has the data been posted this time?

a) In SAP Retail Store, choose Purchasing→ Incoming Invoice→ Display

b) Purchasing→ Logistics Invoice Verification→ Further Processing→Display Invoice Document

Enter your document number and the current fiscal year. Choose DisplayDocument and access the Follow-On Documents. Choose the accountingdocument. Data has been posted to accounts 471000 and 472000.



Lesson Summary






Lesson: Goods Movements

Lesson OverviewGoods receipts are not the only stock movements that must be recorded. The standardmovements tracked by your company can be customized and then recorded in SRS.






Business ExampleSeveral types of activity characterize inventory management in a store, such as stocktransfer processes, recording shrinkage or breakage, and performing periodic physicalinventory counts. These subjects are dealt with in this lesson and the following ones.

Goods are moved in and out of stock for various reasons. It is first necessary tomaintain the Customizing settings for these movements so that goods movementscan be entered easily in SRS.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Goods Movements

Figure 217: Stock Transfer: Overview

Stock transfer movement types can be virtual as well as physical. For example, if astore wants to isolate its promotional stock from its regular stock, it can be easilyhandled via goods movements.

Transfers between stores can also be recorded simply.

The accounting is handled behind the scenes, with no user intervention, in both cases.



Figure 218: Other Goods Movement: Overview

As shown, other goods movements can easily be defined. For example, these includeremoving inventory from the floor for use within the store or disposing of damagedgoods.

Recording these movements is facilitated by corresponding Customizing settings.Accounting takes place in the background without any additional intervention bythe user.



Figure 219: Goods Movements: Customizing (1/2)

To prepare the processing of other goods movements, you must first enter aCustomizing schema and define the associated basic settings.

• General default:

– Article No. ID – Enter the type of article numbers that you use to identifythe articles for other goods movements. This setting is displayed on theSRS entry screen and is a default setting for SAP Retail.

– Check Expiration Date – Specifies whether the expiration date of perishableitems is to be checked before a goods movement is recorded. If you activatethe check, the system issues a warning or error message if the remainingshelf life is shorter than specified in the article master.

– Storage Location Mgt – If you select this indicator, a field is displayed onthe online screen in which you can enter the storage location.

• Control of PDC Procedures

– SAP Retail Store MDE Scenario – Specifies whether there is a connectionto PDC input and determines the type of connection:

0 = No PDC Connection

1 = PDC Connection by Web Browser

2 = PDC Connection by RFC Interfaces

3 = PDC Connection Using Web Browser/Java Applet



Figure 220: Goods Movements: Customizing (2/2)

Besides the goods receipt, the system recognizes two other categories of goodsmovements: stock transfers and other goods movements. Both are customizedsimilarly. First, you define a Customizing schema with the basic settings. You thenspecify the types of goods movements used in your company and assign them asbusiness transactions to a select box.

In the next step, you assign the business transactions defined for the select box toa schema and create the reference between the different business transactions andthe corresponding movement types. Finally, you assign the schema to the stores inquestion.

The business transactions of the relevant schema then appear in SAP Retail Store onthe entry screen for stock transfers and other goods movements. Subsequent datahandling is controlled by the movement type code, which is assigned to the respectivebusiness transaction.

The movement types are shipped with the system; they are assigned to the generalledger accounts as part of Customizing for Materials Management.



Exercise 20: Customizing GoodsMovements


• Enter the Customizing settings for stock transfers and other goods movements

• Post goods movements in SAP Retail Store

Business ExampleIn your company, you have decided to implement SAP Retail Store in your stores.Since goods are transferred between stores and various goods withdrawals occurwithin the stores, you want to familiarize yourself with the Customizing settings forstock transfers and other goods movements.

Task 1: Transfer Stock to Another StoreAs a store employee, you are asked to deliver three bottles of Sauvignon Blanc(article number 317024) to the neighboring store. Use the next higher store number(e.g. your store number: RP01 => stock transfer to RP02)

1. Under Inventory Management, choose Goods Movement. Ensure that Transferis highlighted and choose Edit Items.

Enter the business transaction Transfer of Stock to Another Store. Transferthree bottles of Sauvignon Blanc (article number 317024). Enter the followingsettings:


Bus. Trans. Transfer of stock to another store

Article 317024

Quantity 3

EUn EA

Do not enter a receiving site and choose Refresh. What message do you receive?

2. Display the accounting document in SAP Retail. Which path do you choose?




Which accounts have been credited and debited by this posting?

Task 2: Scrapping in Your StoreNow return to SAP Retail Store. An item of article 317065 was irreparably damagedduring transport. You manage goods with this kind of damage as breakages. Youtherefore remove this article from the stock and report it to head office as a breakage.

1. In SAP Retail Store, choose Goods Movement under Inventory Management.Choose Other Movement and then Edit Items. Enter the following settings:


Bus. Trans. Breakage/Spoilage of Stock Article

Article 317065

Quantity 1

EUn EA

2. Check the accounting document for this goods movement. Which movementtype was selected in this case and which account has been debited?

Task 3: Customizing for Goods MovementsAs a store employee, you have just carried out two different goods movements in SAPRetail Store, and you now want to familiarize yourself with the basic Customizingsettings required for stock transfers and other goods movements.

1. Navigate to Customizing for the basic settings for goods movements/stocktransfers and display the default Customizing schema Z001.

Assign schema Z001 to your RP## site.




Task 4: Determine the G/L Account for Stock PostingsBefore you enter the required Customizing settings for stock transfers and other goodsmovements, you want to check the relevant G/L accounts and cost centers for themovement types in question. Determine the relevant settings in Customizing forMaterials Management. You know the following information:

Field Name or Data Type G/L Account

Stock Account 135075

Scrap Account 510040

Trading Goods Consumption Account 510080

1. Check the assigned stock accounts in account determination for chart of accountsCANA and the valuation grouping code 0001. From the Materials Managementposting group (RMK), choose “Inventory Posting (BSX)”.

Task 5: Maintain Grouping Schema and Assign BusinessTransactionsIn Customizing for SAP Retail Store, you now want to configure the necessary settingsfor the goods movement Transfer of Stock to Another Store (business transaction).

1. Branch to Maintain Grouping Schema and Assign Business Transactions anddisplay the business transactions for default schema Z001. Which businesstransactions (keys) are assigned?

2. Which movement type is assigned to the business transaction Transfer of stock toanother store? Which business transaction is defined as the default? What does2 in the “Req. Field” column mean?

Complete the table:

Select Box Description Mvmt Type GM Code Req. Field

0001

0002

0003

3. Do you have to add a G/L account for these transactions?




4. Check whether the default schema Z001 is assigned to your RP## site andif not, assign it.

5. Can you transfer an article to a promotion using this schema?

Task 6: Maintain Grouping Schema for Other GoodsMovements and Assign Business TransactionsNow configure the Customizing settings for Other Goods Movements in SAP RetailStore.

1. Which business transactions are assigned to the default grouping schema 0001?

2. In this table, GM codes are assigned to business transactions of the defaultgrouping

schema 0001. What is the difference between GM codes 03 and 05?

Do not assign a schema to your site. What effect will this have on your siteif you choose Inventory Management – Goods Movement and then OtherMovement in SAP Retail Store?



Solution 20: Customizing Goods Movements

Task 1: Transfer Stock to Another StoreAs a store employee, you are asked to deliver three bottles of Sauvignon Blanc(article number 317024) to the neighboring store. Use the next higher store number(e.g. your store number: RP01 => stock transfer to RP02)

1. Under Inventory Management, choose Goods Movement. Ensure that Transferis highlighted and choose Edit Items.

Enter the business transaction Transfer of Stock to Another Store. Transferthree bottles of Sauvignon Blanc (article number 317024). Enter the followingsettings:


Bus. Trans. Transfer of stock to another store

Article 317024

Quantity 3

EUn EA

Do not enter a receiving site and choose Refresh. What message do you receive?

a) Make the settings as specified in the task. You receive the message Enter areceiving site.

Now enter the receiving site and choose Refresh again. Choose Post.

2. Display the accounting document in SAP Retail. Which path do you choose?




Which accounts have been credited and debited by this posting?

a) Logistics→ Retailing→ Merchandise Logistics→ Inventory Management→ Article Document→ Display

Enter your article document and the current year.

b) You can see that your article document consists of two items:

one item for the outbound posting (negative transaction) and one item forthe goods receipt posting (positive transaction). Both items have movementtype 301 and article 317024.

Choose Accounting Documents and then Accounting Document. Thesystem displays the credit and debit on the same general ledger account135075 (the stock account). However, this is assigned to the two differentstores.

Task 2: Scrapping in Your StoreNow return to SAP Retail Store. An item of article 317065 was irreparably damagedduring transport. You manage goods with this kind of damage as breakages. Youtherefore remove this article from the stock and report it to head office as a breakage.

1. In SAP Retail Store, choose Goods Movement under Inventory Management.Choose Other Movement and then Edit Items. Enter the following settings:


Bus. Trans. Breakage/Spoilage of Stock Article

Article 317065

Quantity 1

EUn EA

a) Make the settings as specified in the task and choose Post.

2. Check the accounting document for this goods movement. Which movementtype was selected in this case and which account has been debited?

a) Logistics→ Retailing→ Merchandise Logistics→ Inventory Management→ Article Document→ Display

Enter your article document and the current year.

Movement type 551 (GI Scrapping) has been selected. A credit memo hasbeen posted and scrap account 510040 has been debited.




Task 3: Customizing for Goods MovementsAs a store employee, you have just carried out two different goods movements in SAPRetail Store, and you now want to familiarize yourself with the basic Customizingsettings required for stock transfers and other goods movements.

1. Navigate to Customizing for the basic settings for goods movements/stocktransfers and display the default Customizing schema Z001.

Assign schema Z001 to your RP## site.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Goods Movement→ Basic Settings for Goods Movements/Stock Transfers→ DefineCustomizing Schemas with Basic Settings

b) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Goods Movement→ Basic Settings for Goods Movements/Stock Transfers→ AssignCustomizing Schemas to Sites

Choose New Entries and enter your RP## store and the Customizingschema in the corresponding fields.




Task 4: Determine the G/L Account for Stock PostingsBefore you enter the required Customizing settings for stock transfers and other goodsmovements, you want to check the relevant G/L accounts and cost centers for themovement types in question. Determine the relevant settings in Customizing forMaterials Management. You know the following information:

Field Name or Data Type G/L Account

Stock Account 135075

Scrap Account 510040

Trading Goods Consumption Account 510080

1. Check the assigned stock accounts in account determination for chart of accountsCANA and the valuation grouping code 0001. From the Materials Managementposting group (RMK), choose “Inventory Posting (BSX)”.

a) IMG: Materials Management→ Valuation and Account Assignment→Account Determination→ Account Determination Without Wizard→Configure Automatic Posting

On the selection screen, choose Cancel and then Account Assignment.This brings you to the Materials Management posting group (RMK).Double-click “Inventory Posting (BSX)” in the table. We are using chart ofaccounts CANA and the valuation grouping code 0001. Nearly all goodsthat you sell belong to the material type “Trading Goods” (HAWA) andtherefore to valuation class 3100.

As you can see from the table, general ledger account 135075 is usedfor stock postings for the combination of valuation grouping code 0001and valuation class 3100.

Alternatively, you can choose G/L Accounts on the main screen, entercompany code R300 and your RP## store (the valuation area), and displaya full list of accounts.




Task 5: Maintain Grouping Schema and Assign BusinessTransactionsIn Customizing for SAP Retail Store, you now want to configure the necessary settingsfor the goods movement Transfer of Stock to Another Store (business transaction).

1. Branch to Maintain Grouping Schema and Assign Business Transactions anddisplay the business transactions for default schema Z001. Which businesstransactions (keys) are assigned?

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Goods Movement→Grouping of Business Transactions for Stock Transfers → MaintainGrouping Schema and Assign Business Transactions

Choose default schema Z001 and branch to the Assign BusinessTransactions folder. Three business transactions are assigned:

0001 = Transfer of stock to another store

0002 = Transfer of article to promo (ValOnly)

0003 = Splitting up of set articles

2. Which movement type is assigned to the business transaction Transfer of stock toanother store? Which business transaction is defined as the default? What does2 in the “Req. Field” column mean?

Complete the table:





0001

0002

0003

a) Movement type 301 is assigned to the business transaction Transfer ofstock to another store. The Default indicator is also set for this businesstransaction, meaning that this is set as the default. For the Transfer of stockto another store business transaction, the required field is set to 2, whichmeans that the receiving site is defined as a required entry field.


0001 Transferof stock toanother store

301 04 2

0002 Transferof articleto promo.(ValOnly)

309 04

0003 Splitting up ofset articles

319 04

3. Do you have to add a G/L account for these transactions?

a) No, you do not have to enter G/L accounts since these are defined instandard goods movements and the G/L accounts defined there are usedby default.

4. Check whether the default schema Z001 is assigned to your RP## site andif not, assign it.

a) Choose Assignment of Grouping Schema to Sites.

Choose New Entries. Enter the name of your RP## store and assign theZ001 schema to your RP## site.




5. Can you transfer an article to a promotion using this schema?

a) Yes, you can select “Transfer of article to promo”. Transfer stock toanother store is only the default setting.

Task 6: Maintain Grouping Schema for Other GoodsMovements and Assign Business TransactionsNow configure the Customizing settings for Other Goods Movements in SAP RetailStore.

1. Which business transactions are assigned to the default grouping schema 0001?

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Goods Movement→ Grouping of Business Transactions for Other Goods Movements→Maintain Grouping Schema and Assign Business Transactions

Select the standard schema 0001.

Business Transactions Description Mvmt Type

0001 Breakage/Spoilage ofStock Article

551

0002 Goods spoilt/SLEDexpired

551

0003 Goods receiptunplanned

501

0004 Theft 551

0005 Removed for ownconsumption

201

0006 Removed for staffcanteen (foods)

201

0007 Removed for sampling 331

0008 Removed forproduction (spicesfor meat)

221

0009 Free-of-chargedelivery from vendor

511

2. In this table, GM codes are assigned to business transactions of the defaultgrouping




schema 0001. What is the difference between GM codes 03 and 05?

Do not assign a schema to your site. What effect will this have on your siteif you choose Inventory Management – Goods Movement and then OtherMovement in SAP Retail Store?

a) The difference between goods movement codes 03 for breakage/spoilage(assigned to business transaction 0001) and 05 for free-of-charge delivery(assigned to business transaction 0009) is that 03 is a removal code thatis linked to transaction MB1A (Goods Removal), whereas 05 is a goodsreceipt that is linked to transaction MB1C.

b) If you do not assign a schema to your site, the system uses the defaultgrouping schema 0001. Business transaction 0003 Goods receiptunplanned is shown.



Lesson Summary








Lesson: Physical Inventory

Lesson OverviewThis lesson covers the topic of the store physical inventory using SAP Retail Store.




Business ExampleAll stores must count the physical inventory of their stock on a regular basis. Theinventory can be requested by head office (SAP Retail), which creates a countdocument on which the staff enter the physical count. For a limited numbers ofarticles, stores can create their own documents and enter the count on these. This canbe handled by SAP Retail Store.

Physical Inventory in the Store

Figure 221: Physical Inventory


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Physical Inventory

A physical inventory involves measuring, counting, and weighing stock at awarehouse or store and entering it in the system. Each retailer is required to entertheir stocks at least once a year.

The final result of a physical inventory in SAP Retail is a stock change: the currentbook inventory is replaced with counted stock. This process is documented by anarticle document and a corresponding update in Financial Accounting.

SAP supports various physical inventory procedures; retailers normally use periodicphysical inventory and continuous periodic physical inventory.

• In periodic physical inventory, all stocks are recorded physically for a specifickey date. Each article must be counted.

• Continuous periodic physical inventory is performed for parts of the stockacross a fiscal year. In this case, the retailer must ensure that each article isentered at least once.

Figure 222: Inventory Reasons

The physical inventory is carried out on the basis of stock management units. A stockmanagement unit is a part of the stock for an article that cannot be broken down anyfurther and that has its own book balance.



A stock management unit is uniquely defined by the following information:

• Article

• Site

• Stock type

• Special stock (for example, sales order stock)

Each stock management unit for an article is counted separately and the inventorydifferences are posted for each stock management unit. This means, for example, thatfor an article in a storage location for a site, you have to include the unrestricted stock,the stock in quality inspection, and the blocked stock separately.

Different physical inventory documents are created for special stock such asconsignment stock at customer, external consignment stock from vendors, orreturnable packaging.

Figure 223: Physical Inventory: Procedure in Three Phases

The physical inventory procedure is split into three phases:

• 1. Create physical inventory documents

• 2. Enter count

• 3. Post inventory difference



In the first phase, you create the physical inventory documents. SAP Retail providesyou with several methods for mass creation of physical inventory documents. Afterselecting the stocks to be counted and creating the physical inventory documents, thedocuments are printed out ready to begin the stock count.

In the second phase, you enter the results of the count in the system and the systemthen calculates the inventory differences. If any of the results look dubious, youcan initiate a recount of the stock management units in question. In this case, morephysical inventory documents are generated.

In the third phase, you post the inventory differences that were found. This updatesthe quantity- and value-based stock, and the stock accounts in Financial Accounting.

The process can be changed slightly for store physical inventory: the store can countthe stock and upload the data to SAP Retail using an IDoc; when the data is processed,the physical inventory document is created and the count is entered at the same time.

A number of evaluation programs are available to support physical inventory planning.

Figure 224: Physical Inventory Document



An inventory document contains the following data:

• The site and storage location in which the inventory is going to be counted

• When the count will take place (planned count date)

• Which articles are to be counted

• Which stock types are to be counted

• The status of the item

• The status of the inventory document

Inventory documents are created for each site and storage location. You can alsodefine the storage bin or the merchandise category as additional grouping values.When you create a physical inventory document, you can also enter a physicalinventory number in the document header. (This number should not be confused withthe number of the physical inventory document, however.) You can enter any numberyou wish. For example, the number of the count group, the processor, the department,or the month and year of the physical inventory.

Figure 225: Blocking Goods Movements

When entering the count results, the system determines the current book balance.The book balance is compared with the count quantity entered - the result of whichis the difference quantity. If goods movements are posted in between the physicalstock count and entry of the physical inventory count, incorrect physical inventorydifferences may result. To prevent this error, you can block all goods movements for



a stock management unit for the physical inventory. If you set the Posting Blockindicator in the header of the physical inventory document, the system blocks all thestock management units for that physical inventory document.

If it is not possible to block a goods movement for organizational reasons, you can fixthe book balance in the physical inventory document at the point of counting. To dothis, you select the Fix Book Inventory indicator in the physical inventory document.This prevents goods movements from changing the book inventory relevant for thephysical inventory.

Make sure the book inventory is correct and up to date. The book inventory is changedpermanently by goods movements (sales, goods receipts, markdowns). You can fixthe book inventory when creating a physical inventory document; this means goodmovements posted at a later point in time no longer change the book inventory forthe article in the physical inventory document. If you do not select this indicator, thebook inventory changes with each posting until the count data is entered in the system.If you select the “Posting Block” indicator, no further goods movement postings arepossible, which means the book balance cannot change.

When counting, you must ensure that no goods movements take place, and that youonly enter stock that has already been booked into store stock. In cases where goodsare withdrawn physically but this fact has not yet been recorded in the system, it mustbe ensured that the goods are not taken into account in the physical inventory.

Figure 226: Physical Inventory: Overview



Accounting principles in various countries, such as GoB (Buchführungsgrundsätze) inGermany or US-GAAP (Generally Accepted Accounting Principles) in the UnitedStates require physical inventory counts to be carried out regularly.

Physical inventory using SRS provides two options in addition to using PDC input.One is to count the articles in a physical inventory PI document that is created at headoffice. If there are only a few articles to count, this can be done manually. For a largenumber of articles, it is advisable to create the inventory documents automaticallyin the background.

The second option is to create documents via SRS for articles that the store wantscounted.

In both cases, the documents are created, store staff can perform the count eithermanually with a visual count or via a PDC, and the count entered in SAP Retail Store.

Figure 227: Physical Inventory: Basic Settings (1/3)

Physical inventory customizing prepares the internet display for data entry.

If a reason is to be entered when posting differences, set the indicator in the“Difference Reason Entry” field. The “Edit Differences” screen then contains acorresponding input field. You can set up specific difference reasons in SAP Retailto be used in this field.

Select “Use POS Currency” if you do not want to display the inventory differencevalue in the company code currency.



If you select the “Offer Change Count Separately” indicator, this function isadditionally displayed on the physical inventory initial screen. The user must thendecide whether to change the inventory count on the following screen or whetherto post the inventory differences. If the indicator is not set, the "Edit Differences"function is displayed on the initial screen. On the following screen, inventory countscan be changed and inventory differences posted.

The period for displaying PI documents can be set. The default is 24 months.

There are several options for displaying the overview list of PI documents:

• Always show

• Make zoom in/out possible – displays either the document number only, or thedocument number and status.

• Make hide/show possible – provides a function to hide or display the overviewon the screen.

• Screen switch between overview and items – the overview is displayed until adocument is selected; then only the relevant document data is displayed.




PDC Procedure Control

• PDC Procedure w. ITS File Transfer – Select this field if you use PDCs tocapture inventory data with ITS file transfer procedures.

• PDC Procedure Mass Processing - Select this field if you use PDCs to capturethe inventory data for mass processing procedures. Since this method uses thePOS inventory IDoc, an inbound and outbound POS profile is required.

• Use Java Applet for File Selection – If you set this indicator, a Java applet isused in the SAP Retail Store physical Inventory to select the PDC file to beposted. This makes selecting the PDC file more user-friendly when using theITS file transfer procedure.

• Expand Value-Only Arts – If you set this indicator, all individual articles relatingto the value-only articles in the physical inventory document are determinedwhen the physical inventory document is sent to the PDC device, and an item issent for each individual item. This is only relevant if the PDC procedure withdocument reference is used in the store.

• Period for Selection – Indicates the number of days in the past from the currentdate that the system should search for PDC transactions.




Selection Stock Type/Value-Only Art

• Stock Type Selection – If set, the user in the store can select the stock type forwhich physical inventory documents are to be created.

• Blocked Stock – If set, the user can create physical inventory documents forblocked stock (type 4).

• Stock in QI – If set, the user can create physical inventory documents for stockin quality inspection (type 2).

• Value-Only Artls – Specifies how value-only articles are to be selected whenphysical inventory documents are created in SRS. The options are:

– blank – Always Select Value-Only Articles.

– 1 – Do Not Select Value-Only Articles

– 2 – Enable Selection in Dialog

Other Document Creation Selections

• Only Articles With Negative Stock – If set, this option is displayed on the userscreen in SRS.

• Empties Only – If set, the user in the store can create physical inventorydocuments for empties articles.

• Sales Order Stock – If set, the user in the store can create physical inventorydocuments for sales order stock (special stock E).



Physical Inventory for Distribution Centers

Figure 230: Physical Inventory for Distribution Centers

Distribution centers normally use a Warehouse Management system. They use theWarehouse Management system to perform physical inventory.

Physical inventory at a warehouse relates to storage locations; this means physicalinventory documents are created for each storage location in the WarehouseManagement system. Articles are often at several storage locations at the same time,which means an article can be entered in several physical inventory documents inparallel.

The Warehouse Management system calculates the differences between target andactual stock for each storage location, posts the differences to a special storagetype for inventory differences, and corrects the actual stock at the storage locationafter counting. This storage type does not represent a physical warehouse butsimply contains the total of the differences for all storage locations for eacharticle. The inventory differences must be transferred to Inventory Managementfor stock adjustment; this generates an inventory adjustment posting. This processis documented by an article document and a corresponding update in FinancialAccounting. Once the data has been transferred to Inventory Management, the stockdifference at the special storage type is reset to 0.



Store Physical InventoryYou have various organizational options for performing physical inventory at yourstores. The physical inventory can be planned by the head office for the stores. Thisoften happens on the key date.

Figure 231: Store Physical Inventory

The physical inventory documents are created at head office and sent to the stores.Counting takes place at the stores and the count data is returned to the head office. Ifthe store uses a store retailing system, the physical inventory documents are transferredvia the POS Interface to the non-SAP store retailing system using IDocs. The countdata is also uploaded to SAP Retail by means of IDocs, and the existing physicalinventory document is updated in POS inbound processing. If the store uses SAPRetail Store, the physical inventory documents are available immediately at the stores.

Stores do not normally use a Warehouse Management system; physical inventorytakes place in SAP Retail at site and storage location level.



It is also possible for the physical inventory to be initiated by the stores themselves.Stores often carry out ad hoc counts, for example for a shelf or a merchandisecategory. In this case, the store schedules, organizes, and performs the inventory itself(in consultation with head office, if applicable).

• If the store uses SAP Retail Store, it can create the physical inventory documentsitself, perform the count, and complete the inventory by making an adjustmentposting.

• If the store uses a store retailing system, the physical inventory documents arenot created until the count data is uploaded to SAP Retail by IDoc (withoutdownloading the documents to the store retailing system beforehand).

Figure 232: Physical Inventory While Store is Open

This function can be used to carry out a physical inventory during store opening hours.

POS sales data is usually transferred to SAP Retail to update stocks during the night.

In this example, POS sales data from store A is transferred to SAP Retail at 1:00 am onMonday; SAP Retail then updates the stocks. Articles are counted in the store at 2:00pm. The count data is transferred later (at 8.00 pm) to SAP Retail through the POSInterface using IDocs or via SAP Retail Store. It is important that the count time isentered in the system and transferred to SAP Retail. When the count data is received,the target stock and count data are updated in the physical inventory document of



store A. The target stock is 3 EA in this example, since 5 EA of the article were soldbetween 1:00 am and 2:00 pm. Articles in the physical inventory document whichwere sold during the day are not included in the book inventory, which still says 8 EA.

The POS data (sales and returns) is uploaded during the night. A report then calculatesthe book inventory, taking account of the sales data from the POS, and replaces it inthe physical inventory document. In this example, all sales up to 2.00 pm are takeninto account. This corrects the previous book inventory of 8 PC by 5 PC. The reportfor calculating the book inventory can be scheduled as a job.

The differences are not posted until afterward.

The physical inventory process can also be performed in a different way from thatillustrated here; for example, the physical inventory documents can be created beforethe count data is uploaded to SAP Retail. The book inventory can be fixed when aphysical inventory document is created; in this case, the system determines the bookinventory immediately when creating the inventory document rather than waiting untilthe count results are entered, as described in this example. POS upload can take placeseveral times a day instead of being run once at night.

POS sales (and returns) that are transferred as per receipts via the POS Interface aretaken into account when calculating the book inventory, but goods movements (suchas goods receipts and transfer postings) are not taken into account.



Exercise 21: Customizing for PhysicalInventory: Head Office Plans Inventory


• Customize the screen display for the physical inventory

• Create a physical inventory document in SAP Retail

• Enter the results of a physical inventory count in SAP Retail Store

Business ExampleHead office requires you to carry out a physical inventory for certain goods eachmonth. You therefore enter the Customizing settings and check whether theapplication meets your requirements.

Task 1: Define Customizing SchemaBefore you can enter a physical inventory in the store, you must specify the schemathat is to be used in Customizing for SAP Retail Store.

1. Which path do you choose to create a Customizing schema for the physicalinventory?

2. Copy the existing schema 0001 and use this as the basis for creating your ownschema Z##0. Enter Physical inventory ## as the description. What entry mustyou make to keep your PI documents for one year only?




3. Configure the schema so that you can increase or decrease the size of theoverview screen in SAP Retail Store. What entry will you use?

4. In a second step, assign your new schema to your RP## site.

Task 2: Plan Physical Inventory at Head OfficeHead office decides that a physical inventory must be carried out for glassware instore RP##.

1. Which menu path (in SAP Retail) do you choose to create a physical inventorydocument for your RP## store?

Create a document for articles 317063 to 317065 with stock type 1 (warehouse)and note your physical inventory document number.

______________________________

Task 3: Physical Inventory Count at the StoreA store employee then completes the count using SAP Retail Store.

1. The following stock is counted:

Article Values

317063 6

317064 6

317065 6

Which path do you choose to enter the result? Enter the result of the countand post it.




2. When you save the data, does that mean that it has changed the inventory?

3. How can you check that your count and the book balance in SAP Retail are thesame? Does the count result correspond to the book balance?

4. If your count differs from the book balance, change your counted quantity sothat it is +/-1 of the book balance and post the difference.

Task 4: Reasons for Inventory DifferencesFor analysis purposes, you want to configure your system so that a reason must beentered if a physical inventory difference occurs. Common reasons for physicalinventory differences in your company are wrong placement, poor quality, or damage.

1. First check the reasons for the physical inventory differences. As the goodsmovement for the physical inventory, choose movement types 701 and 702.

2. In a second step, change your Customizing schema Z##0 so that you can entera reason for the physical inventory difference. Also choose setting 3 or 4 forthe overview screen.

3. Carry out the physical inventory for article 317001 in SAP Retail Store foryour RP## store.



Solution 21: Customizing for PhysicalInventory: Head Office Plans Inventory

Task 1: Define Customizing SchemaBefore you can enter a physical inventory in the store, you must specify the schemathat is to be used in Customizing for SAP Retail Store.

1. Which path do you choose to create a Customizing schema for the physicalinventory?

Answer: IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Physical Inventory→ Basic Settings for Physical Inventory

Choose Define Customizing Schemas with Basic Settings.

2. Copy the existing schema 0001 and use this as the basis for creating your ownschema Z##0. Enter Physical inventory ## as the description. What entry mustyou make to keep your PI documents for one year only?

a) Enter the settings as specified in the task.

So that physical inventory document numbers are retained for only one year,change the value in the Period f. Selecting Phys. Inv. Nos to 12 (months).

3. Configure the schema so that you can increase or decrease the size of theoverview screen in SAP Retail Store. What entry will you use?

Answer: In the Overview Screen field, enter 2 (Make Zoom In/Out Possible).

4. In a second step, assign your new schema to your RP## site.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Physical Inventory→Basic Settings for Physical Inventory

Choose Assignment of Customizing Schemas to Sites. Enter your sitenumber and your schema number Z##0.

Save your entries.

Task 2: Plan Physical Inventory at Head OfficeHead office decides that a physical inventory must be carried out for glassware instore RP##.

1. Which menu path (in SAP Retail) do you choose to create a physical inventorydocument for your RP## store?




Create a document for articles 317063 to 317065 with stock type 1 (warehouse)and note your physical inventory document number.

______________________________

a) Merchandise Logistics→ Physical Inventory→ Physical InventoryDocument→ Create

Enter your RP## store and storage location 0001 and then choose Enter.Enter the article numbers and stock type 1 (warehouse stock) and chooseSave.

The system issues a message:

Physical inventory document 10000.... created. Note the number of yourphysical inventory document.

Task 3: Physical Inventory Count at the StoreA store employee then completes the count using SAP Retail Store.

1. The following stock is counted:

Article Values

317063 6

317064 6

317065 6

Which path do you choose to enter the result? Enter the result of the countand post it.

a) Under Inventory Management, choose Physical Inventory and then Execute.

Enter the physical inventory document that you just created and enter thecurrent date in the Planned Count Date field. Choose Enter Count. Inthe Counted Quantity field, enter:

Article Counted Quantity

317063 6

317064 6

317065 6

Choose Save Data.




2. When you save the data, does that mean that it has changed the inventory?

Answer: No. The overview on the left-hand side indicates that the documenthas been completely counted but not yet posted.

Return to the initial screen of the inventory.

3. How can you check that your count and the book balance in SAP Retail are thesame? Does the count result correspond to the book balance?

Answer: On the Physical Inventory initial screen, choose Edit Differences. Anydifferences are displayed on the following screen.

4. If your count differs from the book balance, change your counted quantity sothat it is +/-1 of the book balance and post the difference.

a) Change the figure in the Counted Quantity field accordingly and chooseChange Count, thenPost Differences.

Task 4: Reasons for Inventory DifferencesFor analysis purposes, you want to configure your system so that a reason must beentered if a physical inventory difference occurs. Common reasons for physicalinventory differences in your company are wrong placement, poor quality, or damage.

1. First check the reasons for the physical inventory differences. As the goodsmovement for the physical inventory, choose movement types 701 and 702.

a) IMG: Materials Management→ Inventory Management and PhysicalInventory→ Movement Types→ Record Reason for Goods Movements

Choose Reason for Movement. Display movement types 701 and 702and their reasons.

2. In a second step, change your Customizing schema Z##0 so that you can entera reason for the physical inventory difference. Also choose setting 3 or 4 forthe overview screen.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Physical Inventory→Basic Settings for Physical Inventory

Choose Define Customizing Schemas with Basic Settings.

In physical inventory schema Z##0 for your store, select Difference ReasonEntry. In the Overview Screen field, enter 3 and save your entries.




3. Carry out the physical inventory for article 317001 in SAP Retail Store foryour RP## store.

a) Go back to SAP Retail Store and choose Physical Inventory. ChooseDocument Creation.

Enter article number 317001 and choose Create Documents. ChooseExecute and Enter Count. Now choose the physical inventory documentthat you just created from the overview and add any count. Save your data,choose back and switch to Edit Differences.

On the right-hand side, the system displays the counted and postedquantities of items from the physical inventory document. An input-readyfield is also displayed in which you can enter the reason for physicalinventory differences. In the selection box, either the values Wrngly plcd instor. (if count quantity is higher than book quantity), or Poor Quality orDamaged are displayed (if count quantity is lower than book quantity)..



Lesson Summary





TIRT10_2 Lesson: Stock Entry

Lesson: Stock Entry

Lesson OverviewStock entry, inventory counting is only required for value-only articles after a pricechange.



Business ExampleMost inventory is valued and tracked by quantity whereas value-only inventory,usually very low cost items, is tracked only by the value. When a price change isnecessary, the system has no way to revalue this inventory without a count. A pricechange at headquarters will create a count document for value only articles in thestores and distribution centers.

Figure 233: Stock Entry



When the retail price of an article managed on the article level is changed, inventoryrevaluation can be handled by the system.

When the retail price of an article managed on a value-only basis changes, before thesystem can perform a revaluation you must enter the quantity of the material to berevalued.

For a particular date, you can create a list of articles whose retail price changes on thatdate. Before you can do this, however,you must create the relevant retail revaluationdocuments with the status A (“to be counted”) using program RWVKU001 or via thePOS outbound interface.

The listed articles are counted and the results are entered in SAP Retail Store. Thearticles are then automatically revalued in SAP Retail on the basis of this count.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Stock Entry

Lesson Summary





Lesson: Sales Processes

Lesson OverviewThe majority of store sales are to anonymous customers and are recorded by a POSsystem or cash register. However, some sales require additional data that usuallycannot be recorded by a POS system. These sales are discussed in this lesson. Afterinitial customizing in the project, we change roles to be end users in the store toprocess sales.

Sales orders are used in SAP Retail Store if more data is required than can be capturedby a store POS system. Customizing settings must be made for SRS so that a store canuse a simplified process.






Business ExampleYou maintain the Customizing settings for the sales order for SAP Retail Store toenable sales personnel to enter orders for customers and customer master data.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Sales Processes

Possible Business Process for the Sales Order in SRS

Figure 234: Business Process I

When you create a sales order in SAP Retail Store, various scenarios are possible. Inthe first business process, a customer purchases an article in a store that is stocked inthe store. The transaction is recorded in SAP Retail Store and the customer receives aprintout of the document, which allows him or her to pay for at the cash desk and thento pick up the goods afterwards.



Figure 235: Business Process II

In the second business process, a customer purchases an article in a store that is notstocked in the store. The transaction is recorded in SAP Retail Store and subsequentprocessing is carried out in the central SAP Retail system.

Depending on the Customizing settings in SAP Retail, the article (in this example) isdelivered to the customer from the distribution center.

Alternatively, the article is delivered from the distribution center to the store, wherethe customer can then collect it.



Figure 236: Business Process III

In the third scenario, the customer purchases goods in a store that are stocked in neitherthe store nor the corresponding distribution center. The transaction is recorded in SAPRetail Store and subsequent processing is carried out in the central SAP Retail system.The goods are ordered from an external vendor and delivered directly to the customer.

Alternatively, the external vendor can deliver the ordered goods to the distributioncenter or to the store in question. From there they can then be sent to the customer orthe customer can collect the goods directly.



Figure 237: Sales Processes: Basic Settings for Order Entry (1/3)

In the General Sales Data screen area, you specify which incoterms and shippingconditions are to be displayed when you enter a sales transaction in SAP RetailStore. The additional specification of an item type that must be used under certaincircumstances allows for faster processing of the corresponding follow-on documentsin the SAP Retail system.

Incoterms delivered with the system reflect the International Chamber of Commercetrading terms. These are used together with the shipping conditions, which are alsodefined in SD (Sales and Distribution) and the loading group, which is defined inMaterials Management, to automatically calculate the delivery route to the customer.




Sales document control

If you want to provide the option of a third-party delivery, you have to set the “DirectDel. Act” indicator so that this option is offered when you enter sales transactions.

The item categories that will be used in a particular sales document, are set in the next3 fields. Choose the following options:

PD item cat. direct - 5, third-party

Pur. Doc cat. “single PO” - 0 (standard)

Stock transfer - 7, stock transport order

The last field defines the site category of the default supplying site. In this case, thesite category “Store” has been selected.




Scope of Function

Article ID: Which kind of article key is used for the sale? Blank = internal articlenumber; 1 = EAN/UPC code; 2 = interpretation using BAdI.

Set the “Credit Card” indicator if this method of payment is used in your stores.

Select “Entry of Prices” only if stores are allowed to change sales prices.

To simplify creating a customer master record in the store, you must first create atemplate customer. This is simply a customer that you have created in the SAP Retailcustomer master data and refer to in this profile. The template will be used whencreating a business customer master record.

You may also use a reference consumer, which reduces the amount of customer datathat is stored after creating a customer master for individuals.

Select one Scheme to be the standard that can be used for stores that have not beenassigned to a particular scheme.

Once your have configured the basic settings for order entry, assign the sites that areto use the Customizing schema to create orders in SAP Retail Store.



Figure 240: Sales Processes: Grouping of Allowed Sales Document Types

The grouping of allowed order types, allows you to establish which types of ordersa store may issue.

Limiting the order types to those actually used by stores, limits the options available atorder and speeds the process.

Figure 241: Sales Processes: Grouping of Ctries for Cust. Maintenance



Grouping of countries for customer maintenance is also a time saving device duringsales order entry. If, as shown above, a country is made up of regions, you mustspecify these so that the field appears on the customer screens in SAP Retail Store. Forexample, if your stores are all within one country, you can limit the number of countrycodes through which the system has to search when you create a sales transaction.

Figure 242: Sales Prices: Basic Settings for Sales Prices

Price changes for a store, can be performed at the store and take effect the followingday.

Control Data

When you allow stores to change sales prices, you can also set up controls on theirpricing changes.

The number of days past and in the future refer to the display in SAP Retail Store. Youwant to keep the number of days at a level that provides the store manager informationbut not so much as to degrade performance.

The maximum validity period allows control over the length of time for which a storemanager can independently change the price on articles.

Condition Type for Ruling Price: Enter a condition type that is to be used formaintaining ruling prices in SRS. Condition VKPF, is delivered with the system forthis purpose.



Display All Future Prices in Price History: Selecting this field overrides the date inthe number of days in future field and the system will display to the maximum dateassociated with the article.

SAP Retail Store: Sales Order with Stock Reduction

Figure 243: SAP Retail Store



Figure 244: Sales Order

You can either enter sales orders online in the central SAP system – this is usually thecase if customers send their purchase orders by mail, fax, or telephone – or you canhave the system upload them automatically using EDI. Sales orders can be created atstores using SAP Retail Store.



Depending on the Customizing settings that have been made, your system executesfunctions such as the following when a sales order is created:

• Scheduling

Various shipping activities are scheduled depending on the sales order type.

• Availability check

Depending on the schedule line category, the system checks availability on thestaging date, which was determined beforehand by the scheduling function. Ifstaging cannot be guaranteed, the system automatically generates new schedulelines.

• Item/schedule line category determination

Your system determines an item category for each order item and a schedule linecategory for each schedule line for an order item.

• Quantity optimizing (at item or schedule line level)

Quantity optimizing takes place at item level (or schedule line level when youare creating schedule lines manually) depending on the item category. Theoriginal quantity is retained and included in the documents belonging to therelevant sales order.

Figure 245: Sales order: Structure



The sales order is the central document for sales to customers.

A sales order consists of a header and one or more items. The items can be brokendown into schedule lines to allow vendors to use partial deliveries.

Each sales order is assigned to one sales organization, one distribution channel andone division.

Customizing settings for the Sales Order document can be controlled by its associatedorder type.

Figure 246: Stock reduction

The item category TAN has been defined for items that are supplied from thecompany's own warehouse or from a store.

A sales order can contain items that belong to different item categories.

If the store uses SAP Retail Store, a sales order can be supplied using SAP RetailStore. If you use the Outbound Delivery function, the system creates an outbounddelivery document in background processing for the sales order, posts the goods issue,and creates the billing document. You can print out the invoice for the customer.



Figure 247: Creating Invoices

Invoices can be created in SAP Retail in the following two ways:

• By entering a specific sales order or delivery for which you want to create aninvoice.

• By selecting several reference documents for which invoices are to be createdfrom the billing due list. The documents can be selected according to criteriasuch as the ordering party and the destination country.

In general, you can create any billing documents using these two methods. Insteadof sales orders and deliveries, also credit/debit memos or return documents can beused as reference documents.



Figure 248: Billing: Billing Document Structure

A billing document (for example, an invoice, credit memo, debit memo) is assignedto one company code and one billing type only to control the document (for example,F1 = invoice, G2 = credit memo, L2 = debit memo; for more information, seeCustomizing).

A billing document consists of a header and one or more items.



Figure 249: Billing: Integration With Financial Accounting

While on the SD side a billing document is generated, a corresponding accountingdocument is generated in financial accounting. The system finds the relevant accounts(automatic account determination) which are then posted accordingly.



Figure 250: Document Flow in the Sales Order

The documents in the sales and distribution process are connected by the documentflow. This allows you to display the history and the status of your order in the salesand distribution process.

You can display the document flow as a list of interconnected documents. Dependingon the document that you want to use to call up the list, all preceding and subsequentdocuments are displayed.

From this list, you can display the relevant documents or status overview for thedocuments in question.

This grants you a quick overview of the status of your sales processes, thereby helpingyou to answer customer questions quickly and efficiently.



SAP Retail Store: Sales Order with Third-Party Business

Figure 251: Third-Party Business

Item category TAS has been defined for third-party order items. This definition resultsfrom a combination of sales document type, item category group and two other controloptions in Customizing. The item category group is assigned in the article master.

Additionally, you can create alternative item categories here, which you can selectmanually in the sales order item.



Figure 252: Control settings for Item Category TAS

No outbound deliveries are generated for the third-party items in your order. Thismeans that the goods issue is not posted in your internal supply source (for example,the distribution center). For this reason, the Customizing settings specify that amovement type is not required and an outbound delivery is not generated.

In the standard system, purchase requisitions are normally generated automaticallyfor third-party order items when the sales order is saved. The Customizing settingsalso specify a document type for the purchase requisition, as well as the item category(when displaying this internally) and the account assignment category.



Figure 253: Quantity And Schedule Changes

Purchase orders are generated as purchase requisitions for third-party order processing.

When a purchase order is created, the system automatically copies the recipient'saddress from the relevant sales order and uses it as the delivery address for the order.You can create a purchase order text for every third-party item in the sales order. Thetexts are automatically copied to the purchase order when it is created.

The purchase order number that is generated appears in the sales order document flow.You can then jump to the purchase order from here.

Changes that are made to the quantities and delivery dates in the purchase orderare automatically copied into the sales order. This type of change is necessary, forexample, when the vendor confirms different delivery dates and quantities for thepurchase order.

Hint: If a purchase order already exists for a business transaction and youwant to make changes to the sales order, they have to be done manually in thepurchase order as they cannot be updated automatically. This could mean,for example, that customers receive merchandise although the sales order hasalready been cancelled. To monitor the situation, you can generate a list ofall sales orders with third-party items in which the quantities recorded uponpurchase and sales are different. You can print the list by running reportSDMFSTRP.



Figure 254: Creating Invoices

Invoices can be created in SAP Retail in the following two ways:

• By entering a specific sales order or delivery for which you want to create aninvoice

• By selecting several reference documents for which invoices are to be createdfrom the billing due list. The documents can be selected according to criteriasuch as the ordering party and the destination country.

You can create as many billing documents as you want using these two methods.Instead of sales order and delivery, credit/debit memos or return documents aregenerated as reference documents.



Exercise 22: Reference Customer


• Create a customer master record as a template

Business ExampleYou will be using SAP Retail Store for sales processes. To make it easy for storepersonnel, you must create a template customer to use at your store. You need thiscustomer before you customize the basic settings for sales.

Task: Create Reference CustomerYou want to create a customer in SAP Retail who has the profile of your store’sregular business customers.

Some general information about your store that you probably need is:

Field Name or Data Type Value

Company code R300



Division R1

Region AZ

Postal Code for Tucson 85740

Tax Jurisdiction AZ0000000

Transportation Zone 0000002

Reconciliation account 121000

Term of payment 0001

1. Which path do you choose to create a reference customer?




2. Create a new reference customer. The account group for your reference customeris: Customer (General Internal No). In the header area of the initial screen,leave the Customer field empty since when you create a customer in this accountgroup, the system will assign an internal number. Enter the company code andsales area data of your store.

On the General Data screen, choose the Address tab page and enter:


Name RP## Reference Customer

Search Term 1 RP

Street/House Number Ref. Street 99999

Postal Code/City 85740 Tucson

Country US

Region AZ



Language English

Now choose Company Code Data, select the Account Management tab page andenter 121000 in the Recon. Account field.

Now choose the Payment Transactions tab page and enter 0001 in the “Terms ofPayment” field.

Finally, choose Sales Area Data. Enter the following:


Sales District 000003, Southwestern Region

Price Group 02 Occasional Buyer

Also specify some shipping data. Choose the Shipping tab page and enter:

Field Name Values

Delivery Priority 02, Normal

Shipping Conditions 01, Standard

Save your reference customer and note the customer number.



Solution 22: Reference Customer

Task: Create Reference CustomerYou want to create a customer in SAP Retail who has the profile of your store’sregular business customers.

Some general information about your store that you probably need is:

Field Name or Data Type Value

Company code R300



Division R1

Region AZ

Postal Code for Tucson 85740



Reconciliation account 121000

Term of payment 0001

1. Which path do you choose to create a reference customer?

a) Master Data → Edit Customers→ Business Partner→ Customer→Create → Full

2. Create a new reference customer. The account group for your reference customeris: Customer (General Internal No). In the header area of the initial screen,leave the Customer field empty since when you create a customer in this accountgroup, the system will assign an internal number. Enter the company code andsales area data of your store.

On the General Data screen, choose the Address tab page and enter:


Name RP## Reference Customer

Search Term 1 RP

Street/House Number Ref. Street 99999





Postal Code/City 85740 Tucson

Country US

Region AZ



Language English

Now choose Company Code Data, select the Account Management tab page andenter 121000 in the Recon. Account field.

Now choose the Payment Transactions tab page and enter 0001 in the “Terms ofPayment” field.

Finally, choose Sales Area Data. Enter the following:


Sales District 000003, Southwestern Region

Price Group 02 Occasional Buyer

Also specify some shipping data. Choose the Shipping tab page and enter:

Field Name Values

Delivery Priority 02, Normal

Shipping Conditions 01, Standard

Save your reference customer and note the customer number.

a) Enter your settings as specified in the task. The Tax Jurisdiction andTransportation Zone fields are displayed when you choose AdditionalFields.



Exercise 23: Sales Order Customizing


• Configure the sales order area in Customizing for SAP Retail Store

Business ExampleYour company stocks expensive articles in the distribution center, from where they areshipped directly to the customers. Specify customizing settings so that you can recordthese sales transactions in your store using SAP Retail Store.

Task 1: Define and Assign Customizing SchemaYou want to establish sales order controls in Customizing for SAP Retail Store. Youtherefore use your new reference customer. You plan a direct delivery to the customer(by third-party business).

1. Which path do you choose to access Customizing for sales orders?

2. Create a schema ZP##. The easiest way is to copy the existing 0001 schema andchange the data according to your requirements.

3. Which fields do you have to change to achieve the required result?

4. Assign your ZP## Customizing schema to your RP## site.

Task 2: Define Permitted Sales Document TypesYou now have to define the sales document types that are to be used in your store.You require the sales document type Order.

1. Check the sales document types that are already allowed. Display groupingschema 0001 with its document types. Which document types are displayed?




2. Do you have to create a new group of allowed order types?

3. How can you make sure that your RP## store can use these order types? Areany additional steps required?

4. However, you can also assign this schema to your RP## site. This setting allowsvarious stores to be able to work with different sales document types.

Which settings do you have to maintain?

Task 3: Check Country GroupsCheck the country groupings. Since the SAP Retail system contains over 250 countrycodes, the number of codes that the system has to check can be decreased by groupingthem together and assigning the groups to a site.

1. Which path do you choose to check country groupings? Will it make a differenceif you do not assign a country grouping code to your site?

2. Assign the appropriate country grouping to your RP## site. Since your companyis in the United States, choose the grouping schema for the United States.



Solution 23: Sales Order Customizing

Task 1: Define and Assign Customizing SchemaYou want to establish sales order controls in Customizing for SAP Retail Store. Youtherefore use your new reference customer. You plan a direct delivery to the customer(by third-party business).

1. Which path do you choose to access Customizing for sales orders?

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Sales Order→ BasicSettings for Entering Sales Documents→ Define Customizing Schemaswith Basic Settings

2. Create a schema ZP##. The easiest way is to copy the existing 0001 schema andchange the data according to your requirements.

a) Select 0001 (standard schema) and choose Copy As... Enter your schemanumber ZP##.

3. Which fields do you have to change to achieve the required result?

a) Enter the following:


Entry of Prices Set indicator

Templ. Customer Number of the reference customerthat you just created

Consumer Do not set indicator

4. Assign your ZP## Customizing schema to your RP## site.

a) IMG: IMG Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Sales Order→Basic Settings for Entering Sales Documents→ Assign CustomizingSchemas to Sites

Choose New Entries and enter your site and schema in the correspondingfields. Save your entries.




Task 2: Define Permitted Sales Document TypesYou now have to define the sales document types that are to be used in your store.You require the sales document type Order.

1. Check the sales document types that are already allowed. Display groupingschema 0001 with its document types. Which document types are displayed?

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Sales Order→ Groupingof Allowed Sales Document Types and choose Maintain Grouping Schemaand Assign Sales Document Types.

The document types inquiry, quotation, returns, and order are displayed.

2. Do you have to create a new group of allowed order types?

Answer: No. All of the order types that you are likely to use are already defined.

3. How can you make sure that your RP## store can use these order types? Areany additional steps required?

Answer: Since the standard order is defined as the default setting, this isdisplayed as standard.

4. However, you can also assign this schema to your RP## site. This setting allowsvarious stores to be able to work with different sales document types.

Which settings do you have to maintain?

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Sales Order→ Groupingof Allowed Sales Document Types

Choose Assignment of Grouping Schema to Sites and then New Entries.Enter your site and schema in the corresponding fields. Save your entries.




Task 3: Check Country GroupsCheck the country groupings. Since the SAP Retail system contains over 250 countrycodes, the number of codes that the system has to check can be decreased by groupingthem together and assigning the groups to a site.

1. Which path do you choose to check country groupings? Will it make a differenceif you do not assign a country grouping code to your site?

Answer: IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Sales Order→Grouping of Countries for Customer Maintenance

Choose: Maintain Grouping Schema and Assign Countries

The system displays at least two grouping schemas: the first is for Germany andthe second is for the United States.

In this instance, it will make a difference. Since the country schema for Germanyis indicated as the default entry, you cannot enter the United States as yourcustomer's country of residence if you do not define any additional deviations.This also applies to entering other data (such as postal codes or states) that ischecked using the respective country code.

2. Assign the appropriate country grouping to your RP## site. Since your companyis in the United States, choose the grouping schema for the United States.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Sales Order→ Groupingof Countries for Customer Maintenance

Choose Assignment of Grouping Schema to Sites. Then choose New Entriesand enter your RP## site and the country grouping 0002 (US).



Exercise 24: Online Sales Order


• Process sales orders online.

Business ExampleOnce you have maintained the relevant Customizing settings, you can create varioussales orders using SAP Retail Store. In the first sales order, the customer orders goodsthat are stocked in store. You create an invoice that the customer pays. The customercan then take the goods directly.

In the second case, the customer orders goods that are not stocked in store. You musttherefore order these goods from your distribution center. The goods are delivered toyou in the store, where the customer can collect them.

In the third case, the customer orders goods in your store that are stocked neitherin the store nor in the corresponding distribution center. In this case, you order thegoods externally with the note that the external vendor is to deliver the goods directlyto the customer (third-party business).

Task 1: Create a New Customer in SRSYou are an employee in store RP##. A new customer wants to buy a crate of the4-set red-wine glasses (article 317064) and have them delivered to his or her addressfrom the distribution center. You first create a new customer master record in SAPRetail Store.

1. Which settings/path do you choose to create a new customer in SRS?

2. Create a new customer with the following data. When you enter the data, use thecorresponding fields for persons (private customer):





First Name any

Last Name any

Street any

House Number any

Postal Code 36784

Location Thomasville

Region Alabama

Country United States

Confirm your entries and choose Create Customer.

3. Do you need any further information to create a customer master record?

Task 2: Create Customer Order I – Delivery by StoreOnce you have created the customer master record, you create a sales order. In thiscase, the customer buys goods that you stock in the store and that the customer cantake directly.

1. Your new customer buys article 317002 and wants to take the goods immediately.Which setting do you have to configure? Do you have to know the price ofthe article?

2. Choose the Conditions tab page and maintain a customer discount of 2% for thisitem. How does the final price change?

Now save the sales order by choosing Create Document. The system issues anorder number. Make a note of this.

___________________________




3. Since the merchandise is available in your store's stock, the customer can payfor it directly and collect it from the stock issue. The customer now takes thesales order printout to the POS and pays for the merchandise (POS processing).He or she then takes the sales order and the cash register receipt to goods issueto pick up the case of wine.

The SAP Retail Store functions control that an outbound delivery document isgenerated automatically for your sales order when you want to issue the goods.

In your role as store associate in stock issue, restart the Sales Order function,enter the customer number for your new customer, and choose Deliver. Enter therequired delivery quantity, and deliver the goods (delivery generation with goodsissue posting). The system creates a billing document in the background..

4. You are on the initial screen of the sales order, and you want to check your salesorder. Enter the number of your order, display it, and choose Document Flow.Which documents were generated for your standard order?

5. (optional) You can also display your sales order in SAP Retail. There you mustalso go to the document flow and display the status overview.

Task 3: Create Customer Order II – Delivery byDistribution CenterYour new customer wants to purchase a case of 4-set red-wine glasses (article 317064)in your store. Since this article is currently out of stock, you order it from yourdistribution center and have it delivered to the customer.

1. Which setting do you have to maintain? Do you have to know the price ofthe article?




Task 4: Create Sales Order III – Delivery by ExternalVendor (Third-Party Delivery)You new customer wants to order a very particular wine. You have to order it from theexternal vendor, who then delivers the goods directly to the customer. The customerwants the wine to be delivered in three weeks' time.

1. Create a sales order for the same customer from Task 1. Article 317008 has tobe delivered to the customer by an external vendor. The order is assigned ordernumber 20##, and the customer receives a 3% customer discount on the order.

Which data do you see when you choose Refresh?

2. In this sales order, the merchandise is delivered directly to the customer. Checkwhether a purchase requisition was created as a follow-on document in SAPRetail, and make a note of its document number. You can enter purchase ordernumber 20## to search for your order. Display the document flow and thestatus overview.



Solution 24: Online Sales Order

Task 1: Create a New Customer in SRSYou are an employee in store RP##. A new customer wants to buy a crate of the4-set red-wine glasses (article 317064) and have them delivered to his or her addressfrom the distribution center. You first create a new customer master record in SAPRetail Store.

1. Which settings/path do you choose to create a new customer in SRS?

Answer: In the Sales area, select Sales Order. Select the “Customer”radiobutton and choose Create.

2. Create a new customer with the following data. When you enter the data, use thecorresponding fields for persons (private customer):


First Name any

Last Name any

Street any

House Number any

Postal Code 36784

Location Thomasville

Region Alabama

Country United States

Confirm your entries and choose Create Customer.


3. Do you need any further information to create a customer master record?

Answer: No, you need only the name and address to create a full customermaster record. The missing data will be copied from the reference customer.




Task 2: Create Customer Order I – Delivery by StoreOnce you have created the customer master record, you create a sales order. In thiscase, the customer buys goods that you stock in the store and that the customer cantake directly.

1. Your new customer buys article 317002 and wants to take the goods immediately.Which setting do you have to configure? Do you have to know the price ofthe article?

a) Choose Create Order. So that the customer can take the goods directly,choose Customer Collection in the header data area (default).

Now choose Own Store from the Pick Up At field.

The order is assigned purchase order number 15##.

On the Sales tab page, enter article 317002 with quantity 1 and unit CSE.Choose Refresh. The system determines the article short text and a priceof USD 159.99 per case.

2. Choose the Conditions tab page and maintain a customer discount of 2% for thisitem. How does the final price change?

Now save the sales order by choosing Create Document. The system issues anorder number. Make a note of this.

___________________________

a) Make the settings as specified in the task. The final price is now USD156.79.

3. Since the merchandise is available in your store's stock, the customer can payfor it directly and collect it from the stock issue. The customer now takes thesales order printout to the POS and pays for the merchandise (POS processing).He or she then takes the sales order and the cash register receipt to goods issueto pick up the case of wine.

The SAP Retail Store functions control that an outbound delivery document isgenerated automatically for your sales order when you want to issue the goods.

In your role as store associate in stock issue, restart the Sales Order function,enter the customer number for your new customer, and choose Deliver. Enter therequired delivery quantity, and deliver the goods (delivery generation with goodsissue posting). The system creates a billing document in the background..





4. You are on the initial screen of the sales order, and you want to check your salesorder. Enter the number of your order, display it, and choose Document Flow.Which documents were generated for your standard order?

Answer: The following documents were generated for your standard order:

• Outbound delivery

• GD goods issue: delvy

• Invoice

5. (optional) You can also display your sales order in SAP Retail. There you mustalso go to the document flow and display the status overview.

a) Sales→ Sales Order→ Order→ Display

Enter your sales order number or search using your purchase order number15#. Select Environment→ Display document flow To access a follow-ondocument, select the respective line and choose Display Document.Alternatively, from the sales order initial screen, select Environment→Status Overview .

Task 3: Create Customer Order II – Delivery byDistribution CenterYour new customer wants to purchase a case of 4-set red-wine glasses (article 317064)in your store. Since this article is currently out of stock, you order it from yourdistribution center and have it delivered to the customer.

1. Which setting do you have to maintain? Do you have to know the price ofthe article?

a) In the Sales Order area, choose Create Order. So that the goods aredelivered directly to the address of your new customer, choose Deliveryfrom the header data area. Then Refresh the screen.

Now choose Distribution Center from the Delivery By field.

The order is assigned purchase order number 23##.

On the Sales tab page, enter article 317064 with quantity 1 and unit CSE.Choose Refresh again. The system determines the article short text anda price of USD 1499.00 per case.

Now save the sales order by choosing Create Document. The system issuesan order number. Make a note of this.

___________________________




Task 4: Create Sales Order III – Delivery by ExternalVendor (Third-Party Delivery)You new customer wants to order a very particular wine. You have to order it from theexternal vendor, who then delivers the goods directly to the customer. The customerwants the wine to be delivered in three weeks' time.

1. Create a sales order for the same customer from Task 1. Article 317008 has tobe delivered to the customer by an external vendor. The order is assigned ordernumber 20##, and the customer receives a 3% customer discount on the order.

Which data do you see when you choose Refresh?

a) On the initial screen, enter the customer number for the customer you justcreated. Make the settings specified in the task, and maintain the followingdata on the Create Order screen:


Delivery Select

Pick Up At Direct delivery

Sales Document Type Standard order

Requested Deliv. Date (Day) Three weeks from today

PO number 20##

Article 317008

Target Qty 1

UM EA

After you choose Refresh you will see the description and price of thearticle. The description is: Andretti Cabernet Sauvignon 0,75l / 1998

The price is USD 259.99.

To grant the discount to the customer, choose the Conditions tab page, andselect customer discount as the condition type. Maintain the amount of thecustomer discount as specified in the task. Then refresh your data. ChooseCreate Document to save your sales order. The system issues an orderconfirmation. From there, go to the Initial Screen.




2. In this sales order, the merchandise is delivered directly to the customer. Checkwhether a purchase requisition was created as a follow-on document in SAPRetail, and make a note of its document number. You can enter purchase ordernumber 20## to search for your order. Display the document flow and thestatus overview.

a) Sales→ Sales Order→ Order→ Display

b) Enter your sales order number or search using your purchase ordernumber, 20##. Select Environment→ Display document flow. To accessa follow-on document, select the respective line and choose DisplayDocument. Alternatively, from the sales order initial screen, selectEnvironment→ Status Overview. In the status overview, you can expandthe Purchase Requisition follow-on document to view its document number.Double-click the document number, and open the item overview. Itemcategory S determines that the merchandise will be delivered directly to thecustomer, not to store R5##. The customer data of your new customer isdisplayed in the item details data on the Delivery Address tab page.



Lesson Summary







TIRT10_2 Lesson: Cash Balancing

Lesson: Cash Balancing

Lesson OverviewThe convenience store, which is an extension of SAP Retail Store, provides twofinancial transactions. When configured correctly, cash balancing (also known ascash control) provides a tool that clears non-POS cash transactions with the cashrecorded by the POS system. Also, expense invoice can be customized to recordnon-petty cash expenses.

This lesson covers cash balancing (cash control) for convenience stores and theCustomizing settings required for online use.




Business ExampleAccounting is important to all retail concerns. Cash payments to a store are recordedin the POS system and uploaded to the SAP Retail system overnight. However, otherPOS transactions can also be recorded using cash balancing.



Figure 255: Cash Balancing: Overview

The POS systems capture the flow of cash, checks, and charges into the store. Instores with POS systems that can capture financial transactions, there is a POS IDoc tocarry such financial information.

Smaller or less sophisticated POS systems do not have the capability to transferfinancial information. In these cases, SAP Retail Store Cash Balancing can be used torecord all non-POS transactions made by back-office personnel.



Figure 256: Cash Balancing: Define Reason Code for Differences

In customizing, you establish groups of reasons that can be used to describe thedifferences between actual and expected cash transactions.

Then you further refine those groups into specific reason codes that are common toyour stores. For example, the group above for cash balancing includes reasons whythere might be a difference between reported cash and counted cash.

Figure 257: Cash Balancing: Define Account Grouping (1/5)



For each account group, you have to define multiple items during the implementationprocess. Each step specifies how the system processes data after it is received andhow the data is to be displayed on the screen.

Having defined all of these details in the profiles makes it quite easy for theback-office personnel to enter correct data.


The “Group” screen contains fields that are used by all subgroups of a particulargroup. You can use the group profile to configure the information that is used on theSAP Retail Store screen, as well as the general overriding financial information that isfurther refined in subsequent profiles.

The Document type identifies the document type for financial postings.

BAdI Filter is the filter value for controlling the screen dialog and posting to theaccounts.

The chart of accounts identifies to which CoA the specific accounts belong.

The reason group links the reason group to this profile.

Inbound Profile – Specifies the POS inbound profile that is used by this group andthat controls the posting of sales.

Text for Account, Amount, and Postings – In these fields, you can enter your owndescriptions for these topics to be displayed on the screen.



Assignment – Here, you can enter your description for the Assignment column onthe screen.


Each group will have sub-groups associated with it. These are defined in the Lowgroup screen, beginning with the sub-group name.

Sequence – Describes the position on the display screen. The items used the mostshould be assigned to the lower sequence numbers.

Totals Row – Do you require a total? (Y/N).

Reason for Deviation – None, Optional, or Required at entry.

Subgroup text – Text to be displayed on the screen.




For each sub-group's detail there is additional Account Line detail, including accountdetermination procedures.

When you use the acct determination procedure POS_FI_TRX the screen displays theshown additional fields. The input from the store is dependent on the POS inboundprofile “Transaction Type-Dependent Control of Financial Transactions,” whichcontains the detailed information.

The data in the amounts fields identify the line item of the transaction in the inboundprofile. That line item is linked to the appropriate G/L account.

Note: if you choose Direct Entry for Account determination, the FItransaction field for a POS inbound profile name is gone and the amountfields are completed by entering the specific G/L account numbers for posted,counted and difference amounts.




The Breakdown screen allows you to define the sequence in which items of thissubgroup will display on the screen. This is only necessary in cases where thesubgroup can be further subdivided, as in currency types. For example, if your storeaccepts CAD as well as USD, each would be defined on the breakdown screen.

Figure 262: Cash Balancing: Assign Account Groupings to Company Codes



Each company code must be assigned to a grouping before these can be assignedto your stores.

On this screen, you can also specify whether posted amounts and difference amountsare to be displayed on the screen.



Lesson Summary






Lesson: Expense Invoice

Lesson OverviewExpense Invoice is a second function available through the convenience store.Customizing must be completed before the function can be used through SAP RetailStore.




Business ExampleFor some deliveries cash on delivery is due, or they require direct payment for anotherreason. If the amount is higher than the petty cash limit (petty amount), the storemanager issues a check and records the payment using the expense invoice.

Figure 263: Expense Invoice:Overview


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Expense Invoice

Local vendors provide goods and services to specific stores.

To ensure that cash movements are controlled, the store records the invoice and thepayment using Expense Invoice.

Figure 264: Expense Invoice: Define Account Grouping

The system provides a group of items to set so that store personnel are given limitedbut adequate selections. Each expense type is grouped so that little additional effortis required from the personnel.

Figure 265: Expense Invoice: Define Account Grouping



On the first screen, you identify items that are valid for the entire group of expenses.Only one expense group can be assigned to a store.

Define the following:

• The document type for posting the invoice for each group

• The chart of accounts that is to be used

• The procedure for calculating taxes

• The Business Add-In (BAdI) for transferring data

You can also select “All Taxes” to display all tax types on the screen. However,leaving it blank displays all taxes that are active for the G/L accounts assigned to theparticular expense types.

Figure 266: Expense Invoice: Define G/L Accounts Details

For each group of expense invoice accounts, each individual general ledger accountthat can be used in the stores is defined, along with the text that should be displayedin the drop-down list for the accounts. It is not necessary for store staff to knowaccount numbers.



Figure 267: Expense Invoice: Define Currencies

If an account can be paid in different currencies, they can be defined in the Currenciessection of the dialog structure.

Figure 268: Expense Invoice: Define Tax Code Details

In the first screen, you identified the tax procedure used by the company. In this sectionof the dialog structure, you define the specific tax codes associated with an account.



Figure 269: Expense Invoice: Assign Account Groupings to Company Codes

Each Company Code must be assigned to the Expense Invoice it will use, beforethe function can be assigned to stores.



Lesson Summary






Test Your Knowledge

1. Which functions are available as standard in SAP Retail Store?



Answers

1. Which functions are available as standard in SAP Retail Store?

Answer: Information, master data, purchasing, inventory management, sales


Unit 8Reports in SAP Retail Store

Unit OverviewSeveral store functions are dependent on the information in the SAP Retail system.The reports that are delivered with the system are described in this Unit.


• Describe the reports available with SAP Retail Store

• Release reports to display in SAP Retail Store

• Check the allocation tables of your store

• Review articles going on promotion

Unit ContentsLesson: Reports in SAP Retail . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .598Lesson: Allocation Tables. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .601Lesson: Promotion.. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .605


Unit 8: Reports in SAP Retail Store TIRT10_2

Lesson: Reports in SAP Retail

Lesson OverviewStores require specific information that is maintained at headquarters. SAP RetailStore provides easy access to these reports.




Business ExampleStores need information to support decision making. SAP Retail Store allows you toaccess these reports to support store planning and operations.

Figure 270: Information Overview


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Reports in SAP Retail

Information is readily available for decision making at the store level. The reports thatare currently available through SAP Retail Store are:

• Allocation table

• Promotions

• Stock Overview

• Open Goods Receipts

• Store order follow-on documents

• Standard Analyses

– Article

– Promotion

– POS: Cashier

– POS: Sales as per receipt

– STRPS

– Customer/Article

– Market-basket analysis - sales receipt

– Market-basket analysis - sales receipt/article

Instead of using standard analyses, you can add hyperlinks to SAP BI reports in theSAP Retail Store menu. This is a project solution and requires you to adjust the HTMLtemplate for the main menu. By adding additional hyperlinks, you can integrate SAPBI reports as well as ABAP reports via Web GUI in the main menu.



Lesson Summary





TIRT10_2 Lesson: Allocation Tables

Lesson: Allocation Tables

Lesson OverviewSome minor fine tuning is required to view allocation tables at the store.



Business ExampleSome retail companies order goods centrally and then assign the products to thestores. This is known in merchandise logistics as a push concept. Store personnelneed advance notice of what will be delivered and when, in order to prepare for thegoods receipt.

Figure 271: Allocation Table: Overview (1/2)



Allocation tables are tools to plan, control and monitor the flow of merchandise todistribution centers and stores.

Allocation tables can be used to:

• Allocate merchandise to sites (and determination of the quantities per store)

• Determine vendors as supply sources

• Generate follow-on documents (purchase orders, deliveries)

• Notify sites of allocations and receive quantity requests.

Figure 272: Allocation: Customizing for SRS (1/2)

Notification Categories for SAP Retail Store are documented in the system. Thesecustomizing settings are primarily used to define notifications which should betransmitted via hard copy or EDI. Here, headquarters can also determine whether thestores should be able to change quantities.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Allocation Tables

Figure 273: Allocation: Customizing for SRS (2/2)

For SAP Retail Store, the only relevant setting here is “No Message Determination”since the stores can view the respective allocation tables directly from SAP Retail.



Lesson Summary




TIRT10_2 Lesson: Promotion

Lesson: Promotion

Lesson OverviewAfter headquarters releases promotions to the stores, they can be viewed in SAPRetail Store.



Business ExampleStores need advance notice to be prepared for promotions. SAP Retail Store givesthem the opportunity to do that.

Figure 274: Aktionen: Was der Kunde sieht

Promotions to the public seem quite simple. The store simply lowers the price forselected articles.

However, from a logistics and accounting view point, much additional work must bedone to ensure that the right merchandise is on promotion and the right volume ofmerchandise is available at the point of sale.



Figure 275: Aktionen: Was dahinter steckt

Executing promotions comprises many different processes and therefore causes quitea workload in headquarters. Through SAP Retail and SAP Retail Store, promotionplanning and execution can be automated to quite an extent.


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Promotion

Lesson Summary




Unit 9Accessing Master Data

Unit OverviewAlthough saved until last, you will note that Master Data is in the center of the RetailStore screen. This is to emphasize how important master data is to the system.

For the most part, master data can only be displayed in the store. However, there areexceptions. For example, customer master data can be created and changed sincethe store is closest to the customer and therefore in the best position to gather thisinformation. New articles and vendors for local purchases can be proposed to headoffice. Headquarters only has the ability to import, expand and activate these masterdata for the store.


• Display specific master data

• Describe the standard options to access master data

• Customize the article master for use in the SAP Retail Store

• Display article data using SAP Retail Store

• Customize the basic settings for the vendor master in SRS

Unit ContentsLesson: Introduction to Master Data . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .610

Exercise 25: Sales Price Changes in SRS.. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .615Lesson: Article Master Data . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .621

Exercise 26: Article Master Data in SRS .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .625Lesson: Vendor Master Data Maintenance.. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .634

Exercise 27: Vendor Master Data . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .637


Unit 9: Accessing Master Data TIRT10_2

Lesson: Introduction to Master Data

Lesson OverviewFor the most part, stores can only display master data; however, there are exceptions.For example, customer master data can be created and changed since the store isclosest to the customer and therefore in the best position to gather this information.New articles and vendors for local purchases can be proposed to head office.




Business ExampleThere are times when information specific to a store are required. Accessing masterdata makes that information available.

Introduction to Master Data

Figure 276: Accessing Master Data


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Introduction to Master Data

Several types of master data are accessible at the store using SAP Retail Store.

Because of earlier lessons, you know about the following processes and are ableto use them:

• Assortment list data - see the “Store Assortment List” lesson in unit 7

• Customer master data - see the “Sales Processes” lesson in unit 7

You can also view your own Store master data using SAP Retail Store.

Space management information can also be made available.

Figure 277: Store - General Data

Store master data includes all the information required for the store to function asa selling site.



Figure 278: Store: Layout

Information on the grouping of articles in Layout modules and the assigning ofmodules to the store is also found in the store master data.

Figure 279: SAP Retail Store - Space Management

A variety of planograms can be provided in SAP Retail using an interface for externalspace management systems.

The current shelf structure and the next planned structure can be viewed directlyusing SAP Retail Store.



If the implemented space management software supports the conversion of planogramsto HTML format, individual shelves and products can be displayed graphically.



Exercise 25: Sales Price Changes in SRS



• Customize the settings for sales price changes in SAP Retail Store

Business ExampleYour stores must be able to react quickly to changes in local competition. Youtherefore want them to be able to change prices themselves at short notice.

Task 1: Customizing Settings for Conditions (SalesPrices)You believe it is useful for stores to have an overview of the price history of individualarticles and be able to change the prices.

1. Branch to Customizing for the basic settings for sales prices and create yourown ZP## schema. The easiest way is to copy the existing schema 0001 andchange it to meet your requirements.

2. How can you set a maximum limit for the validity of a price change? Set thisto 15 (days).

3. Is there a separate customizing table to allow your store to change the prices?

4. Now assign your Customizing schema for sales prices to your RP## site.




Task 2: Change Sales PricesFrom the end of this week, one of your competitors is having a sale on champagneflutes. You believe that you have to respond to the price pressure in this case and soyou lower the price for article 317065 (champagne flutes, 4-piece) for the same period.

1. How do you lower your store price?

When will the price change take effect? Why?

2. Display the price history of your glasses and reduce the price by $5. What is thenew sales price?

Task 3: Display Price Overview in SAP RetailIn your role as a store employee, after having lowered the sales price in the SAP RetailStore, you now want to check this change in the SAP Retail system.

1. Go to the price overview to determine which new sales prices has been defined.Enter the following selection criteria:


Article 317065



Site RP##



Solution 25: Sales Price Changes in SRS

Task 1: Customizing Settings for Conditions (SalesPrices)You believe it is useful for stores to have an overview of the price history of individualarticles and be able to change the prices.

1. Branch to Customizing for the basic settings for sales prices and create yourown ZP## schema. The easiest way is to copy the existing schema 0001 andchange it to meet your requirements.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Sales Prices→ BasicSettings for Sales Prices

Choose Define Customizing Schemas with Basic Settings. Select thestandard schema 0001 and copy it. Enter your schema number ZP##.

2. How can you set a maximum limit for the validity of a price change? Set thisto 15 (days).

a) Remain in your new ZP## schema. In the standard schema, the validityperiod is not limited. Enter 15 to limit the validity period for price changesto a maximum of 15 days. Note also that this schema allows historicalprices for 30 days in the past and planned price changes 30 days in thefuture to display.

3. Is there a separate customizing table to allow your store to change the prices?

a) No, there is not a separate customizing table to allow stores to changeprices. You activated the option when you selected the check box Entry ofPrices in Basic Settings for Entering Sales Documents.

4. Now assign your Customizing schema for sales prices to your RP## site.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Sales Prices→ BasicSettings for Sales Prices

Choose Assignment of Customizing Schemas to Sites. Then choose NewEntries and enter your RP## site and your Customizing schema ZP##.




Task 2: Change Sales PricesFrom the end of this week, one of your competitors is having a sale on champagneflutes. You believe that you have to respond to the price pressure in this case and soyou lower the price for article 317065 (champagne flutes, 4-piece) for the same period.

1. How do you lower your store price?

When will the price change take effect? Why?

Answer: In SAP Retail Store, choose Sales Prices from the Master Data area.Enter article number 317065 and choose Change Price.

The defaulted validity period extends from tomorrow to fifteen days later. Thisis because the system requires at least one day lead time to send the price changeto the POS system. The validity end date is based on the maximum allowedvalidity period set in the basic Settings for Sales Prices.

2. Display the price history of your glasses and reduce the price by $5. What is thenew sales price?

a) Choose Show Price History. In the New Price field, enter USD 39.99and choose Save.

Task 3: Display Price Overview in SAP RetailIn your role as a store employee, after having lowered the sales price in the SAP RetailStore, you now want to check this change in the SAP Retail system.

1. Go to the price overview to determine which new sales prices has been defined.Enter the following selection criteria:





Article 317065



Site RP##

a) Master Data→ Price Planning→ Environment→ Price Overview

Enter the selection criteria as specified in the task and select [Execute].The following data is displayed:

Distribution chain RP10/R2

Site RP##

Article 317065

Valid from Valid To Sales price Source

Today Today 44.99 Stndrd

Tomorrow 31.12.9999 39.99 Stndrd



Lesson Summary





TIRT10_2 Lesson: Article Master Data

Lesson: Article Master Data

Lesson OverviewCustomizing specifically for article master data in SAP Retail Store must be completedbefore a store can propose new articles or changes for local articles.




Business ExampleSome articles that are sold in stores are provided by local vendors. For example, aconvenience store is supplied with milk from the local dairy. These articles may needto be changed from time to time and new articles added for the store. Article Masterdata in SAP Retail Store can be set to allow the stores to propose new articles.

Figure 280: Article Master Data: Basic Settings.



Local article master data changes can be allowed in SAP Retail Store whencustomizing is complete. You begin with the Cross-Site Settings for the Article Masterand then you set the Scope of functionality in the Basic Settings.

You can set whether or not listing is allowed, or if only local listing is allowed. Youalso can set if discontinuation should be allowed.

Whether the stores can add EANs and/or vendors is also determined in the BasicSettings.

Since parked articles are posted to PRICAT and are processed by head office, acatalog reference can be added to distinguish articles that have been added in SAPRetail Store from those sent from vendors.

Adding a prefix for local assortments or listing modules, allows one to check in thesystem which articles are assigned to a store.

When an article without a manufacturer code (EAN/UPC) is proposed, an internallyissued code has to be assigned as an alternate.

You can, however, override the necessity of assigning an EAN during the store'spreliminary input.

Figure 281: Article Master: Units of Measure

There are four tables to identify the Units of Measure allowed for the articles. Thefirst identifies all Units of Measure used by a particular Grouping schema. These arefurther refined by schemas grouping the units by:



Length

Weight

Volume

Figure 282: Article Master: Dialog Structure

Only two maintenance tasks are available to stores in SAP Retail Store. On each tabpage that is delivered with the system, the fields available for each task are determinedon the following subscreen. Each field can be set to the following: display only,hidden, required, and ready for input.



Exercise 26: Article Master Data in SRS


• Display article master data for an existing article

• Create a new article master locally

Business ExampleIn your company, you have decided that your stores are to work with SAP RetailStore. In Customizing, you specify which fields are to be displayed in the articlemaster and which can be changed. To simplify the maintenance of specific fields (forexample, entering additional EANs), you want to define a separate pushbutton thatstore employees can use to branch directly to these fields.

Task 1: Display and Change Article Master Data in SRSEmployees in your RP## store should be able to display and change article master datain SAP Retail Store. In Customizing, you specify the relevant functions and fields.

1. First navigate to SAP Retail Store and check which fields are displayed in thebasic data for article 317065. Are the fields Haz. Material Number and Countryof Origin displayed?

2. Now check which fields for article 317065 can be changed in theListing/Requirements Planning view. Can you discontinue this article?

Can you add a new source of supply in the Purchasing view?

Task 2: Basic Settings for the Article Master (SRS)You decide that employees in your store should not be able to discontinue articles orassign new sources of supply.

1. Navigate to Customizing for the basic settings for the article master and displaythe default Customizing schema Z001.

Since you want to configure the default Customizing schema, use the defaultschema 0001 as a copy template and copy it with the new key ZM##. Name itMaster data ##. You want to specify that employees cannot end listing or addvendors.

Assign your new ZM## schema to your RP## site.




Task 3: Basic Settings for the Maintenance DialogStructure (Tab Pages with Fields)You decide that the Haz. Material Number and Country of Origin fields should not bedisplayed in the basic data of the article master.

1. Navigate to Customizing for the basic settings for the maintenance dialogstructure (tab pages with fields) and display the default Customizing schema0001.

Since you want to configure the default Customizing schema, use the defaultschema 0001 as a copy template and copy it with the new key ZP##. Name itDialog structure ##.

Configure your Customizing schema so that in the program task Change, on theBasic Data tab page, the fields Country of Origin and Haz. Material Number areassigned the field attribute Hidden. Note that for the Country of Origin field twofield names are available which both have to be set accordingly.

Assign your new ZP## schema to your RP## site.

2. Return to SAP Retail Store and access the article master data in change mode.Use article 317065 as an example to check your Customizing settings in thebasic data, Listing/Requirements Planning and Purchasing views.

Task 4: Grouping Special Maintenance Functions(Optional)In the basic settings for the article master, you specified that additional EANs can beentered in the article master. You want this function to be executed using a separatepushbutton.

1. In Customizing, navigate to the grouping of special maintenance functions withpushbuttons for entry screen. Create a new grouping schema with the key ZG##.Name it Additional EAN ##. Configure your grouping schema by assigningthe following function:


OK Code EAN

Program Task 20

Tab Page Number 20

Pushbutton Text Additional EAN




Assign your new ZG## schema to your RP## site.

2. Return to SAP Retail Store and access the article master data in change mode.Use article 317065 to check your Customizing settings. What do you notice?

Task 5: Park ArticleIn your company, a store can add a new article to its assortment (for example, a localarticle). You want to configure the system so that the most important fields in thearticle master are ready for input.

1. In SAP Retail Store, branch to the Master Data – Article and choose Park. Firstcheck whetherartical XYZ with EAN 23070000## already exists. If the searchcriteria do not return any entries, park a new article.

The new article has the unit of measure EA; it is provided by vendor RPV1100 ata net price of USD 23.07/EA. You estimate the sales price to be USD 49.99.



Solution 26: Article Master Data in SRS

Task 1: Display and Change Article Master Data in SRSEmployees in your RP## store should be able to display and change article master datain SAP Retail Store. In Customizing, you specify the relevant functions and fields.

1. First navigate to SAP Retail Store and check which fields are displayed in thebasic data for article 317065. Are the fields Haz. Material Number and Countryof Origin displayed?

a) Master Data→ Article

Enter article number 317065 and choose Display. Branch to the Basic Data.The fields Haz. Material Number and Country of Origin are displayed.

2. Now check which fields for article 317065 can be changed in theListing/Requirements Planning view. Can you discontinue this article?

Can you add a new source of supply in the Purchasing view?


Enter article number 317065 and choose Change. Branch to theListing/Requirements Planning view. You can discontinue this article.

Branch to the Purchasing view. You can add a vendor as a new sourceof supply for this article.

Task 2: Basic Settings for the Article Master (SRS)You decide that employees in your store should not be able to discontinue articles orassign new sources of supply.

1. Navigate to Customizing for the basic settings for the article master and displaythe default Customizing schema Z001.

Since you want to configure the default Customizing schema, use the defaultschema 0001 as a copy template and copy it with the new key ZM##. Name itMaster data ##. You want to specify that employees cannot end listing or addvendors.




Assign your new ZM## schema to your RP## site.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Material Master→Basic Settings for the Article Master → Define Customizing Schemaswith Basic Settings

Select the standard schema 0001, choose Copy As..., and replace key 0001with ZM##. Enter the following settings:

- End listing is not allowed

- Adding a vendor is not allowed

b) IMG: IMG Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Material Master→ Basic Settings for the Article Master→ Assign Customizing Schemasto Sites


Task 3: Basic Settings for the Maintenance DialogStructure (Tab Pages with Fields)You decide that the Haz. Material Number and Country of Origin fields should not bedisplayed in the basic data of the article master.

1. Navigate to Customizing for the basic settings for the maintenance dialogstructure (tab pages with fields) and display the default Customizing schema0001.

Since you want to configure the default Customizing schema, use the defaultschema 0001 as a copy template and copy it with the new key ZP##. Name itDialog structure ##.

Configure your Customizing schema so that in the program task Change, on theBasic Data tab page, the fields Country of Origin and Haz. Material Number areassigned the field attribute Hidden. Note that for the Country of Origin field twofield names are available which both have to be set accordingly.




Assign your new ZP## schema to your RP## site.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→Material Master→ BasicSettings for the Maintenance Dialog Structure (Tab Pages with Fields)→Maintain Customizing Schema and Assign Tab Pages with Fields

Select the standard schema 0001, choose Copy As..., and replace key 0001with ZI##. Make your settings as specified in the task.

Hint: If error messages appear when you copy the schema, ignorethem by using the F12 key.

b) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→Material Master→ BasicSettings for the Maintenance Dialog Structure (Tab Pages with Fields)→Assignment of Customizing Schemas to Sites


2. Return to SAP Retail Store and access the article master data in change mode.Use article 317065 as an example to check your Customizing settings in thebasic data, Listing/Requirements Planning and Purchasing views.

a) Master Data → Article

Enter article number 317065 and choose Change. Branch to the BasicData. The fields Haz. Material Number and Country of Origin are nolonger displayed. Branch to the Listing/Requirements Planning view. Youcan no longer list the article. Switch to the Purchasing view. The Sourceof Supply pushbutton no longer appears.

Task 4: Grouping Special Maintenance Functions(Optional)In the basic settings for the article master, you specified that additional EANs can beentered in the article master. You want this function to be executed using a separatepushbutton.

1. In Customizing, navigate to the grouping of special maintenance functions withpushbuttons for entry screen. Create a new grouping schema with the key ZG##.Name it Additional EAN ##. Configure your grouping schema by assigningthe following function:





OK Code EAN

Program Task 20

Tab Page Number 20

Pushbutton Text Additional EAN

Assign your new ZG## schema to your RP## site.

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Material Master→Grouping of Special Maintenance Functions with Pushbuttons for EntryScreen→ Maintain Grouping Schema and Assign Functions

Configure your settings as specified in the task.

b) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Material Master→Grouping of Special Maintenance Functions with Pushbuttons for EntryScreen→ Assignment of Grouping Schema to Sites

Choose New Entries and enter your RP## store and the grouping schema inthe corresponding fields.

2. Return to SAP Retail Store and access the article master data in change mode.Use article 317065 to check your Customizing settings. What do you notice?


On the initial screen for the article master data of article 317065, there is anew pushbutton with the description Additional EAN ##. Choose thispushbutton. You then access the material master directly in the EANs view.

Task 5: Park ArticleIn your company, a store can add a new article to its assortment (for example, a localarticle). You want to configure the system so that the most important fields in thearticle master are ready for input.

1. In SAP Retail Store, branch to the Master Data – Article and choose Park. Firstcheck whetherartical XYZ with EAN 23070000## already exists. If the searchcriteria do not return any entries, park a new article.




The new article has the unit of measure EA; it is provided by vendor RPV1100 ata net price of USD 23.07/EA. You estimate the sales price to be USD 49.99.

a) Master Data→ Article→ Park

Enter the description and the EAN as specified in the task. Go to parkingfor the article. Configure the settings as specified in the task and savethe your entries.



Lesson Summary






Lesson: Vendor Master Data Maintenance

Lesson OverviewWhen vendor maintenance customizing is complete, store users may view and modifyvendor data. Store users may also propose new vendor master data.



Business ExampleStores can change vendor data for various reasons. For example, they may work witha specific, local outlet of a national of a national supplier and are therefore aware ofchanges before head office is informed. Also, some stores do direct purchasing andmight want to propose a new vendor. Data is entered in the store and parked, for laterprocessing by headquarters personnel.

Before using Vendor maintenance online, we must first Activate Local VendorsFunction and assign vendors to stores. We must also set additional parameters for theonline display and some limiting factors to ensure good performance.

Figure 283: Basic Settings for the Vendor Master


TIRT10_2 Lesson: Vendor Master Data Maintenance

The standard customizing schema for Vendor Master, provides for the article identifierto be EAN/UPC Code (EAN11). It could also be the internal SAP article number.

The Account Group for Parking determines how the Vendor number among otherthings is assigned. For controlling purposes, this number should be generatedinternally and the account group that is used by the purchasing department shouldbe used.

Number Bank Accounts, identifies the number of lines for entering bank accountsfor the vendors.

Figure 284: Basic Settings for the Maintenance Dialog Structure (Tab Pageswith Fields)

In the basic settings for the dialog structure, you determine the number of tab pagesand the fields that they contain. The provided schema contains all the fields availablefor vendor maintenance.



Figure 285: Grouping of Permitted Countries

With the “grouping of permitted countries” you determine the countries which are tobe available in the drop-down list on the online screen. This also speeds up the searchprocess by restricting the system to specific countries.



Exercise 27: Vendor Master Data


• Customize the vendor master data for SAP Retail Store

• Propose a new vendor using SAP Retail Store

Business ExampleIn your company, a store can create a new vendor (such as a local vendor) in themaster data. You want to check that these vendor master records are controlled usinga special account group, that they are initially blocked, and that they can be furtherprocessed by the respective store.

Task 1: Enter Vendor Master DataIn your store, you want to create a new, local vendor.

1. In SAP Retail Store, branch to the Master Data – Vendor and choose Park. Firstcheck whether vendor XYZ already exists. Create the XYZ company fromthe United States. ... “payable immediately due net”, and the baseline dateon end of the month.

Create the Mustermann company from the United States. Specify the region asAlabama and enter the postal code 35950. The company is based in Albertville;the minimum value is USD 5,000, the payment terms are “pay immediately duenet”, and the base date is the end of the month.

Note the number of the parked vendor master record.

_____________________________________

2. Branch to your SAP Retail system.

Master Data→ Vendor Data→ Edit Vendors→ Vendor→ Change→ Central

Enter your new vendor number and select all views. First check which accountgroup has been used to create your new vendor.

Then switch to the block data for the vendor and check that the vendor masterrecord is blocked for all purchasing organizations.

Now choose the additional retail data and check that the master record can befurther processed by the respective store.




Task 2: Customizing Settings for the Vendor Master(SRS)You now familiarize yourself with the Customizing settings for the vendor master.

1. Navigate to Customizing for the basic settings for the vendor master and displaythe default Customizing schema 0001. Which account group is assigned forparking?

2. In Customizing, choose Activate Local Vendors Function. What does it mean ifthis indicator is set?



Solution 27: Vendor Master Data

Task 1: Enter Vendor Master DataIn your store, you want to create a new, local vendor.

1. In SAP Retail Store, branch to the Master Data – Vendor and choose Park. Firstcheck whether vendor XYZ already exists. Create the XYZ company fromthe United States. ... “payable immediately due net”, and the baseline dateon end of the month.

Create the Mustermann company from the United States. Specify the region asAlabama and enter the postal code 35950. The company is based in Albertville;the minimum value is USD 5,000, the payment terms are “pay immediately duenet”, and the base date is the end of the month.

Note the number of the parked vendor master record.

_____________________________________

a) Master Data→ Vendor→ Park

Enter the information as specified in the task. Go to parking for the vendor.Make the settings as specified in the task and save the your entries.

2. Branch to your SAP Retail system.

Master Data→ Vendor Data→ Edit Vendors→ Vendor→ Change→ Central

Enter your new vendor number and select all views. First check which accountgroup has been used to create your new vendor.

Then switch to the block data for the vendor and check that the vendor masterrecord is blocked for all purchasing organizations.

Now choose the additional retail data and check that the master record can befurther processed by the respective store.

a) Extras→ Administrative Data

Account group ZLIE has been selected.

b) Extras→ Blocked Data

Your vendor master record is blocked for all purchasing organizations.

c) Go back and choose Retail Supplement.

The store that created the vendor master record is authorized to process itfurther.




Task 2: Customizing Settings for the Vendor Master(SRS)You now familiarize yourself with the Customizing settings for the vendor master.

1. Navigate to Customizing for the basic settings for the vendor master and displaythe default Customizing schema 0001. Which account group is assigned forparking?

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Vendor Master→ BasicSettings for the Vendor Master→ Define Customizing Schemas withBasic Settings

Account group ZLIE is assigned for parking vendor master records.

2. In Customizing, choose Activate Local Vendors Function. What does it meanif this indicator is set?

a) IMG: Logistics – General→ SAP Retail Store→ Vendor Master→Activate Local Vendors Function

If this indicator is set, the Retail Supplement pushbutton is displayed onthe default vendor master maintenance screen. Here, you can specifywhether the store that created the vendor master record is authorized toprocess it further.



Lesson Summary




TIRT10_2 Course Summary

Course SummaryYou should now be able to:

• Name the most important functions in SAP Retail

• Describe some related components and solutions that are connected to the SAPRetail solution


Course Summary TIRT10_2


GlossaryAccess sequence

An access sequence is a search strategy that defines the sequence in whichthe system searches through condition tables looking for relevant entries fora condition type. The sequence in which data is accessed is defined by thesequence of condition tables in the access sequence. A condition type for whichyou would like to maintain conditions at various data retention levels and with avalidity period must have an access sequence assigned to it.

Account Assignment CategoryThe account assignment category determines, among other things, the type ofaccount assignment, such as cost center or sales order, and to which accountsthe GR or invoice receipt is posted. An account assignment category is assignedto each item in a purchasing document. You can assign the relevant accountassignment category per item category (purchase order).

Activity profileA prerequisite for using the whole scope of PO monitoring is that you mustdefine an activity profile in Customizing in SAP Retail and assign it to yourvendor. You execute the assignment in the vendor master's purchasing dataor - if you want to use a special activity profile for an article - in the article'spurchasing info record. You use the activity profile to specify the activities (forexample, reminder, cancellation threat, date shift, etc.) that will deal with anydate variances and/or quantity variances that might arise.

Administrator Workbench (AWB)The Administrator Workbench (AWB) is the working environment for BIadministrators. SAP NetWeaver BI is configured, controlled, and managed usingAWB functions.

Allocation ruleYou can use an allocation rule to standardize the allocation process if youwant to allocate article quantities to specific stores more than once using thesame distribution key. Allocation rules therefore contain the sites to whichthe distribution is to be made. In addition, they can be valid for a specificmerchandise category or an article. The allocation rules define the allocationratios or allocation quantities, the site groups concerned and thus the sitesconcerned, and the merchandise category concerned or the articles concerned.


Glossary TIRT10_2

Allocation strategyThe allocation strategy takes the customer-specific requirements with respect todifferent allocation algorithms into account. In Customizing, you can assign eachallocation table type an allocation strategy which is then proposed by the systemwhen an allocation table with the corresponding allocation table type is created.You can use allocation strategies as an alternative to the following procedures:allocation rule, equal distribution of quantities when a site group is specified,and manual entry of quantities for each site. An allocation strategy is realizedin the system through a function module with a fixed interface. In addition tothe allocation strategies contained in SAP R/3, you can define your own. Thesystem executes the allocation strategy only if there are sites assigned to anallocation table item.

Allocation tableIn retail, it is often necessary to distribute merchandise centrally to a large numberof recipients (such as stores). An example of this is the distribution of fashiongoods or promotional merchandise in store retail. With the help of an allocationtable, SAP Retail allows you to plan such distribution and subsequently triggerthe merchandise flow. The planned merchandise flow can take place from thevendor directly to the recipient, from the vendor to a distribution center to therecipient, or from the distribution center to the recipient.

Allocation table listThis function allows you to select existing allocation tables and to display themin a list. This way, you can obtain an overview of the existing allocation tablesand go to the item overview of an allocation table, if necessary.

Allocation table typeThe allocation table type is defined in Customizing. It defines the followingparameters for an allocation table: number range interval and item interval. Itsupplies default data for the item category, the notification category, the allocationstrategy, the procedure used for message determination, and the check procedure.

Analysis LevelThe analysis level in the slow seller analysis (in SAP NetWeaver BI) defineswhich store(s) will be used to aggregate or individually examine sales, in order tocompare them (the determined sales) against the markdown proposals. Possibleselection options here are distribution chain, price list, assortment, cumulation(indicator whether the analysis level will be cumulated for examination) and site.

Analytical applicationAn analytical application is based on the consistent data stored in the DataWarehouse. These applications integrate business processes and containpredefined business scenarios that complement and support each other. Theyalso provide predefined key figures that measure the effectiveness of businessprocesses and give users the option of intervening to make corrections if required.


TIRT10_2 Glossary

Arrangement (Agreement) TypeAn arrangement must be assigned to an arrangement type. The arrangement typeis set in Customizing and defines various characteristics of the arrangement.Rebate arrangement types contain default values and control parameters, suchas settlement type, condition type group and rebate arrangement and settlementcalendar.

Arrangement calendarThe arrangement calendar defines the validity end date of arrangements andcontrols the extension of arrangements.

Assortment planningThe aim of assortment planning is to create assortments, thus deciding whichproducts are to be listed for which stores, and which quantities are to be assignedto the individual stores. Different levels can be planned within the articlehierarchy, for example, product (style), color (variant), or the price band.

Attributes for markdown profilesAttributes are used in SAP NetWeaver BI to describe markdown profiles inmore detail. These attributes are season, season year, the category level of thearticle hierarchy and the fashion grade.

Bonus buyYou require a condition type with an access sequence for the bonus buy. Thebonus buy is then created for this condition type. The agreement defines whatthe bonus buy is to apply to.

Business ContentBusiness Content constitutes preconfigured role and task-related data models inSAP NetWeaver BI that are based on consistent metadata. The Business Contentprovides selected roles in a company with the information they need to performtheir specific tasks.

Business Explorer (BEx)The Business Explorer (BEx) is the SAP NetWeaver BI component that providesa flexible reporting and analysis tool for strategic analysis and support purposes.If you have the necessary authorization, you can analyze different levels of bothhistorical and current data and from various perspectives, using both the Internetand Microsoft Excel.

Calculation schemaA calculation schema is a calculation rule for price determination. It consists ofseveral lines, each line containing a condition type.


Glossary TIRT10_2

Calculation valueThe pricing worklist is part of retail pricing. It saves pricing documents for eachitem for which there is a change in sales price. You process the pricing worklistfor particular articles and particular organizational units. Processing is completedby either accepting, i.e. saving the desired new sales prices, or by deleting theunaccepted calculation results.

Centrally agreed contractWhen the contract items within a contract relate to all of the sites in a purchasingorganization, we call this a centrally agreed contract.

CharacteristicsCharacteristics represent business evaluation objects, such as a company code,region, or store. In addition, time characteristics must also be defined, forexample fiscal year and calendar week. The master data includes the allowedvalues for a characteristic, the characteristic values. Units of characteristics canrepresent specifications of quantities or amounts (expressed in currencies).

Collective Purchase OrderCollective purchase orders are procurement documents and are used to planmerchandise distribution. You can use a collective purchase order to summarizerecipients' requirements that are recorded in the system, for example, as stocktransport orders or sales orders, for purchase order with the vendor (pull methodin merchandise distribution). Recipient documents (such as stock transportorders) are required in order to generate a collective purchase order. You thengroup these to form a collective purchase order. When you do this, you canspecify that the vendor is to perform specific services (such as prepacking) for anarticle.

Combination dealA combination deal is one of the possible types of bonus buy in a promotion.All prerequisites defined for the bonus buy must be met. The following exampleillustrates how combination deals are typically used: When a customer buys apair of skis and a pair of boots, you give them a free pair of sunglasses.

Condition groupA condition group can be used to group vendor conditions for particular articles.The condition group is assigned in the relevant purchasing info record; thecondition group itself is freely defined and is not stored in a Customizing table.

Condition RecordConditions are stored in the system as condition records. The condition tablesdefine key fields that enable conditions to be stored at different levels (dataretention levels).

Condition tableThe condition tables define key fields that enable conditions to be stored atdifferent levels (data retention levels).


TIRT10_2 Glossary

Condition typeCondition types are defined in Customizing. You can use the condition classto classify condition types, using the condition category to make a furthersubdivision. In the condition type you define how the system calculates thecondition value of a condition type. It can be a percentage of another condition, afixed amount or a quantity-dependent amount. Conditions of a condition typecan be negative or positive amounts. Negative amounts are markdowns, positiveamounts are markups. Scale bases for scales are also dependent on the conditiontype. Scales can relate to a quantity or a value, for example.

Condition types groupCondition type groups for promotions are created in Customizing. They existboth for purchasing and for sales. In a second step, the condition types areassigned to the corresponding condition type groups. By assigning category Ato a condition type group, you define that the condition type group and relatedcondition types are proposed from the promotion when a condition is created.

Confirmation control keyUse the confirmation control key to define the sequence in which the individualconfirmations (= confirmation categories) are due to arrive. The confirmationcategories determine when a confirmation must have already arrived and therelevance for requirements planning and goods receipt. The confirmation controlkey is defined in Customizing. It can be stored in the vendor or article masterdata. It is either copied to the order item from the vendor or article master data,or it can be entered in the order item manually. It is the prerequisite for carryingout Handling Unit Management if it contains the relevant confirmation categoryANLI (= inbound delivery). If you want to generate proof of delivery for thevendor, you must configure the confirmation control key accordingly. For moreinformation about this topic, see the SAP Library documentation for LogisticsExecution, Goods Receipt Process for Inbound Deliveries.

ContractA contract is a long-term agreement with a vendor on the delivery of articles atdefined conditions. The contract items can relate to a single site or to all sites in apurchasing organization. The contract does not contain information on specificdelivery dates or quantities for the individual deliveries. This information isstored in a contract release order or a schedule line, depending on the type ofoutline agreement.

Contract MonitorYou can use the contract monitor to monitor contracts that you have created usingtransaction ME31K or modified using transaction ME32K, and release orders thatyou have created during PO processing for seasonal procurement. You can alsocheck which releases have already taken place, have expired or are overbooked.


Glossary TIRT10_2

Contract release orderA contract release order is a purchase order with reference to a contract, and isupdated in this contract.A contract release order is a purchase order with reference to the contract

couponsCoupons are treated as articles in SAP Retail and therefore have their own articlemaster record (article type COUP). The article type controls which views forthe coupon article are maintained. Coupons entitle customers to a bonus whenthey buy merchandise. However, the bonus is only settled using a "bonus buy",which the coupon must be assigned to.

DataStoreA DataStore is used to store data in SAP NetWeaver BI at basic level (documentlevel). It is generally used to clean up and consolidate datasets. Datasets areoften from different data sources or source systems.

Date of transferThis deadline describes the transfer of risks time for goods from the seller to thepurchaser. The seller therefore has the transportation risk prior to the date oftransfer. The purchaser takes on the transportation risk from the goods transfertime. This deadline is defined automatically by scheduling according to yourCustomizing settings for the incoterm. There is therefore a direct dependencybetween the incoterm and a specific deadline.

Delivered valueThe delivered value is determined depending on the type of inventorymanagement: For article-based inventory management the following applies:delivered value of goods movement = received quantity * valuation price fromthe article master (normally, moving average price).

Delivery completed indicatorThe delivery completed indicator can be automatically proposed or set manuallyfor goods receipts. It is automatically proposed when the the quantity deliveredis within the under/overdelivery tolerance for the order quantity. Setting thedelivery completed indicator produces the following effects: The PO item isconsidered closed, even if the full quantity ordered has not been delivered.Although a delivery is not expected, it is still possible. In the next goods receipt,the item will not be defaulted as being a marked item on the selection list. ThePO item can be reorganized, even if the full quantity ordered has not beendelivered. Note: Even if the delivery completed indicator is not set, a PO item isconsidered closed when the total quantity has been delivered. This means that thedelivery completed indicator is not required in this case.


TIRT10_2 Glossary

Delivery scheduleA scheduling agreement is an outline agreement that is used to procure articleson predefined dates within a period. The total quantity of an article defined inthe scheduling agreement item can be subdivided into schedule lines in differentpartial quantities with associated delivery dates. This way, a schedule line canreplace a large number of purchase orders or contract release orders.

Distribution OrderA distribution order is a document that is generated during merchandise-drivenflow-through. It specifies the quantities of each article that are to be pickedfor the individual recipients.

Document typeSeparate document types are created for each purchasing document category(purchase requisition, purchase order, outline agreement). Subsequentrelationships between document types of various purchasing document categoriescan be stored by the document type assignment (via purchase requisition).Separate document types can be created for purchasing document categories ifrequired. For each document type, you can define separate number ranges forinternal or external number assignment. You must assign at least one numberrange.

Effective priceThe effective price is the net price minus cash discount and plus miscellaneousprovisions, delivery costs and non-deductible taxes.

Elastic articleRefers to the price elasticity of an article. If the customer's reaction to a pricechange for this article is very clear, then it is called an elastic article.

exclusive bonus quantityWith exclusive bonus quantities, the ordering party is charged for the merchandiseordered but receives additional goods free of charge. Exclusive bonus quantitiesare often referred to as exclusive discounts in kind, meaning that a certainquantity is granted as a discount in kind over and above the quantity ordered inthe purchase order. You receive more than you ordered, with no charge beingmade for the extra quantity. The exclusive bonus quantity allows the additionalarticle to be the same article or another article.

Exclusive indicatorThe exclusive indicator occurs in Customizing for access sequences per access.If set, the exclusive indicator defines that the search for further valid entries in(other) condition tables is terminated if the access was successful and a relevantentry was found. If this indicator is not set, all valid condition records are alsoincluded in the calculation.


Glossary TIRT10_2

Explicit price changeAn explicit price change is the direct change of a price in the Price PlanningWorkbench.

Field selection reference keyYou can use the field selection reference key to exclude fields from documentprocessing or mark them as optional/required fields.

Final settlementFinal settlement is the complete settlement of an arrangement once it has ceasedto be valid, and takes account of partial and interim settlements already carriedout. Successfully created settlements are posted automatically in Accounting.

Fixed periodsWhen creating a markdown profile, you opt for fixed periods if defined publicholidays, such as Christmas, or a shortage of storage capacity are involved. Forexample, Christmas tree decorations need to have been sold, if possible, byChristmas. This means that a fixed end date is assumed instead of a start date.The start date is then calculated, based on the life cycle of the profile. The sameapplies if a shortage of storage capacity dictates that sufficient storage space hasto be available for new goods on a fixed date.

FixtureThe fixture is a master data in SAP Retail which can enhance the layoutconcept so that you can arrange your assortment according to the position of thefixtures. Fixtures are used to display your goods on the sales area provided.This includes shelf sections, wall-mounted containers, rounders, freezers, etc.You can only place a limited number of fixtures on the sales floor provided.Fixtures are assigned to layout module versions. A fixture has a fixture number(alphanumeric, 10 digits), a fixture description (alphanumeric, 40 characters,can be maintained in different languages), and a fixture category (for example,rounders). A layout module version is made up of one or more fixtures.

Free-goods discountsFree-goods discounts are discounts in kind given on merchandise and are partof the price agreements made for an article. There are two free-goods discountcategories: Inclusive bonus quantity and exclusive bonus quantity.

General assortmentGeneral assortments can be assigned to any number of customers, and therecan also be several assignments per sales area. You can also assign them toany number of stores and distribution centers if you have selected the multipleassignment indicator in Customizing.

Gross priceThe gross price of an article is the price before discounts or surcharges.


TIRT10_2 Glossary

Group conditionsGroup condition is an indicator in Customizing for a condition type, whichensures that the condition flagged as the group condition applies to all items in adocument and is distributed automatically across the individual document items.

Grouped purchase order documentThe grouped purchase order document forms a link between the order listand the purchase order, and is therefore an internal preliminary level for thepurchase order. You can also use the OTB check function. To do so, define thepurchasing budget using the planned key figures in the Customizing settings forSAP NetWeaver BI. Use the release workbench to export the planned budget toSAP Retail. During the OTB check, the system determines the correspondingbudget number and then checks whether sufficient budget is available. Thesystem compares the target values transferred from planning with the actualvalues already used in purchasing documents that have already been generated.If sufficient budget is available, purchase orders can be generated and the systemupdates the document amount in the actual value used

Handling UnitThe term "handling unit" (HU) is the SAP term for a package (pallet, container,commercial truck) and describes a physical grouping of packaging materials (forexample, pallets, cardboard boxes, shrink film, containers, commercial trucks)and merchandise (for transport, storage, and consumption). Each handling unithas a unique identification number, so that it can easily be identified in thesystem. All data can be read using this number.

Header conditionsHeader conditions are conditions that apply to the entire document. Automaticprice determination cannot be used for header conditions. Therefore you cannotassign access sequences to header conditions (unless they are also defined as itemconditions) and you cannot create condition records for the header conditions. Aheader condition can be a percentage or a fixed amount. If you define a headercondition as a percentage discount or surcharge, the defined percentage appliesautomatically for all document items. If the header condition is a fixed amountand this condition is not additionally flagged as a group condition, the conditionamount of the header condition is assigned for each item.

Implicit price changeAn implicit price change is achieved by deactivating the price maintained at adata retention level such as price list or site and letting this price list or site inheritthe distribution channel price, which is higher than the specific price.


Glossary TIRT10_2

inclusive bonus quantityWith inclusive bonus quantities, the ordering party only pays for a part of thequantity of goods ordered. The remaining quantity is free. Inclusive bonuses arealso referred to as inclusive discounts in kind, meaning that a part of the quantityordered is given as a free-goods discount and not charged for.

Inelastic articleRefers to the price elasticity of an article. If the customer has little or no reactionto a price change for this article, it is called a non-elastic article.

InfoObjectsInfoObjects are characteristics and key figures.

InfoProvidersInfoProviders are objects in SAP NetWeaver BI that either physically containdata (as is the case for InfoCubes and DataStore objects) or that do not physicallycontain data (for example, MultiProviders).

Informative dateInformative dates are not process-relevant for scheduling seasonal procurement,as long as no operational dates depend on them and moving them does not causea delivery delay.

Internal contract apportionmentThe validity period of a contract is often longer than the duration of a budgetplanning period. For this reason, you must distribute the contract value acrossthe delivery periods that fall during the duration of the contract so that you canintegrate OTB-relevant contracts and their release orders into the OTB process.Internal contract apportionment helps you do that. Distribution can take placeaccording to quantity or value, and it is the foundation of OTB reservations.When you create or change an OTB-relevant contract, the system automaticallycreates an internal contract apportionment and opens it for processing when yousave. It also proposes a distribution. The default proposal is equal distribution.

inventory management typesIf inventory management for an article is carried out on a quantity and valuebasis, the stock quantity, stock value, and G/L accounts in Financial Accountingand Cost Accounting are usually updated. If inventory management is on aquantity basis only, no accounting data can be maintained in the article masterrecord. When a goods movement is posted, only the stock quantities are updated.The stock value, article, and G/L accounts in Financial Accounting and CostAccounting are not updated. If inventory management is on a value basis only,quantity information may be available for information purposes. The sales valuemust be managed for these articles. A valuation at purchase price and retail priceis carried out for each goods movement. These value-only articles can be used torealize non-article-based (value-only) inventory management at stores.


TIRT10_2 Glossary

Item category (purchase order)The item category defines whether the article number, account assignment, goodsreceipt or invoice receipt are possible or mandatory for an item. Which itemcategories are displayed depends on the document type. In Customizing, you candefine which item categories are allowed for which documents.

Item category in the allocation tableYou can realize a variety of business transactions in the allocation table usingthe item category (Customizing). The allocation table's item category controlsthe logistical process from the procurement of an article to its goods receipt atthe site. The item category proposes parameters for the method to be used withregard to the purchase order, the stock transfer, the delivery, the supply sourcedetermination, the scheduling, and the grouping of allocation table items infollow-on documents. Using follow-on document generation, you can generatedocuments for the worklists created through the allocation or directly for anallocation table or for allocation table items. This generation can be carriedout directly or in the background for the following business transactions: •Direct delivery orders of the stores at an external vendor • Merchandise flow viadistribution center to the recipient (customers or sites only) • Stock reduction bythe distribution center

Item ConditionsItem condition is an indicator in Customizing for a condition type, which ensuresthat the condition flagged as item condition applies to an individual item inthe document.

Key figuresKey figures are quantifiable values of all kinds that are used to measure technical,business, and human performance within the company. In addition to the keyfigures stored on the database, you can also define calculated (derived) keyfigures during query definition in the Business Explorer. These key figures canbe calculated from the key figures in the InfoProvider using a formula. Examplesof key figures: business volume, fixed costs, sales quantity, or number ofemployees. Examples of calculated key figures: business volume per employee,variance in percent, or contribution margin. Key figures can represent cumulativeor non-cumulative values. Since the latter are time-related, there are limits tohow far they can be aggregated. This applies particularly to stocks.

LayoutA layout consists of layout modules that represent a fixed area in a store (forexample, a shelf). You use layout areas to map the spatial assignment of thelayout modules in the layout. You can assign a layout to the assortments ofa store for assortment management.

Layout areasYou use layout areas to map the spatial assignment of layout modules in a layout.


Glossary TIRT10_2

Layout moduleEvery layout consists of layout modules that represent a fixed area in a store (forexample, a shelf). You use layout areas to map the spatial assignment of thelayout modules in the layout.

Layout module versionThe layout module version is a function of the Layout Workbench that letsyou create, change, and delete layout module versions. You can use multipleversions of a layout module with different validity periods, for example, becauseyou want planning for a shelf to take effect later rather than immediately. In alayout module, the validity periods for individual versions are unique and cannotoverlap. Due to the time-based scheduling for layout modules in versions, youcan map seasonal changes in a shelf quickly and easily.

Layout WBThe Layout Workbench provides a central point of access to all functions forspace management and layout. For example, you can display the layout with theassigned layout modules and their versions for a store in a hierarchy. The systemcan display the assigned articles not only for the layout module version, but alsofor the variant. If you use fixtures, the system also displays the fixtures that areassigned to a layout module version. You can select one or more layout moduleversions and display the fixtures assigned.

List groupOn the initial screen of the sales price calculation, you determine the layout onthe screen using a list group. It controls which data is displayed at drilldown(header) level and which data is displayed in the fixed part (item level) of thesales price calculation.

List variantsList variants serve to structure the list screen (pricing table) on which the salesprice calculation is carried out. You can use list variants to define which listfields should be visible in the pricing table. List variants control the selection andsequence of the table columns on the list screen. The column number definesthe order of the columns in the table.

Local assortmentWhen you create a site (that is, a store or distribution center), the systemautomatically creates a local assortment and then assigns it to the site. This localassortment is site-specific and cannot be assigned to another site. Each sitehas one local assortment. Local assortments are termed type A for stores andtype B for distribution centers.

Markdown controlThe markdown control takes place in SAP NetWeaver BI and begins for productswith the planned start of the presentation period or with the first goods receipt ata store. Markdown proposals are determined based on the sales and stock data


TIRT10_2 Glossary

and the rules defined. You can transfer the markdown proposals to a system inwhich the proposals are inspected and operational price changes are made ifnecessary. Data exchange can take place using the open XML standard andSAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure (SAP XI). You also have the optionof transferring markdown proposals directly to the pricing worklist in an SAPR/3 Retail system and continuing processing there.

Markdown planningMarkdown planning is performed in SAP NetWeaver BI. In doing so, you definestrategies and rules for generating markdown proposals during the control phase.

Markdown ProfileMarkdown profiles are defined in SAP NetWeaver BI. A markdown profileinvolves a price strategy that defines certain price reductions if the actual salesdata differs from the target data. The markdown profile contains time-relatedtarget data for the sale of an article during the lifecycle of the profile. Forexample, the sales data of an article which had optimal sales numbers in the sameseason in the previous year can be used as target sales ratios in a markdownprofile. This enables the system to monitor the sales data automatically and tonotify the processor if exceptions occur. The processor classifies the articles(assign a markdown profile) beforehand.

Merchandise and assortment planningSAP Merchandise and Assortment Planning (SAP MAP) consists of thecomponents strategic planning, store and merchandise planning, assortmentplanning, OTB planning, and slow seller management.

MessageWhen a purchase order is stored, an output method is created for the purchaseorder. This output format represents a type of message. The message type defineswhich information is to be sent, the format in which it is sent (for example,printed form, EDI, fax) and the time the message is sent: immediately after thepurchase order is stored, in defined intervals as part of a constant processingprogram, or upon request by the user after making a menu selection.

Multi-dealA multi-deal is one of the possible bonus buy types in a promotion. A multi-dealrequires at least one of the prerequisites defined for the bonus buy to be met(Example: every bar of chocolate from a particular shelf costs € 1, but anycombination of 3 bars of chocolate from this shelf costs only € 2).

Multi-planning areaYou use multi-planning areas if you want to be able to simultaneously accessthe data of two or more InfoCubes. The InfoCubes involved can have differentdata models without this causing any problem. Multi-planning areas areespecially useful if you want to read data from one planning area and writeit into another planning area. Multi-planning areas are planning areas that


Glossary TIRT10_2

combine the characteristics and key figures of multiple basic planning areas. Inaddition, a multi-planning area contains the automatically generated Planningarea characteristic which you can use to identify and select all of the groupedbasic planning areas. A multi-planning area does not contain any data of its own.

Net PricePrice including surcharges and discounts

Operational dateOperational dates control the goods movement process. They are permanentlyintegrated in the seasonal procurement process and are always calculatedautomatically by scheduling. If an operational date is not met, the deliverytime-spot is in jeopardy.

Opportunity curveAn opportunity curve forms the basis for the calculation of optimized pricesin SAP DM. It is created for each article grouping (articles are summarizedaccording to specific criteria) and shows the maximum attainable combinationsof profit and sales for this article/article grouping.

Order listThe order list is a grouping of potential purchase order items that are transferred(from operational assortment planning and control (OSPS) or an externalapplication) or that are created manually. The system uses fixed and variablecriteria to group these items in grouped purchase order documents or directly inpurchase orders.

OTB checkThe OTB check analyzes whether sufficient budget is available for the entiredocument or for each item. You cannot create a purchase order unless sufficientbudget is available. If you change other documents and in doing so transfertheir budget, you can create a positive OTB check result. If the OTB checkdetermines sufficient budget, you can generate the purchase order documentand send this to the vendor. The purchase order reports that the planned articlehas been ordered to OSPS planning.

OTB monitorYou can use the OTB monitor to check your planned budget. You can displaythe current budget values and check how much budget is still available. Youcan identify OTB-relevant purchasing documents that still reference a budgetnumber here. The budget is displayed according to the budget type and validityperiod (or planned period) in the worklist.

OTB planningOne of the central goals of seasonal procurement processes is to use the availablebudget efficiently. The cross-system application Open-to-Buy supports youin doing this in the following way: In SAP NetWeaver BI, you can use SAPBPS (Business Planning and Simulation) to map your retail planning and plan


TIRT10_2 Glossary

budgets. You can define the budgets flexibly and adjust them according toyour requirements. Once planning is complete, you can transfer the budgets toSAP Retail. The SAP Retail system takes the planned budgets into accountduring purchasing, for example in the OTB check when creating or changing apurchasing document.

OTB procurementThe OTB procurement function is used to create budget for purchase orders andgrouped purchase order documents that are found in the worklist with the status"OTB Check Negative", and achieve a positive OTB check result.

OTB ReservationWhen you create or change an OTB-relevant contract, the system only performsan OTB reservation, not an OTB check. The criteria for an OTB reservation arenot as strict as those for an OTB check. The budget required to cover the contractvalue is not considered to be exhausted by an OTB reservation; it is only reserved.

Perishables Planning ListA perishables planning list contains important data on each article and eachvendor from whom you can procure the article. This data allows you to obtaina good overview of the current market situation and make the right decisionsquickly before demand even arises.The assortment list for the site for whichplanning data is being created is the basis of the perishables planning list.The articles must be listed at this site. You can access further functions forprocurement and distribution from the perishables planning list. For example,you can change existing purchase orders.

Planned markupRetail companies usually calculate their sales prices using planned markups.These planned markups are added to the purchase price, allowing the sales pricefor the consumer to be calculated.

Planning areaPlanning areas are defined through their technical and descriptive name, thespecification of the BW system, and this system's InfoCube to be used. Oncean InfoCube has been assigned to a planning area, it cannot be assigned to anyother planning area. A planning area contains two components: A data basis thatprovides the planning data including master data, and the settings in the planningenvironment that allow manual or automatic processing of the planning data. Youcan group multiple planning areas in a multi-planning area.

Planning folderPlanning folders are used to summarize planning levels, planning packages,planning layouts, and planning functions within a previously defined planningarea that belong together from a business perspective. The objects that havebeen grouped together in this way are presented in a special user interface asa self-contained, easy-to-use planning application when the planning folder


Glossary TIRT10_2

is executed. Planning folders can facilitate navigation and give you a betteroverview within a planning session whenever you want to plan using a limitednumber of layouts, packages, and functions whose contents are related. Thisrelationship is established through common selection characteristics in allpackages involved as well as through planning functions that process the data ofan input layout to obtain results that are then displayed in output layouts.

Planning functionsPlanning functions modify transaction data of a planning package. Each planningfunction is assigned to exactly one planning level. There are different types ofplanning functions (such as copy, distribute, delete, formula). Parameter groupsare created for a planning function. When you define a planning function, youdefine which fields are used. When you define a parameter group, you enter thevalues for these fields.

Planning levelA planning level contains a number of characteristics and key figures of aplanning area. It defines the granularity of planning. It is aggregated using thecharacteristics of the planning area that are not contained in the planning level.You can specify selections for the characteristics in the planning level.

Planning methodsPlanning methods are assigned to a planning level. There are several types ofplanning methods. These include manual planning, the planning function, theplanning sequence, and documents.

Planning packageThe planning package copies the characteristics and key figures selected onthe planning level and is used to further restrict characteristics whose valueshave not already been restricted in the planning level. At the same time, theplanning package describes the data range in which the planning functionsoperate. You create planning packages to define subtasks within total planningand to separate them from one another. While you define the different planningthemes with respect to content by including a certain selection of key figures andcharacteristics in planning levels, you can distribute the subtasks that you havedefined as planning packages to the relevant employees responsible and let themprocess the planning packages independent of one another.

PO ManagerThe PO manager is a central higher-level workbench for seasonal procurement.Order lists, grouped purchase order documents and purchase orders are displayedin a worklist. You can also use separate transactions in the system to do so.

Price Activation LevelYou use the price activation level in the slow seller analysis to define the level atwhich to activate the markdown proposal. The possible selection options are theanalysis level, distribution chain, price list, site grouping and site.


TIRT10_2 Glossary

Price elasticity curvesPrice changes influence the customer's purchase behavior. You can use priceelasticity curves to measure how much the purchase behavior is influenced.

Price planning document (PPD)A price planning document (PPD) stores the results of the slow seller analysis(the changed sales prices). The validity period is saved at header level andtherefore applies to all items (exception: promotion). For the sales prices ofthe PPD to be activated, the PPD must be released. You can use an approvalprocedure to prevent unwanted price changes from being made when the budgetis overrun. Only specifically determined approvers can then grant the release.The sales prices are then created from the price plan with the correspondingvalidity. On the day the sales prices become active, the price plan should also beactivated. Price planning documents (PPD) can have different status values.

Price Planning TypeThe price planning type specifies, for example, which purchase price and salesprice determination sequence is used for calculating the sales price displayed inthe Price Planning Workbench and whether implicit or explicit price changesare allowed.

Price Planning Workbench (PPW)The Price Planning Workbench (PPW) is a new function in ERP 6.0 and providesoptions for processing markdowns, manual price changes, and promotions(creating promotions directly, postprocessing promotions). The Price PlanningWorkbench enables you to process markdowns, define new sales prices based onmarkdown proposals, calculate the markdown volume and compare these withthe available markdown budget transferred from SAP NetWeaver BI. You cancreate conditions manually and supply the POS systems with price change data.

Price point groupPrice points are fixed sales prices that the system uses as targets for rounding inthe sales price calculation function (retailers often use psychologically appealingprice points that are just below a round figure, such as € 2.79). You combineprice points by specifying price point ranges in a price point group. The pricepoint group is used for price point rounding in the sales price calculation. Aprice point interval is defined using two adjacent price points. The value of therounding is a percentage that uses the interval length of a price point interval todefine which part of an interval is to be rounded up. This part starts at the lowerinterval limit and ends at the upper interval limit of the price point interval.Customizing for Retail Pricing (additional parameters for pricing) first definesthe level at which to assign price point groups. You have two price point groupassignment categories available to you: Article Hierarchy and OrganizationalLevel / Merchandise Category.


Glossary TIRT10_2

Price pointsPrice points are fixed sales prices that the system uses as targets for roundingin the sales price calculation function. For example, retailers often usepsychologically appealing price points; prices that are just below a round figure,such as USD 2.99.

Pricing reference articlePricing reference article is a field that is relevant to the variant of a genericarticle. The generic article and its variants are used to simplify the master datamaintenance of articles that are essentially identical, differing only in certaincharacteristics. A similar simplification also applies to the maintenance of salesprices. This consists in the variants of a generic article being able to inherit thesales price of the generic article or another variant. Variants that inherit a salesprice cannot have their own sales prices created in the sales price calculation.The transfer of a sales price is controlled by the Pricing reference article fieldin the master data of the variants. You can specify a pricing reference article inthe basic data view or especially in the sales view. If you change the pricingreference article in the basic data view, this change is transferred to the sales viewfor the maintained distribution chains.

Pricing typeAn item (line) in a sales price calculation has been assigned a sales calculationschema using the pricing type. Pricing types are maintained in Customizing forRetail Pricing and are linked, in a second step, to a distribution chain and/ordistribution chain plus price list (with currency). The pricing type controlswhether pricing documents are created, whether the sales price or the markupis held when the purchase price is changed, which currency is to be used toperform the sales price calculation and which conversion rate is to be used toconvert foreign currencies.

Print indicatorYou set the print indicator for each condition type in the calculation schema. Itcontrols the output of the condition line in document output, for example whenprinting the purchase order.

Processing MethodA processing method for merchandise distribution defines how the merchandisein the distribution center is handled after goods receipt, and which follow-ondocuments are then generated. You select a processing method in the adjustmentprofile in Customizing, which in turn is assigned to a distribution profile forthe distribution center.

Promotion categoryYou use the promotion categories to classify promotions from a business pointof view. Technically, the promotion category is an attribute of the promotiontype and is assigned to this. Usually, the promotion category is the same as the


TIRT10_2 Glossary

promotion type and is a classification criterion in the information system. Inpractice, this means that promotions are indirectly classified by promotion typesin the information system. The promotion category can be used by customersto create hierarchies and to group together promotion types according to theparticular requirements. In this case, the same promotion category is stored forseveral promotion types and a separate info structure is defined for promotionswith the promotion category and promotion type as characteristics.

Promotion modulesIf you use the promotion listing to list articles in sites that are assigned to thepromotion, special promotion modules are created.

Promotion typePromotion types are defined in Customizing. You maintain parameters forpromotion control.

Purchase Order MonitorYou can perform activities such as date shifts, canceling purchase order items,dunning, deciding on remaining quantities automatically or manually in purchaseorder monitoring. This is only possible if the purchase orders used come fromseasonal procurement and you are using SAP Event Management (SAP EM),which is used to monitor events.

Purchase price determinationDetermining the purchase price in sales price calculation is known as purchaseprice determination.

Purchase price determination sequenceThe basic elements of the purchase price determination function are the purchaseprice determination types defined by SAP. In the initial screen of the sales pricecalculation, you need to specify a purchase price determination sequence. Thisspecifies the purchase price determination types that are to be used for purchaseprice determination, together with the relevant parameter values, thereby defininga sequence for the purchase price determination types.

Purchase price valuationValuating stocks of trading goods at cost prices (moving average price orstandard price) is called purchase price valuation. This is a requirement and partof balance sheet accounting. The purchase price valuation is always carried out ifgoods are posted to your stock (for example, goods receipt, returns from store toDC, consignments and so on). Your warehouse stock increases, as does the valueof your goods. You can specify the way in which you want to valuate your stockusing the valuation procedure: moving average price or standard price.

Quantity contractA quantity contract is a long-term agreement with a vendor on the delivery ofarticles at defined conditions. These apply for a defined period and a definedtotal purchase quantity.


Glossary TIRT10_2

QueryA Query comprises a selection of characteristics and key figures (InfoObjects)for analyzing the data in an InfoProvider. A query always refers to exactly oneInfoProvider, but any number of queries can be defined for an InfoProvider.

Regular vendorRegular vendor is an indicator in the purchasing view of the article master thatinfluences source of supply determination. If there is a valid source list entry,then the system checks whether it has been defined (in Customizing at site level)that a regular vendor may be set If so, then the system searches for a regularvendor among the recorded vendors in the source list. If no regular vendor exists,then the system uses the vendor with the cheapest net price in the info recordfrom the vendors in the source list.

Related ArticlesThe slow seller analysis allows you to enhance the worklist to include variants ofa generic article that have sold as planned, that is, do not have a planning variance.These are referred to as related articles, because they belong to the same genericarticle, but have another color or size. Example: The slow seller analysis hasdetermined markdown proposals for the school bags in colors red and blue, butnot for the variant with color green; this was sold as planned. If you want to markdown the school bag article for all specifications, the worklist is enriched with thegreen variant. This means that the variant green school bag is a related article.

Relative PeriodsWhen creating a markdown profile, you decide whether to create it with relativeor fixed periods. You select relative periods, if the lifecycle of a markdownprofile is to begin at the earliest with the first goods receipt of the articles in thestore. If, however, delivery is made later than planned or other circumstancesresult in delays, the start date of the life cycle of the markdown profile must bepostponed without shortening it. The reference date (date on which the salesperiod of the affected articles begins) is therefore the store GR date. The earliestGR date plus a tolerance that can be maintained in Customizing is used as thereference date for the life cycle of the markdown profile. The tolerance is usedsince the goods receipt date may be different in the stores that are analyzedtogether. This enables a start date appropriate to all stores to be calculated.

Release codeThe person or department that issues the approval for a release receives a releasecode and uses it in the system. The release code is a two-character key thatidentifies a release point. Each person involved in the release procedure givesapproval in a release transaction using their release code.


TIRT10_2 Glossary

Release criteriaThe release criteria define the release strategy that is to be used. If the value of arequest item is 1000, for example, it may require a particular release strategy.A value of 100,000, on the other hand, may require a different strategy, as theresponsibility for approving this may lie with another person.

Release indicatorThe release indicator is a code that indicates the release status. The releasestatus describes the current status of the document item. If final approval hasnot yet been given, for example, the status may be "Blocked". The release statusinforms the system of the processing steps that are still allowed for the item orthe document (for example, whether a purchase order can be created).

Release pointThe release point is the person or department that issues the approval for arelease. This is represented in the system by a release code. If a particularstrategy required the release of documents by a line superior and a controller, thisis achieved by assigning release codes to release points.

Release prerequisitesThe release prerequisites define the sequence of events for the release procedure.For example, release by the line superior could be the prerequisite for releaseby the controller.

Release ProcedureIf a purchase requisition or purchasing document meets certain requirements,an approval may be required before further processing can be carried out. Thisapproval process is mapped to the SAP system as a release procedure.

Release strategyThe release strategy specifies the approval transaction. It contains release criteria,codes and prerequisites.

Release WorkbenchThe markdown proposals generated in the slow seller analysis are released to theERP system in the Release Workbench.

Releasing Purchase RequisitionsIf purchase requisitions need to be released, this means that the RFQ or purchaseorder for the items contained in the purchase requisition must be approved.The purpose of this approval is to check that the items are correct in terms ofcontent and to ensure that account assignment and source of supply are alsocorrect. You can release a purchase requisition on an item-by-item basis or infull. The document type is used to control which of these options is used. Ifpurchasing documents (purchase order, contract, delivery schedule, RFQ) need tobe released, this means that the document data must be checked and approvedbefore the document is sent to the vendor. The purpose of this approval is toreplace manual signature procedures by electronic ones.


Glossary TIRT10_2

RoleA role relates to a specific function in a company, for example, PurchasingManager. It is linked to a particular task area, area of responsibility, and theinformation required for these.

Sales price calculationSales price determination in sales price calculation is performed based on a salesprice calculation schema. This procedure is a calculation rule for calculatingthe sales price from the purchase price. The system uses the main conditionscontained in the procedure to read the price determination information requiredfor this calculation, such as the planned markup (planned margin) or competitorprices, from the database. In Customizing for Retail Pricing (Control Data forPricing Table and Data Backup), you define how the list fields are filled in thesales price calculation. The data transport can take place either via a subtotal orvia a condition type. In the sales price calculation schema, the calculation ofthe sales price begins with the value of condition type EKNN. The sales pricecalculation schema must be structured according to a markup calculation, so thatcondition types AUFS and AUFX can be used to cover planned markups. Theactual markup is linked via a subtotal to condition types AUFS and AUFX. Thelist fields (net) sales price and (gross) sales price are also connected to the salesprice calculation schema via subtotals. For these list fields and the actual markup,the data transfer between the sales price calculation schema and the pricing tablemust be specified. No control can be created for list fields calculated by theprogram logic, such as margin (net) and margin (gross). The gross and net pricesmay differ in their inclusion of taxes (condition type MWST). If rounding toprice points has been defined, the (gross) sales price determined using the salesprice calculation schema is rounded and the calculation is adjusted retroactivelyto reflect the rounded final price.

Sales price determinationDetermination of default values for the sales prices in the sales price calculation.

Sales price determination sequenceAfter the sales price determination types, sales price determination sequencesconstitute the second element in the flexible structure of sales pricedetermination. Sales price determination sequences 01 to 06 are supplied asstandard. In Customizing for Retail Pricing, you can define additional salesprice determination sequences.

Sales price determination typeBesides defining the sales prices themselves, determining the margin (gross/net)or the actual markup from the sales and purchase prices are key steps in thesales price calculation process. You can use different calculation procedures,


TIRT10_2 Glossary

depending on whether the margin or the sales price is to be supplied. Thereare also several procedures for determining the sales price in the sales pricecalculation after the basic purchase price has been changed.

Schema determinationThe schema determination consists of the schema group for the purchasingorganization and the schema group for the vendor. The combination of thesetwo groups is assigned the relevant calculation schema. This allows eachpurchasing organization and each vendor to have its own calculation schema,or several vendors to whom you want to assign the same calculation schema tobe combined into one group.

Schema groupA schema group is a two-digit key used in purchase price determination todetermine the relevant calculation schema. Schema groups are assigned to thevendors and purchasing organization(s).

Settlement basisIf you wish to execute final settlement for your rebate arrangement, a businessvolume comparison first needs to be performed. This is used to locatediscrepancies in these values and allows a value acceptable to both parties tobe agreed before final settlement is performed, thereby avoiding the need forcorrections to be made at a later date. The volume of business done with thevendor is updated and compared. If the two values (the business volume that youhave updated and that updated by the vendor) are not the same, you can enter anagreed value. The agreed value is then used as the basis for final settlement.

Settlement calendarSettlement calendars are used in rebate arrangements. The settlement calendardefines the times at which partial settlement is possible.

Settlement schemaThe settlement schema for the settlement of rebate arrangements is a calculationrule and consists of several lines, where each line contains a condition type.The condition types SBCB (as basis), S000 (for the summation of partial andinterim settlements) and MWST (for the tax) must be contained in the settlementschema. Grades and counters define which condition types are to be taken intoaccount and in which order. Furthermore, you must assign the account key foreach condition type in the settlement schema B01 if provisions for accruedincome are to be created for the condition. Account key B02 is used to settle theincomes. An advantage of creating accruals is that they correct the stock valuesof the affected articles in a price valuation according to MAP (moving averageprice). The default settlement schema is RM5000. Only condition types that areused in both the purchase price calculation schema of price determination and thesettlement schema can be taken into account.


Glossary TIRT10_2

Settlement typeThe settlement type controls whether an arrangement in Purchasing is settled oncredit or debit side, and whether settlement accounting is performed at site orpurchasing organization level. A credit-side settlement means that the conditiongranter (vendor) issues one or more credit memos to purchasing (settlementdocuments are vendor billing documents). A debit-side settlement means that thepurchasing unit granting the condition issues one or more billing documents tothe vendor (SD billing documents are used as settlement document).

Shipping NotificationShipping notifications are used by vendors to announce the delivery of articles.The vendor sends information about the delivery date, delivery time, deliveryquantities and the articles that are to be delivered. The shipping notificationis based on one or more purchase orders that have been placed with the samevendor. An inbound delivery is created for the shipping notification or in EDI.Inbound deliveries can be used as reference documents for the (rough) goodsreceipt that follows.

Slow Seller AnalysisThe slow seller analysis uses sales and stock data in SAP NetWeaver BI togenerate proposals for price changes using the markdown profiles.

Slow seller managementSlow seller management: The aim of slow seller management is to ensure that atthe end of a selling period the smallest possible amount of stock (particularlyfor fashion or high-fashion goods) remains, so that the number of markdownsis kept to a minimum.The Slow Seller Management component is part of the SAP NetWeaver BI(Business Intelligence) solution and belongs to merchandise and assortmentplanning. It enables you to carry out time-related planning of markdowns andhence reduce stock at the end of a season and reduce markdown losses due toprice reductions. The aim of slow seller management is to ensure that at the endof a selling period the smallest possible amount of stock (particularly for fashionor high-fashion goods) remains, thus keeping the number of markdowns to aminimum. The Slow Seller Management process is subdivided into markdownplanning and markdown control.

Space management programA space management program (SMP) serves only information purposes and canbe used to determine the current stock of a shelf and to analyze profitability andspace utilization, among other things.

Standard price valuationIf you have decided on article-specific inventory management and standard-pricevaluation, you define S for standard price as the price control procedure with acorresponding standard price in the article master record. The purchase price is


TIRT10_2 Glossary

stored in the purchasing view under condition type PB00. If the purchase priceis defined before the standard price in the article master, it is transferred as thedefault value for it. Most goods movements in inventory management changethe stock quantity and hence also the stock value. Goods receipts increase thestock value, goods issues reduce it. With all goods movements (for example, agoods receipt), articles for which price control procedure S has been defined arevaluated with the standard price. If differences occur (for example, purchase andstandard price differ), they are posted to a price difference account.

Store and merchandise planningThe store plan is the concrete embodiment of the strategic plan, taking a varietyof factors in the store hierarchy into account, such as regional marketing,competition, demographic changes and preferences, and certain events. Bycontrast, merchandise planning is the more detailed embodiment of thehigher-level, strategic guidelines. Planning takes place along the merchandisecategory hierarchy, but no details are given about the actual merchandise.

Strategic planningIn the strategic plan, also referred to as the business plan, a retail companydefines its strategic targets. The business plan is created on the highest level forthe entire firm, but also for individual distribution channels or higher levelsof the merchandise hierarchy.

Supplementary Logistics ServicesSupplementary logistics services (SLS) are article-specific services supportedby logistics. You can use the functions for SLS to order prepacked merchandiseas a distribution center. You can only generate SLS subitems in a collectivepurchase order in purchase order generation.

Supply Source DeterminationSupply source determination is part of purchase price determination andtakes place at the beginning of a sales price calculation. The supply sourcedetermination is used to determine the vendors (sources of supply) for theselected articles and organizational levels. It uses the system settings to dothis. Both external and internal vendors (distribution centers) can be sources ofsupply. If purchase price determination type A (standard) is used, this pricedetermination is performed by means of a purchase price calculation schema inthe case of an external vendor and by means of a sales price calculation schemain the case of an internal vendor.

Theme (promotion)Themes are used to subdivide a promotion.


Glossary TIRT10_2

Transportation chainThe sequence of deadlines is defined by the transportation chain. Deadlines arerecorded with their name and the period of time without a specific date. Thesystem records the dates calculated by scheduling in a dateline. Dates appear inthe dateline with their name, period of time since the preceding deadline and aspecific date. The dateline is displayed in all seasonal procurement documents.

Upper/lower limitThe lower and upper limits for a condition type are used to define a price rangethat limits the possibility of making manual price changes in the document. If,during document creation, the range is exceeded or not achieved, a correspondingerror message is displayed. When condition records are maintained, the systemalso checks whether any scale values fall below the lower limit.

Valuation at the moving average priceIf you have decided on article-specific inventory management and valuation atthe moving average price , you define V for MAP as the price control procedurewith a corresponding valuation price in the article master record The purchaseprice is stored in the purchasing view under condition type PB00. If the purchaseprice is defined before the standard price in the article master, it is transferred asthe default value for the moving average price. The moving average price is usedfor posting the first goods receipt. If you have not yet entered a purchase price(PB00) in the master data, the value 0 is taken as the MAP.

Value contractA value contract is a long-term agreement with a vendor on the delivery ofarticles at defined conditions. These apply for a defined period and a specifictotal purchase quantity.

VariablesYou can use variables to reduce the amount of recurring Customizing work in theplanning environment. You do this by using variables at a central point withina planning area to restrict characteristics to a value or value range that you candefine. You can also determine these values through a selection of hierarchynodes or attributes. The setting for the characteristic value that you define in thisway automatically takes effect everywhere within the planning area where thevariable you have defined is referenced as a selection for the correspondingcharacteristic. You can also create variables for numeric values that do not referto a characteristic.

WorkbooksWorkbooks are used to display queries. This involves creating a link betweencell areas of the workbook and the data in the InfoProvider on which the query isbased. This connects the BEx and the SAP NetWeaver BI server.


FeedbackSAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure the accuracyand completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections or suggestions forimprovement, please record them in the appropriate place in the course evaluation.
